2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual (Include Mex) - 2012 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-19
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-30
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-41
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-52
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-68
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19
Special Application Vehicle Data Recording and
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Recommended Fluids, OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15 OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase, A French language copy of this
or due to changes subsequent to manual can be obtained from your
the printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
CAMARO, and the CAMARO Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
Emblem are trademarks and/or 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Keep this manual in the vehicle for
or licensors. quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22825335 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index. Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls : : Oil Pressure
or OnStar } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-9
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Remote System . . .
1-16
1-17
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Traction Control
Initial Drive Information System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Tire Sealant and
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-14 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-14 Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Driver Information Roadside Assistance
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑4. I. Data Link Connector (DLC) Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑14.
B. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. (Out of View). See Malfunction Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
See Turn and Lane-Change Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18. on page 5‑12.
Signals on page 6‑5. J. Exterior Lamp Controls on Engine Oil Pressure Gauge on
Headlamp High/Low-Beam page 6‑1. page 5‑11.
Changer on page 6‑2. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) on
Flash-to-Pass on page 6‑3. (If Equipped). page 5‑10.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Instrument Panel Illumination R. Traction Control System (TCS)
Buttons (If Equipped). See Control on page 6‑6. on page 9‑41.
Driver Information Center (DIC) K. Cruise Control on page 9‑50. Performance Traction
on page 5‑26. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Management (PTM). See
C. Driver Shift Controls (If page 5‑2. Competitive Driving Mode on
Equipped). See Automatic M. Horn on page 5‑3. page 9‑44 (ZL1 Model Only).
Transmission on page 9‑30. S. Shift Lever. See Automatic
N. Steering Wheel Controls on
D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7. page 5‑2. Transmission on page 9‑30 or
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Manual Transmission on
O. Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 9‑37.
page 5‑3. page 5‑30 (If Equipped).
F. Light Sensor. See Automatic T. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
P. Climate Control Systems on
Headlamp System on page 6‑3. page 8‑1. U. Hazard Warning Flashers on
G. Infotainment on page 7‑1. page 6‑4.
Q. Transmission Temperature
H. Hood Release (Out of View). Gauge (Except ZL1) on Power Door Locks on page 2‑8.
See Hood on page 10‑5. page 5‑14.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Entry Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Information (RKE) System Personalization on page 5‑46.
The RKE transmitter will work up to
This section provides a brief
20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle. Press and hold V to open the
overview about some of the trunk.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle. Press and release 7 to locate the
vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be Press and hold 7 for at least
found later in this owner manual. two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Press the key release button to
extend the key blade. The key can
be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press K to unlock the driver door or
all doors.
Press Q to lock all doors.
In Brief 1-5
. From the outside turn the key
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start
clockwise or counterclockwise,
For vehicles with this feature, the To cancel a remote start, do one of
or press Q or K on the Remote
engine can be started from outside the following:
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
the vehicle. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the See Door Locks on page 2‑7 or
Starting the Vehicle vehicle and press and hold / Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
until the parking lamps turn off. System Operation on page 2‑3.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning Power Door Locks
flashers.
2. Press and release Q. There is a power door lock switch
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. on the instrument panel and on the
3. Immediately after completing front door panels.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
Step 2, press and hold / until page 2‑5. Q: Press to lock the doors.
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about two seconds if the vehicle K: Press to unlock the doors.
Door Locks
is not in view. See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8.
To lock or unlock a door:
When the engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as . To lock the door from the inside, Trunk Release
long as the engine is running. The use the door lock knob on the
The trunk may be opened by
doors will be locked and the climate top of the door.
pressing the remote trunk release
control system may come on. . To unlock the door from inside, button located on the lower portion
The engine will continue to run for pull the handle once. Pulling the of the driver door or V on the
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a handle again unlatches the door. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
10-minute time extension. Remote transmitter. See Trunk on page 2‑9.
start can be extended only once.
1-6 In Brief
. Raise or lower the front part of
Seat Adjustment Power Seats
the seat cushion by moving the
Manual Seats front of the horizontal control up
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
To raise or recline the seatback, tilt
the vertical control forward or
rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the seat, if equipped: on page 3‑4.
1. Lift the handle under the seat to To adjust the seat, if equipped:
unlock it. . Move the seat forward or
2. Slide the seat and release the rearward by sliding the
handle. horizontal control forward or
3. Try to move the seat back and rearward.
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
In Brief 1-7
Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
If available, press L or M to turn on position.
the heated seat. A light indicates See Head Restraints on page 3‑2
this feature is on. and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
To operate, the engine must be Refer to the following sections for
running. important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.
the button, the heated seat will . How to Wear Safety Belts
change to the next lower setting, Properly on page 3‑9.
and then the off setting. Two lights . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.
indicate the highest setting, and one
light indicates the lowest. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑41.
page 3‑6.
1-8 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status To adjust each mirror:

indicator will be visible on the
System overhead console when the vehicle
1. Press the switch to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
is started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑25 for more 2. Press one of the four sides on
information. the h (control pad) to adjust the
mirror.
Mirror Adjustment 3. Adjust each outside mirror so
Exterior that a little of the vehicle and the
United States area behind it can be seen.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑13.
Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag and
roof‐rail airbags, if equipped, are not Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar
affected by the passenger sensing
Vehicles with outside power mirrors
system.
have controls located on the driver
door armrest.
In Brief 1-9
Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjust the inside rearview mirror for Adjustment Dome Lamps
a clear view of the area behind your
vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use. See Manual
Rearview Mirror on page 2‑14.
On vehicles with an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror. The
mirror reduces glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind
you. The dimming feature comes on The dome lamp buttons are located
and the indicator light illuminates overhead near the rearview mirror.
each time the vehicle is started. See
To change the settings, press the
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror To adjust the steering wheel: following:
on page 2‑14.
1. Pull the lever down.
( : Turns the lamp off, even
2. Move the steering wheel up when a door is open.
or down.
H : Turns the lamp on
3. Pull or push the steering wheel automatically when a door is
closer or away from you. opened.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the ': Turns the lamp on.
steering wheel in place.
For more information on interior
Do not adjust the steering wheel lighting, see Instrument Panel
while driving. Illumination Control on page 6‑6.
1-10 In Brief
Exterior Lighting ; : Use to turn on the parking Windshield Wiper/Washer

lamps together with the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, license plate
lamps and instrument panel lights.
5 : Use to turn on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, sidemarker lamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights. The windshield wiper lever is on the
#: Use to turn the fog lamps on or side of the steering column. With
off. The fog lamps come on together the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or
The exterior lamps control is on the ON/RUN, move the windshield
instrument panel, on the outboard with the parking lamps, taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, license plate wiper lever to select the wiper
side of the steering wheel. speed.
lamps, and instrument panel lights.
The exterior lamps control has 2: Use for fast wipes.
four positions: For more information, see:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 1: Use for slow wipes.
P: Briefly turn to this position to
page 6‑1.
turn the automatic light control off or
on again. When released, the . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
control returns to the AUTO on page 6‑3.
position. . Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
AUTO: Use to automatically turn on
the headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, sidemarker lamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
In Brief 1-11
3: Move the lever up to 3 for Climate Controls

adjustable interval wipes, then turn
the band up for more frequent wipes The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be
or down for less frequent wipes. controlled with this system.
9 : Use to turn the windshield

wipers off.
3 : To use for a single wipe,
briefly move the wiper lever down.
For several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.
A. Fan Control F. Defrost
3: Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield B. Heated Seats G. Rear Window Defogger
washer fluid and activate the wipers. C. Temperature Control H. Recirculation
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on D. Air Delivery Mode Controls See Climate Control Systems on
page 5‑3. page 8‑1.
E. Air Conditioning
1-12 In Brief
Transmission Electronic Range Select Manual Transmission

(ERS) Mode
Automatic Transmission One to Four Shift Message
Vehicles with axle code GW8 have (V8 Only)
Tap Shift an ERS mode. ERS mode allows
you to choose the top-gear limit of
Tap Shift allows the driver to
the transmission with fully automatic
manually control the automatic
gear selection. This can help control
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
the vehicle's speed while driving
shift lever must be in M (Manual
downhill or towing a trailer. The
Mode) or D (Drive). Vehicles with
vehicle has an electronic shift
this feature have indicators on the
position indicator within the
steering wheel. The controls are on instrument panel cluster. When
the back of the steering wheel. Tap
using the ERS mode a number will
the left control to downshift, and the
display next to the M, indicating the
right control to upshift. A Driver
current maximum gear allowed.
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to When this message comes on, you
M (Manual Mode). can only shift from 1 (First) to
2. Press the plus/minus buttons 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
located on the back of the 2 (Second). The message will be
steering wheel, to increase or displayed in the Driver Information
decrease the gear range Center. See Manual Transmission
available. on page 9‑37.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑34.

In Brief 1-13
Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station 4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

adjust the highlighted value.
Stations from all bands can be
Radio(s) stored in the favorite lists in any 5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
order. Up to six stations can be to select the next value.
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system stored in each favorite page and the 6. To save the time or date and
on and off. Turn to increase or number of available favorite pages return to the Time and Date
decrease the volume. can be set. Settings menu, press the
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose To store the station to a position in / BACK button at any time or
between FM, AM, or XM™, the list, press the corresponding press the MENU/SELECT knob
if equipped. numeric button 1−6 until the station after adjusting the minutes.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to select can be heard again.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
radio stations. For more information, see “Storing
1. Press the CONFIG button.
and Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FM
SEEK 7 : Press to seek the Radio on page 7‑8. 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
previous radio station or track.
Setting the Clock 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
SEEK 6 : Press to seek the next 4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
radio station or track. Adjusting the Time
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
Buttons 1−6: Press to save and The clock menu can only be used display format.
select favorite stations. with the radio on while in ON/RUN
For detailed instructions on setting
or ACC/ACCESSORY.
INFO: Press to show available the clock, see Clock on page 5‑5.
information about the current station 1. Press the CONFIG button.
or track. 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
For more information about these 3. Select Set Time.
and other radio features, see
Overview on page 7‑3.
1-14 In Brief
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)

on page 7‑28 or Bluetooth
Vehicles with an XM™ satellite radio Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm (Infotainment Controls) on
tuner and a valid XM satellite radio (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Overview)
subscription can receive XM port located in the center console. on page 7‑23.
programming. External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD Steering Wheel Controls
XM Satellite Radio Service changers, and USB drives may be
XM is a satellite radio service based connected, depending on the audio
in the 48 contiguous United States system.
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑17.
satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
Bluetooth®
digital-quality sound. A fee is The Bluetooth system allows users
required to receive the XM service. with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
Refer to:
calls using the vehicle audio system
. www.xmradio.com or call and controls.
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
. www.xmradio.ca or call must be paired with the in-vehicle
1-877-438-9677 (Canada). Bluetooth system before it can be Some audio steering wheel controls
used in the vehicle. Not all phones can be adjusted at the steering
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10. wheel.
will support all functions.
b / g : Press to interact with the
available Bluetooth or OnStar
systems.
In Brief 1-15
$ / i : Press to silence the Cruise Control \: Press to disengage cruise

vehicle speakers only. Press again control without erasing the set
to turn the sound on. For vehicles speed from memory.
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems, RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to
press to reject an incoming call, make the vehicle resume to a
or end a current call. previously set speed or to
_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio accelerate to a higher speed.
source. SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down
Turn up or down to select the next to set a speed or to make the
or previous favorite radio station, vehicle decelerate.
CD, or MP3 track. See Cruise Control on page 9‑50.
+ x −: Press + to increase the
volume; press − to decrease the
volume. The cruise control buttons are
See Steering Wheel Controls on located on the outboard side of the
page 5‑2. steering wheel.
5 : Press to turn the cruise control
system on and off. An indicator light
comes on in the instrument panel
cluster.
1-16 In Brief
Driver Information C. MENU: Press to display the Power Outlets

Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle
Center (DIC) Information menu. This button is The vehicle has two accessory
The DIC display is located in the also used to return to or exit the power outlets; one is located below
center of the instrument panel last screen displayed on the climate control system and the
cluster. It shows the status of many the DIC. other is inside the center console
vehicle systems. The controls for storage. They can be used to plug
See Driver Information Center (DIC) in electrical equipment, such as a
the DIC are located on the turn on page 5‑26.
signal lever. cell phone or an MP3 player.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist The accessory power outlets do not

work when the key is removed from
If available, the Ultrasonic Rear the ignition and the driver door is
Parking Assist (URPA) system uses opened. This helps to preserve the
sensors on the rear bumper to battery life of the vehicle.
assist with parking and avoiding
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
objects while in R (Reverse).
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear It operates at speeds less than
the menu item when it is 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible
displayed. beeps to provide distance and
system information.
B. w / x : Use the thumbwheel Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
to scroll through the items in rear bumper clean to ensure proper
each menu. operation.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑52.
In Brief 1-17
Universal Remote System Sunroof Express-open: Press and release

the rear of the switch two times to
The ignition must be in ON/RUN, express-open the sunroof.
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) to operate Vent: Press and release the rear of
the sunroof. See Retained the switch to vent the sunroof.
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑25. Convertible
The sunroof switches are on the If equipped, the convertible top can
This system provides a way to overhead console. be lowered and stowed under the
replace up to three remote control tonneau cover behind the rear seat.
transmitters used to activate For step-by-step instructions, see
devices such as garage door Convertible Top on page 2‑19.
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Remote
system.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑49. Open/Close: Press and hold the
rear or front of the switch to open or
close the sunroof.
1-18 In Brief
Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance StabiliTrak assists with directional This vehicle may have a Tire
control of the vehicle in difficult Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
driving conditions. The system turns
Traction Control on automatically every time the
System (TCS) vehicle is started.
The traction control system limits . To turn off both traction control
wheel spin. The system turns on and electronic stability control,
automatically every time the vehicle press and hold the TCS/
is started. StabiliTrak button g located on
. To turn off traction control, press the console in front of the shift The TPMS warning light alerts you
and release the TCS/StabiliTrak to a significant loss in pressure of
lever. i and g illuminate. one of the vehicle's tires. If the
button g located on the console warning light comes on, stop as
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
in front of the shift lever. i again to turn on both systems. soon as possible and inflate the
illuminates. tires to the recommended pressure
See StabiliTrak® System on
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button shown on the Tire and Loading
page 9‑43.
again to turn traction control Information label. See Vehicle Load
back on. Limits on page 9‑14. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
See Traction Control System (TCS) pressure is corrected.
on page 9‑41.
In Brief 1-19
During cooler conditions, the low tire If the vehicle came with a spare tire Driving for Better Fuel
pressure warning light may appear and tire changing equipment, see If
when the vehicle is first started and a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑77.
Economy
then turn off. This may be an early Driving habits can affect fuel
indicator that the tire pressures are Engine Oil Life System mileage. Here are some driving tips
getting low and the tires need to be to get the best fuel economy
inflated to the proper pressure. The engine oil life system calculates possible.
engine oil life based on vehicle use
The TPMS does not replace normal and displays the CHANGE ENGINE . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
monthly tire maintenance. It is the OIL SOON message when it is time smoothly.
driver’s responsibility to maintain to change the engine oil and filter. . Brake gradually and avoid
correct tire pressures. The oil life system should be reset abrupt stops.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System to 100% only following an oil
change.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
on page 10‑64.
periods of time.
Resetting the Oil Life System
Tire Sealant and . When road and weather
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with conditions are appropriate, use
Compressor Kit the engine off. cruise control.
This vehicle may come with a spare 2. Fully press and release the . Always follow posted speed
tire and tire changing equipment or accelerator pedal three times limits or drive more slowly when
a tire sealant and compressor kit. within five seconds. conditions require.
The kit can be used to temporarily
seal small punctures in the tread See Engine Oil Life System on . Keep vehicle tires properly
area of the tire. page 10‑16. inflated.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor . Combine several trips into a
Kit on page 10‑78 for complete single trip.
operating information.
1-20 In Brief
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar®
.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
the same TPC Spec number (U.S. and Canada)
molded into the tire's sidewall If equipped, this vehicle has a
near the size. If you have an active OnStar comprehensive, in-vehicle system
subscription, press the Q button that can connect to a live Advisor
. Follow recommended scheduled
and the current GPS location will be for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
maintenance.
sent to an OnStar advisor who will Connection, and Diagnostic
assess your problem, contact Services. See OnStar Overview on
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance, and relay page 14‑1.
Program your exact location to get the help
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 you need.
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 Online Owner Center (U.S. and

Canada)
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
The Online Owner Center is a
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 complimentary service that includes
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, online service reminders, vehicle
you are automatically enrolled in the maintenance tips, online owner
Roadside Assistance program. manual, special privileges,
and more.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or Sign up today at:
Roadside Assistance Program U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. “Owners,” then “Manage My
Chevrolet/Owners Login”)
Canada: chevroletowner.ca
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-13
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
The key that is part of the Remote Press the key release button on the
or even make the vehicle move.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can RKE transmitter to extend the key
The windows will function with the be used for the ignition and all blade. Press the button and the key
keys in the ignition and children locks. blade to retract the key.
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing If it becomes difficult to turn the key, See your dealer if a new key is
window. Do not leave the keys in inspect the key blade for debris. needed.
a vehicle with children. Periodically clean with a brush Notice: If the keys get locked in
or pick. the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If locked out of the vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
With an active OnStar subscription,

. Check the transmitter's battery.
an OnStar Advisor may remotely See “Battery Replacement” later
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar in this section.
Overview on page 14‑1. . If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
Remote Keyless Entry dealer or a qualified technician
(RKE) System for service.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Remote Keyless Entry
page 13‑22 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal (RKE) System Operation
Communications Commission (FCC) The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
rules and Industry Canada transmitter will work up to 20 m RKE without Remote Start Shown
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. (65 ft) away from the vehicle.
The following may be available:
If there is a decrease in the RKE Other conditions can affect the
operating range: performance of the transmitter. See Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
. Check the distance. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The turn signal indicators may flash
transmitter may be too far from System on page 2‑3. and/or the horn may sound to
the vehicle. indicate locking. See “Locking
Feedback” under Vehicle
. Check the location. Other Personalization on page 5‑46.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. If the passenger door is open when
Q is pressed, all doors lock.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through
vehicle personalization.
Pressing Q may also arm the V (Remote Trunk Release): Programming Transmitters to
theft-deterrent system. See Press and hold to unlock the trunk. the Vehicle
Anti-theft Alarm System on 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Only RKE transmitters programmed
page 2‑11. Alarm): Press and release one to this vehicle will work. If a
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the time to locate the vehicle. The transmitter is lost or stolen, a
driver door or all doors. See “Door exterior lamps flash and the horn replacement can be purchased and
Unlock Options” under Vehicle chirps. programmed through your dealer.
Personalization on page 5‑46. Press and hold 7 for at least When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all
The turn signal indicators may flash two seconds to sound the panic
remaining transmitters must also be
and/or the horn may sound to alarm. The horn sounds and the
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
indicate unlocking. See “Unlock turn signals flash until 7 is pressed transmitters will no longer work
Feedback (Lights)” under Vehicle again or the key is placed in the once the new transmitter is
Personalization on page 5‑46. ignition and turned to ON/RUN. programmed.
Pressing K will disarm the / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
theft-deterrent system. See vehicles with this feature, press Q
Anti-theft Alarm System on
and then / to start the engine from
page 2‑11.
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑5 for additional
information.
The buttons on the keys are
disabled when there is a key in the
ignition.
Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Vehicle

The battery is not rechargeable. To Your vehicle may have this feature To start the engine using the remote
replace the battery: which allows you to start the engine start feature:
1. Extend the key blade and open from outside the vehicle. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
the battery cover on the back of / (Remote Vehicle Start): This vehicle.
the transmitter by prying it with a button will be on the RKE
finger.
2. Press and release Q.
transmitter if you have remote start.
2. Remove the used battery by 3. Immediately after completing
During a remote start the climate
pushing on the battery and control system will turn on with the Step 2, press and hold / until
sliding it toward the key blade. fan speed, air delivery mode, and the turn signal lamps flash, or for
temperature settings that the system about two seconds if the vehicle
3. Insert the new battery, positive
was set to when the vehicle was is not in view.
side facing up. Push the battery
down until it is held in place. last turned off. If the fan is set to O When the engine starts, the
Replace with a CR2032 or (Off), the climate control system will parking lamps will turn on and
equivalent battery. not turn on. remain on as long as the engine
Laws in some local communities is running. The vehicle's doors
4. Snap the battery cover back on
may restrict the use of remote will be locked and the climate
to the transmitter.
starters. For example, some laws control system may come on.
may require a person using remote The engine will continue to run
start to have the vehicle in view. for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
Check local regulations for any for a 10-minute time extension.
requirements. Remote start can be extended
Other conditions can affect the only once.
performance of the transmitter. See Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) before driving.
System on page 2‑3.
Extending Engine Run Time Canceling a Remote Start Conditions in Which Remote Start
For a 10-minute extension, repeat To cancel a remote start, do one of Will Not Work
Steps 1–3 while the engine is still the following: The remote start will not operate if:
running. The remote start can only . Aim the RKE transmitter at the . The key is in the ignition.
be extended once.
vehicle and press and hold / . The hood is not closed.
When the remote start is extended, until the parking lamps turn off.
the second 10 minutes will start . The hazard warning flashers
immediately.
. Turn on the hazard warning are on.
flashers. .
For example, if the vehicle has been There is an emission control
running for five minutes, and
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. system malfunction.
10 minutes are added, the engine . The engine coolant temperature
will run for a total of 15 minutes. is too high.
A maximum of two remote starts or . The oil pressure is low.
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a
single remote start with an
The vehicle's ignition switch must extension, have already
be turned to ON/RUN and then back been used.
to LOCK/OFF using the key before
the remote start procedure can be
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
used again.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors from inside the
{ WARNING . Young children who get into vehicle by pressing down on the
unlocked vehicles may be door lock knob on the top of
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can the door.
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat The doors can also be unlocked
. Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent from the inside by pulling the door
children, can easily open the injuries or even death from handle. Pulling the door handle
doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the again unlatches the door.
vehicle. The chance of being vehicle whenever leaving it. Only the driver door has a key
thrown out of the vehicle in a . Outsiders can easily enter cylinder. Unlock the door from the
crash is increased if the
through an unlocked door outside by turning the key
doors are not locked. So, all
when slowing or stopping the counterclockwise.
passengers should wear
vehicle. Lock the doors to Lock all doors from the outside by
safety belts properly and the
help prevent this from turning the key clockwise.
doors should be locked
happening.
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
(Continued)
The door lock cylinder turns freely Power Door Locks Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
when either the wrong key is used,
or the correct key is not fully K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
inserted. The free turning door lock doors.
feature prevents the lock from being To program the power door locks,
forced open. see Vehicle Personalization on
To reset the lock, turn it to the page 5‑46.
vertical position with the correct key
fully inserted. Remove the key and Lockout Protection
insert it again. If the power door lock switch is
If this does not reset the lock, turn pressed when the key is in the
the key half-way around in the ignition and a door is open, all the
cylinder and repeat the reset doors will lock and only the driver
procedure. Instrument Panel door will unlock. If the doors are
closed, they can be locked by using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking
the vehicle. This feature can be
overridden by pressing Q on the
RKE transmitter or by pressing the
power door lock switch a
second time.
This feature can be disabled. See
“Power Door Locks” in Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
Front Door Panels
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Trunk . Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle has a power
seal between the body and the liftgate, disable the power
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon From inside the vehicle, press V
For more information about on the lower portion of the
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
seen or smelled. It can cause driver door.
Exhaust on page 9‑29.
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with Remote Trunk Release
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
To open the trunk from the outside
. Close all of the windows.
of the vehicle, press V on the
. Fully open the air outlets on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
or under the instrument transmitter.
panel.
(Continued)
Emergency Trunk Release 3. Firmly turn the key clockwise to

Lock (Convertible Only) unlatch the trunk lid.
4. Remove the key.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle (Coupe Only)
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a There is an emergency trunk
person trapped in a latched trunk, release handle located inside the
enabling them to open the trunk trunk on the liner, near the trunk
If the trunk lid cannot be opened from the inside. latch. On some vehicles, the release
using the RKE transmitter or the handle can be accessed by folding
trunk release button: the rear seatback down. See Rear
Seats on page 3‑7.
1. Locate the manual release
beside the rear seatback Pull the release handle to open the
cushion on the driver side. trunk from the inside.
2. Pull the cushion to the side, then Return the release handle to its
fully insert the key into the lock original position for proper
cylinder. operation.
Vehicle Security Arming the System How the System Alarm is

Activated
This vehicle has theft-deterrent To arm the system, press Q on the
features; however, they do not make RKE transmitter. To activate the system if it is armed,
it impossible to steal. open any door, the trunk, or hood.
The alarm automatically arms after The horn will sound and the hazard
about 30 seconds. The security warning flashers will flash.
Anti-theft Alarm System light, located on the instrument
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm panel, flashes. How to Turn Off the System
system. Alarm
Disarming the System
To turn off the system alarm, do one
To disarm the system, do one of the
of the following:
following:
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
The theft-deterrent system is
The security light stays on for
disarmed when the alarm is
approximately one second when the
turned off.
vehicle is disarming.
If the system is armed when there
are people inside of the vehicle,
pulling the door handle from the
inside one time will unlock the door.
The security light is located on the Pulling the handle a second time will
instrument panel. unlatch the door.
How to Detect a Tamper The vehicle is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the
Condition immobilized when the key is immobilizer light comes on briefly
removed from the ignition. when the ignition is turned on.
If the horn sounds and the turn
signal lamps flash three times when The system is automatically If the engine does not start and the
K is pressed, an attempted break-in disarmed when the vehicle is immobilizer light stays on, there is a
has occurred while the system was started with the correct key. The key problem with the system. Turn the
armed. The vehicle may also uses a transponder that matches an ignition off and try again.
display a message on the DIC. See immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start, and
Anti-theft Alarm System Messages vehicle and automatically disarms the key appears to be undamaged,
on page 5‑43 for more information. the system. Only the correct key try another ignition key.
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged. If the engine still does not start and
Immobilizer the light continues to stay on, try
See Radio Frequency Statement on another key.
page 13‑22 for information If the engine still does not start with
regarding Part 15 of the Federal the other key, the vehicle needs
Communications Commission (FCC) service. If the vehicle does start, the
rules and Industry Canada first key may be damaged. See
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. your dealer who can service the
The immobilizer light, located in the theft-deterrent system and have a
Immobilizer Operation instrument panel cluster, comes on new key made.
This vehicle has a passive if there is a problem with arming or Do not leave the key or device
theft-deterrent system. disarming the theft-deterrent that disarms or deactivates the
system. See Immobilizer Light on theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
The system does not have to be page 5‑25.
manually armed or disarmed.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so

that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Convex Mirrors
Turn Signal Indicator
{ WARNING If the vehicle has a turn signal
indicator on the mirror, an arrow on
A convex mirror can make things, the mirror flashes in the direction of
like other vehicles, look farther the turn or lane change.
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane, Heated Mirrors
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or For vehicles with heated mirrors:
glance over your shoulder before 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
changing lanes. Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar Press to heat the mirrors.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors See “Rear Window Defogger” under
The passenger side mirror is convex have controls located on the driver Climate Control Systems on
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is door armrest. page 8‑1.
curved so more can be seen from To adjust each mirror:
the driver seat. Automatic Dimming
1. Press the switch to select the
driver or passenger side mirror. Mirror
2. Press one of the four sides on If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic dimming outside mirror on
the h (control pad) to adjust the
the driver side, the mirror will adjust
mirror. for the glare of headlamps
behind you.
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic { WARNING
Adjust the inside rearview mirror for dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the Leaving children, helpless adults,
a clear view of the area behind your
glare from the headlamps of the or pets in a vehicle with the
vehicle. To avoid glare of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming windows closed is dangerous.
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it feature and the indicator light come They can be overcome by the
for nighttime use. on each time the vehicle is started. extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
Vehicles with OnStar® have three Vehicles with OnStar have three from heat stroke. Never leave a
control buttons at the bottom of the control buttons located at the
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
mirror. See your dealer for more bottom of the mirror. See your
alone in a vehicle, especially with
information about OnStar and how dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. the windows closed in warm or
to subscribe to it. See OnStar
See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1. hot weather.
Overview on page 14‑1.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Power Windows Window Indexing

This automatically lowers the
window a small amount when the
door is opened. When the door is
closed, the window will raise fully.
If the vehicle loses power, you may
need to reprogram the windows.
Follow the procedure under
"Programming the Power Windows"
later in this section. If a message
about the windows appears in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), see
Window Messages on page 5‑45.
Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar If the window freezes to the door,
The power window switches located this feature may not work. To close
on the driver door control all a door with a frozen window, push
windows. The window switch on the the top of the window inward while
passenger door is only for that closing the door so the top of the
window. Push the front of the switch window goes under the roof seal.
down to open the window. Pull the
switch up to close it.
The switches work when the ignition
is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑25.
Express Window Operation Express Window Anti-Pinch Express Window Anti-Pinch

Coupe and Convertible Top
Feature Override
When express-up is active, the
The window switches have an
express-up and down feature that
window will auto-reverse if there is { WARNING
an obstruction or severe icing. The
raises or lowers the window without If express override is activated,
window returns to normal operation
holding the switch. Pull the switch the window will not reverse
after the obstruction or condition is
up or press it down all the way and automatically. You or others could
removed.
release it. Stop the window by be injured and the window could
operating the switch in the same If conditions prevent a window be damaged. Before you use
direction. from closing and it continues to
express override, make sure that
auto-reverse, the window can be
Convertible Top Only all people and obstructions are
closed by having the ignition in ON/
To express-up a front window, the RUN and holding the window switch clear of the window path.
same side rear window must be up until the window is closed.
closed. In an emergency, the anti-pinch
To close all the windows, pull all feature can be overridden in a
window switches up fully and supervised mode. Hold the window
release within four seconds. This switch all the way up to the second
will result in the windows closing position. The window will rise for as
automatically. long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still
close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.
Programming the Power Roof Express-open: Press and release

Windows the rear of the switch two times to
express-open the sunroof.
If the battery on the vehicle has Sunroof
been recharged or disconnected, Vent: Press and release the rear of
On vehicles with a sunroof, the the switch to vent the sunroof.
or is not working, you may need to
switch is located on the overhead
reprogram the windows for the The sunroof only operates when the
console.
express-up feature to work. Before ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
reprogramming, replace or recharge ACCESSORY, or if Retained
the vehicle's battery. Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
To program each front window: See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑25.
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN,
close all doors.
2. With the window partially open,
pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
3. Repeat Step 2 on all remaining
windows.
The windows are now
reprogrammed.
Open/Close: Press and hold the
Sun Visors rear or front of the switch to open or
close the sunroof.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot it to the side,
if available.
Express Sunroof Operation Press and release the back of the The sunroof glass panel cannot be
switch to open the sunroof to the opened or closed if the vehicle has
vent position. Press it again to an electrical failure.
express-open the sunroof. To stop
the sunroof from opening, press the
switch again.
A deflector automatically raises
when the sunroof is opened and
retracts while the sunroof closes.
If the sunshade is closed, it opens
automatically when the sunroof
opens past the vented position.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade Dirt and debris may collect on the
forward of the sliding glass panel sunroof seal or in the track. This
The sunroof can be opened without
may cause damage and the could cause an issue with sunroof
holding the switch down. Push the
sunroof may not operate properly. operation or noise. It could also
switch in the open direction until the
Always close the glass panel plug the water drainage system.
second pause. The sunroof will
before closing the sunshade. Periodically open the sunroof and
fully open.
remove any obstacles or loose
To stop the sunroof from moving, To close the sunroof, press the front
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
press either the open or close of the switch and hold it until the
roof sealing area using a clean
sunroof switch. sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
stop if the switch is released. Close
remove grease from the sunroof.
the sunshade by hand.
Convertible Top Notice: Lowering the convertible Notice: If you raise or lower the
top when there are objects in the convertible top while the vehicle
Power Operation storage area could damage it or is in motion, you could damage
break the glass rear window. the top or the top mechanism.
Always verify that no objects are The repairs would not be covered
in the storage area before by the warranty. Always put an
lowering the convertible top. automatic transmission in
Notice: Lowering the convertible P (Park) or a manual transmission
top if it is damp, wet, or dirty can in Neutral before raising or
cause stains, mildew, and lowering the convertible top.
damage to the inside of the Lowering the Convertible Top
vehicle. Dry off the convertible
top before lowering it. 1. Park on a level surface. Place
the vehicle in P (Park) with an
Notice: If you lower the automatic transmission and
convertible top on the vehicle in Neutral with a manual
cold weather (0°C (32°F) or transmission. Set the parking
A. Convertible Top
lower), you may damage brake.
B. Tonneau Cover (In the Trunk) convertible top components. Do
not lower the top in cold weather. 2. Remove the tonneau cover from
To operate the convertible top use the trunk.
the following steps.
3. The rear trunk partition must be
Notice: Leaving the convertible in the fastened position. See
top down and exposing the Rear Storage on page 4‑1.
interior of the vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage.
Always close the convertible top
if leaving the vehicle outdoors.
4. Remove all objects on or above If the convertible top is operated

the rear trunk partition. multiple times, the engine should be
5. Close the trunk. running to prevent drain on the
vehicle's battery. Under certain
6. Start the engine. conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display a
message regarding the convertible
top. See Convertible Top Messages
on page 5‑36.
Raising the Convertible Top
Notice: If you raise or lower the
convertible top while the vehicle
9. Push and hold the rear of the is in motion, you could damage
convertible top button. The the top or the top mechanism.
windows will automatically lower The repairs would not be covered
and the convertible top will lower by the warranty. Always put an
into the rear of the vehicle. automatic transmission in
A chime will sound when the P (Park) or a manual transmission
7. Release the convertible top front convertible top has lowered in Neutral before raising or
latch, located above the inside completely. If the radio is on the lowering the convertible top.
rearview mirror, by pulling down sound may be muted for a brief
and turning it clockwise. time so the chime can be heard.
8. Return the convertible top front 10. Install the tonneau cover. See
latch to the closed position. Tonneau Cover on page 4‑3.
Notice: If you raise the top 7. After the convertible top is

without removing the tonneau completely raised, release the
cover you may damage the top convertible top button.
components and the tonneau
cover. Remove the tonneau cover
before operating the
convertible top.
1. Park on a level surface. Place
the vehicle in P (Park) with an
automatic transmission and
Neutral with a manual
transmission. Set the parking
brake.
2. Remove the tonneau cover if
{ WARNING
installed. See Tonneau Cover on Placing hands on the top of the
page 4‑3. windshield frame when closing
8. Release the convertible top front
3. Move any objects that have the convertible soft top could
latch from the lock position by
fallen against the convertible top cause fingers to be pinched and
pulling down and turning it
inside the trunk. may cause injury. Keep hands clockwise.
below the windshield frame when
4. Close the trunk. 9. Lock the convertible top front
closing the convertible top.
5. Start the engine. latch by pulling down and turning
it counterclockwise, then push
6. Push and hold the front of the it up.
convertible top button. The top
will raise and the windows will
lower.
If the convertible top has been Raising the Convertible Top

opened repeatedly within a short Manually
time and is not working, wait Notice: If you raise the top
five minutes before pressing the without removing the tonneau
convertible top button again. cover you may damage the top
Operation of the convertible top components and the tonneau
cannot be attempted for five minutes cover. Remove the tonneau cover
after the last time the convertible before operating the
top switch was pressed if the convertible top.
convertible top was opened 1. Park on a level surface. Place
repeatedly within a short time and the vehicle in P (Park) with an
the top has stopped functioning. automatic transmission and
If the vehicle has lost power, the Neutral with a manual 4. Remove the trim cover to access
convertible top can still be raised by transmission. Set the parking the hydraulic pressure
releasing pressure on the brake. release bolt.
hydraulic pump. 2. Remove the tonneau cover if
Never attempt to open or close the installed. See Tonneau Cover on
convertible top manually without first page 4‑3.
releasing pressure. 3. Move any objects that have
fallen against the convertible top
inside the trunk.
When power is restored to the

vehicle, the pressure release bolt
must be tightened using the
provided wrench, by turning it
clockwise. The convertible top
button can then be used to lower or
raise the convertible top.
If the convertible top is operated
multiple times, the engine should be
running to prevent drain on the
vehicle's battery. Under certain
conditions, the Driver Information
5. Locate the pressure release 9. After the convertible top is Center (DIC) may display a
bolt (A) on the top of the completely raised, release the message regarding the convertible
hydraulic pump. convertible top front latch from top. See Convertible Top Messages
the lock position by pulling down on page 5‑36.
6. Using the provided wrench, turn
the pressure release bolt and turning it clockwise. If the battery has been
counterclockwise one to one 10. Lock the convertible top front disconnected, the power windows
and a half turns. latch by pulling down and must be initialized for the
turning it counterclockwise, convertible top to operate. See
7. Reinstall the trim cover. Power Windows on page 2‑15 for
then push it up.
8. Pull the front of the convertible more information.
top up and forward.
Cleaning the Convertible Top To protect the convertible top:

The convertible top should be . After washing, the top must be
cleaned often. High pressure car completely dry before lowering.
washes may cause water to enter . Do not get any cleaner on the
the vehicle. painted finish; it could leave
Hand wash the convertible top in streaks.
the shade. Use a mild soap, . Before going through an
lukewarm water, and a soft sponge. automatic car wash, find out if
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the equipment could damage the
the top, and a brush can chafe the convertible top.
threads in the top fabric. Do not use
detergents, harsh cleaners,
solvents, or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
Let the soap remain on the fabric for
a few minutes. When the top is very
dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner.
Thoroughly rinse, then let the top
dry in direct sunlight.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-38
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-40
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Securing Child Restraints
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Securing Child Restraints
What Will You See after an (Right Front
Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Front Seats Seat Position Height Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make To adjust a manual seat,
you push a pedal when you do if equipped:
not want to. Adjust the driver seat
1. Lift the handle under the seat to
only when the vehicle is not
unlock it. If equipped, move the lever up or
moving. down repeatedly to manually raise
2. Slide the seat and release the
handle. or lower the seat.
3. Try to move the seat back and

forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: your abdomen. The belt forces
. Move the seat forward or would be there, not at your pelvic
To adjust the seatback:
rearward by sliding the bones. This could cause serious
. Tilt the top of the control
horizontal control forward or internal injuries.
rearward. rearward to recline.
For proper protection when the
. Raise or lower the front part of
. Tilt the top of the control forward vehicle is in motion, have the
the seat cushion by moving the to raise. seatback upright. Then sit well
front of the horizontal control up back in the seat and wear the
or down. safety belt properly.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.
Seatback Latches
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright

Do not have a seatback reclined if position, lift the seatback and
the vehicle is moving. manually push it rearward until it
locks in place. Push and pull on the
To access the rear seats, pull up on
seatback to make sure it is locked.
the latch on the rear of the driver or
front passenger seatback. Fold the The power recline control is
seatback forward. deactivated when the seatback is
folded forward and will not function
until the seatback has been
manually returned to the upright,
locked position. This is normal. Do
not use the power recline control on
the outboard side of the seat to
raise the seatback. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑4.
Heated Front Seats To operate, the engine must be

running.
{ WARNING Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
If you cannot feel temperature the button, the heated seat will
change or pain to the skin, the change to the next lower setting,
seat heater may cause burns and then the off setting. Two lights
even at low temperatures. To indicate the highest setting, and one
reduce the risk of burns, people light indicates the lowest.
with such a condition should use If available, press L or M to turn on
care when using the seat heater, the heated seat. A light indicates
especially for long periods of this feature is on.
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
Rear Seats To fold the seatback down:

{ WARNING
Notice: On convertible models,
there is a speaker between the A safety belt that is improperly
two rear seating positions on the routed, not properly attached,
seatback. If someone leans on or twisted will not provide the
the speaker, if cargo is loaded on protection needed in a crash. The
it, or if liquid is spilled on it, person wearing the belt could be
damage could occur. Do not lean seriously injured. After raising the
against the speaker, place cargo rear seatback, always check to be
on the speaker, or spill liquids on sure that the safety belts are
the speaker. properly routed and attached, and
On coupe models, the rear seat has are not twisted.
two designated seating positions
and can be folded for more cargo 1. Pull on the strap located on the Lift the seatback up to raise it, and
space. Fold the seat only when the top of the rear seatback. push it back to lock it into place.
vehicle is parked. Make sure the safety belt is not
2. Fold the seatback down.
twisted or caught in the seatback.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
Do not let anyone ride where a passengers to ride in any area of
safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too. When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts. going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑15. instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
When you wear a safety belt, you Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why How to Wear Safety Belts
and the vehicle slow down together. should I have to wear safety
There is more time to stop because belts?
Properly
you stop over a longer distance and, A: Airbags are supplemental This section is only for people of
when worn properly, your strongest systems only; so they work with adult size.
bones take the forces from the safety belts — not instead of There are special things to know
safety belts. That is why wearing them. Whether or not an airbag about safety belts and children. And
safety belts makes such good is provided, all occupants still there are different rules for smaller
sense. have to buckle up to get the children and infants. If a child will be
Questions and Answers About most protection. riding in the vehicle, see Older
Safety Belts Also, in nearly all states and in Children on page 3‑33 or Infants
all Canadian provinces, the law and Young Children on page 3‑35.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle Follow those rules for everyone's
requires wearing safety belts.
after a crash if I am wearing a protection.
safety belt?
It is very important for all occupants
A: You could be — whether you are to buckle up. Statistics show that
wearing a safety belt or not. unbelted people are hurt more often
Your chance of being conscious in crashes than those who are
during and after a crash, so you wearing safety belts.
can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
There are important things to know

. Wear the lap part of the belt low
about wearing a safety belt properly. and snug on the hips, just { WARNING
touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong You can be seriously injured,
pelvic bones and you would be or even killed, by not wearing
less likely to slide under the lap your safety belt properly.
belt. If you slid under it, the belt . Never allow the lap or
would apply force on your shoulder belt to become
abdomen. This could cause loose or twisted.
serious or even fatal injuries.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
. Wear the shoulder belt over the under both arms or behind
shoulder and across the chest. your back.
These parts of the body are best
. Never route the lap or
able to take belt restraining
forces. The shoulder belt locks if shoulder belt over an
. Sit up straight and always keep there is a sudden stop or crash. armrest.
your feet on the floor in front
of you.
. Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is If the shoulder portion of a
adjustable, so you can sit up passenger belt is pulled out all
All seating positions in the vehicle straight. To see how, see “Seats” the way, the child restraint
have a lap-shoulder belt. in the Index. locking feature may be engaged.
The following instructions explain If this happens, let the belt go
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt back all the way and start again.
properly.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted. 4. Push the latch plate into the
1. If the seat has a safety belt The lap-shoulder belt may lock if buckle until it clicks.
guide, and the safety belt is not you pull the belt across you very Pull up on the latch plate to
routed through the guide, snap quickly. If this happens, let the make sure it is secure. If the belt
the guide around the belt belt go back slightly to unlock it. is not long enough, see Safety
webbing. Be sure the belt is not Then pull the belt across you Belt Extender on page 3‑15.
twisted. more slowly.
Position the release button on Safety Belt Pretensioners

the buckle so that the safety belt
This vehicle has safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
pretensioners for the front outboard
necessary.
occupants. Although the safety belt
5. To make the lap part tight, pull pretensioners cannot be seen, they
up on the shoulder belt. are part of the safety belt assembly.
It may be necessary to pull They can help tighten the safety
stitching on the safety belt belts during the early stages of a
through the latch plate to fully moderate to severe frontal or near
tighten the lap belt on smaller frontal crash if the threshold
occupants. conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
To unlatch the belt, push the button vehicle has side impact airbags,
on the buckle. The belt should safety belt pretensioners can help
return to its stowed position. tighten the safety belts in a side
crash.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a Pretensioners work only once. If the
door is slammed against a safety pretensioners activate in a crash,
belt, damage can occur to both the the pretensioners and probably
safety belt and the vehicle. other parts of the vehicle's safety
belt system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash on page 3‑16.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each

Guides outboard passenger position in the
rear seat. Here is how to install a
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides comfort guide to the safety belt:
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt

and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from

between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body to
remove the guide from its
storage clip.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
be removed from the guide. Slide around you, you should use it.
the guide onto the clip, leaving only But if a safety belt is not long
the loop of the elastic cord exposed. enough, your dealer will order you
Properly secure the guide before an extender. When you go in to
folding the seatback. order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
Safety Belt Use During long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
Pregnancy else use it, and use it only for the
Safety belts work for everyone, A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
including pregnant women. Like all lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
occupants, they are more likely to portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
be seriously injured if they do not possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
wear safety belts. throughout the pregnancy. belt. See the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt

Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a
belt reminder light, safety belts, Crash
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
{ WARNING
Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
{ WARNING
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle.
from doing its job. See your dealer provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the
safety belts may not protect you in a soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or serious injury or even death in a
frayed, get a new one right away. crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
Make sure the safety belt reminder properly after a crash, have them
light is working. See Safety Belt inspected and any necessary
Reminders on page 5‑15. replacements made as soon as
Keep safety belts clean and dry. possible.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑16.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System All of the airbags in your vehicle will
belt assemblies inspected or have the word AIRBAG embossed
replaced. The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear on the middle
time of the crash. passenger. part of the steering wheel for the
Have the safety belt pretensioners driver and on the instrument panel
. A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger.
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light With seat-mounted side impact
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will
or while you are driving. See Airbag airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback
Readiness Light on page 5‑16. passenger. closest to the door.
The vehicle may also have the With roof-rail airbags, the word
following airbags: AIRBAG will appear along the
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver headliner or trim.
and the passenger seated Airbags are designed to supplement
directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety
. A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags
front passenger and the are also designed to help reduce
passenger seated directly the risk of injury from the force of an
behind the right front passenger. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up when it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
belts, not replace them. Also, airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt
airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is
in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young
safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during children and infants need the
See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint
Inflate? on page 3‑21. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle. Children on page 3‑33 or Infants
hitting things inside the vehicle or and Young Children on
being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑35.
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly, whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger frontal
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for airbag is in the instrument panel on
more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side.
middle of the steering wheel.
Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown, Convertible Models, Driver Side Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar Shown, Passenger Side Similar Passenger Side Similar
On coupe models, the seat-mounted On convertible models, the On coupe models, the roof-rail
side impact airbags for the driver seat-mounted side impact airbags airbags for the driver, right front
and right front passenger are in the for the driver and right front passenger, and second row
side of the seatbacks closest to passenger are in the side of the outboard passengers are in the
the door. seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at

{ WARNING Inflate? different crash speeds. For
example:
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the
. If the vehicle hits a stationary
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object.
that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right
or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could
clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
between an occupant and an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object
airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall).
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an Thresholds can also vary with
inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design.
blocked.
Frontal airbags are not intended to The vehicle has seat-mounted side In any particular crash, no one can
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impact airbags. The vehicle may or say whether an airbag should have
impacts, or many side impacts. may not have roof-rail airbags. See inflated simply because of the
In addition, the vehicle has Airbag System on page 3‑17. damage to a vehicle or because of
dual-stage frontal airbags. Seat-mounted side impact and what the repair costs were. For
Dual-stage airbags adjust the roof-rail airbags are intended to frontal airbags, inflation is
restraint according to crash severity. inflate in moderate to severe side determined by what the vehicle hits,
The vehicle has electronic frontal crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail the angle of the impact, and how
sensors, which help the sensing airbags are intended to inflate quickly the vehicle slows down. For
system distinguish between a during a rollover or in a severe seat-mounted side impact and
moderate frontal impact and a more frontal impact. Seat-mounted side roof-rail airbags, deployment is
severe frontal impact. For moderate impact and roof-rail airbags will determined by the location and
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate if the crash severity is above severity of the side impact.
inflate at a level less than full the system's designed threshold In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment. For more severe frontal level. The threshold level can vary deployment is determined by the
impacts, full deployment occurs. with specific vehicle design. direction of the roll. In a rollover
The vehicle has a seat position Seat-mounted side impact airbags event, both roof‐rail airbags will
sensor which enables the sensing are not intended to inflate in frontal deploy.
system to monitor the position of the impacts, near frontal impacts,
driver seat. The seat position sensor rollovers, or rear impacts.
provides information that is used to A seat-mounted side impact airbag
determine if the airbag(s) should is intended to deploy on the side of
deploy at a reduced level or at full the vehicle that is struck. Both
deployment. roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck,
or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over,
or in a severe frontal impact.
What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Rollover‐capable roof‐rail airbags

are designed to help contain the
Inflate? Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the
In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the
system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The
triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering rollover‐capable roof‐rail airbags are
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of
airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover
of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can
the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections.
all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in
Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal many types of collisions, primarily
inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the because the occupant's motion is
instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the not toward those airbags. See When
seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping Should an Airbag Inflate? on
there are airbag modules in the side the occupant more gradually. page 3‑21 for more information.
of the front seatbacks closest to the Seat-mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded
door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force as anything more than a supplement
airbags, there are airbag modules in of the impact more evenly over the to safety belts.
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the occupant's upper body.
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
What Will You See after and turn the hazard warning
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems { WARNING
quickly that some people may not for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel
they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering
the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a
airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be
Airbags? on page 3‑19. by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could
The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate
into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag the vehicle.
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt
from the vents in the deflated to restart the engine after a crash
airbags. Airbag inflation does not has occurred.
The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn
the windshield or being able to steer the interior lamps on, turn the
the vehicle, nor does it prevent hazard warning flashers on, and
people from leaving the vehicle. shut off the fuel system after the
airbags inflate. You can lock the
doors, turn the interior lamps off,
In many crashes severe enough to

. Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag. service.
. Airbags are designed to inflate United States
only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system. The vehicle has a passenger
If you do not get them, the sensing system for the right front
airbag system will not be there passenger position. The passenger
to help protect you in another airbag status indicator will be visible
crash. A new system will include on the overhead console when the
airbag modules and possibly Canada and Mexico
vehicle is started.
other parts. The service manual The words ON and OFF, or the
for the vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off, will be visible
to replace other parts. during the system check. If you are
. The vehicle has a crash sensing using remote start, if equipped, to
and diagnostic module which start the vehicle from a distance,
records information after a you may not see the system check.
crash. See Vehicle Data When the system check is
Recording and Privacy on complete, either the word ON or
page 13‑20 and Event Data OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
Recorders on page 13‑20. be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑17.
The passenger sensing system will an older child riding in a booster

turn off the right front passenger seat; and children, who are large WARNING (Continued)
frontal airbag under certain enough, using safety belts.
conditions. The driver airbags and Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right
roof‐rail airbags (if equipped) are not “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
affected by the passenger sensing front passenger frontal airbag, no
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
system. the rear-facing child is so great if the guarantee that an airbag will not
The passenger sensing system airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
works with sensors that are part of
circumstance, even though the
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the
{ WARNING airbag is turned off.
presence of a properly seated A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child
occupant and determine if the right restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
front passenger frontal airbag injured or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a
should be enabled (may inflate) passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in
or not. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move
According to accident statistics, rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
children are safer when properly be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
secured in a rear seat in the correct airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraint for their weight child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
and size. injured or killed if the right front
We recommend that children be passenger airbag inflates and the
secured in a rear seat, including: passenger seat is in a forward
an infant or a child riding in a position.
rear-facing child restraint; a child (Continued)
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
The passenger sensing system is When the passenger sensing build. Everyone in the vehicle
designed to turn off the right front system has turned off the right front who has outgrown child restraints
passenger frontal airbag if: passenger frontal airbag, the off should wear a safety belt
. The right front passenger seat is indicator will light and stay lit to properly — whether or not there is
unoccupied. remind you that the airbag is off. an airbag for that person.
See Passenger Airbag Status
. The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
Indicator on page 5‑17. { WARNING
infant seat. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the If the airbag readiness light ever
. The system determines that a right front passenger frontal airbag comes on and stays on, it means
small child is present in a child any time the system senses that a that something may be wrong
restraint. person of adult size is sitting with the airbag system. To help
. The system determines that a properly in the right front passenger avoid injury to yourself or others,
small child is present in a seat. When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
booster seat. system has allowed the airbag to be away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light Light on page 5‑16 for more
. A right front passenger takes and stay lit to remind you that the information, including important
his/her weight off of the seat for airbag is active. safety information.
a period of time.
For some children who have
. The right front passenger seat is outgrown child restraints and for
occupied by a smaller person, If the On Indicator is Lit for a
very small adults, the passenger Child Restraint
such as a child who has sensing system may or may not turn
outgrown child restraints. off the right front passenger frontal If a child restraint has been installed
. Or, if there is a critical problem airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
with the airbag system or the person's seating posture and body 1. Turn the vehicle off.
passenger sensing system.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items If the on indicator is still lit, use the following steps to allow the
from the seat such as blankets, secure the child in the child system to detect that person and
cushions, seat covers, seat restraint in a rear seat position in enable the right front passenger
heaters, or seat massagers. the vehicle, and check with your frontal airbag:
4. Reinstall the child restraint dealer. 1. Turn the vehicle off.
following the directions If the Off Indicator is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material
provided by the child restraint Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets,
manufacturer and refer to cushions, seat covers, seat
Securing Child Restraints (Right heaters, or seat massagers.
Front Passenger Seat) on
page 3‑49 or Securing Child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
Restraints (Rear Seat) on upright position.
page 3‑47. 4. Have the person sit upright in
5. If, after reinstalling the child the seat, centered on the seat
restraint and restarting the cushion, with legs comfortably
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, extended.
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
recline the vehicle seatback person remain in this position for
and adjust the seat cushion, one minute after the on indicator
if adjustable, to make sure that is lit.
the vehicle seatback is not
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
pushing the child restraint into
the right front passenger seat, but
the seat cushion.
the off indicator is lit, it could be
6. Restart the vehicle. because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
Additional Factors Affecting approved by GM for your specific

System Operation vehicle. See Adding Equipment to { WARNING
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Safety belts help keep the page 3‑30 for more information Stowing of articles under the
passenger in position on the seat about modifications that can affect passenger seat or between the
during vehicle maneuvers and how the system operates. passenger seat cushion and
braking, which helps the passenger seatback may interfere with the
sensing system maintain the The passenger sensing system may proper operation of the passenger
passenger airbag status. See turn on the passenger airbag when sensing system.
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” liquid soaks into the seat. If this
in the Index for additional happens, the on indicator will be lit.
information about the importance of If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
proper restraint use. the seat immediately. If the airbag
A thick layer of additional material, readiness light is lit, do not install a
such as a blanket or cushion, child restraint or allow anyone to
or aftermarket equipment such as occupy the seat. See Airbag
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
massagers can affect how well important safety information.
the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
Servicing the Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the Q: Is there anything I might add
should be serviced. There are parts vehicle is turned off and the to or change about the vehicle
of the airbag system in several battery is disconnected, an airbag that could keep the airbags
places around the vehicle. Your can still inflate during improper from working properly?
dealer and the service manual have service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it A: Yes. If you add things that
information about servicing the change the vehicle's frame,
vehicle and the airbag system. To inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
bumper system, height, front end
purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
or side sheet metal, they may
Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
keep the airbag system from
Information on page 13‑18. proper service procedures, and working properly. Changing or
make sure the person performing moving any parts of the front
work for you is qualified to do so. seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
In addition, the vehicle has a This could either prevent proper Q: Because I have a disability,
passenger sensing system for deployment of the passenger I have to get my vehicle
the right front passenger airbag(s) or prevent the modified. How can I find out
position, which includes sensors passenger sensing system whether this will affect my
that are part of the passenger from properly turning off the airbag system?
seat. The passenger sensing passenger airbag(s). See A: If you have questions, call
system may not operate properly Passenger Sensing System on Customer Assistance. The
if the original seat trim is page 3‑25. phone numbers and addresses
replaced with non-GM covers, If you have questions, call for Customer Assistance are in
upholstery or trim, or with GM Customer Assistance. The Step Two of the Customer
covers, upholstery or trim phone numbers and addresses Satisfaction Procedure in this
designed for a different vehicle. for Customer Assistance are in manual. See Customer
Any object, such as an Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
aftermarket seat heater or a Satisfaction Procedure in this Canada) on page 13‑1 or
comfort enhancing pad or manual. See Customer Customer Satisfaction
device, installed under or on top Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and Procedure (Mexico) on
of the seat fabric, could also Canada) on page 13‑1 or page 13‑3.
interfere with the operation of Customer Satisfaction
the passenger sensing system. Procedure (Mexico) on In addition, your dealer and the
page 13‑3. service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑16. airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light on
damaged, opened, or broken, the may not work properly and
page 5‑16.
airbag may not work properly. Do may not protect you and your
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To
opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 3‑19. See your dealer for possible.
service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
page 3‑11 for more information.
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑11.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when { WARNING { WARNING
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Never allow more than one child Never allow a child to wear the
system secured in a rear seating to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt with the shoulder belt
position. safety belt cannot properly spread behind their back. A child can be
the impact forces. In a crash, they seriously injured by not wearing
In a crash, children who are not can be crushed together and the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
buckled up can strike other people seriously injured. A safety belt crash, the child would not be
who are buckled up, or can be
must be used by only one person restrained by the shoulder belt.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
at a time. The child could move too far
children need to use safety belts
properly. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child Children who are up against,
while riding in a vehicle. Due to or very close to, any airbag when
crash forces, an infant or a child it inflates can be seriously injured
will become so heavy it is not or killed. Never put a rear-facing
possible to hold it during a crash. child restraint in the right front
For example, in a crash at only seat. Secure a rear-facing child
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) restraint in a rear seat. It is also
infant will suddenly become a better to secure a forward-facing
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's child restraint in a rear seat. If you
arms. An infant should be must secure a forward-facing
secured in an appropriate child restraint in the right front
restraint. seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
sure it is designed to be used in

a motor vehicle. If it is, the { WARNING
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor A young child's hip bones are still
vehicle safety standards. so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
The restraint manufacturer's
the hip bones, as it should.
instructions that come with the
Instead, it may settle up around
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular the child's abdomen. In a crash,
child restraint. In addition, there the belt would apply force on a
are many kinds of restraints body area that is unprotected by
available for children with any bony structure. This alone
Q: What are the different types of special needs. could cause serious or fatal
add-on child restraints? injuries. To reduce the risk of
A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
are purchased by the vehicle
To reduce the risk of neck and always be secured in appropriate
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants child restraints.
restraint should take into need complete support. In a
consideration not only the child's crash, if an infant is in a
weight, height, and age but also rear-facing child restraint, the
whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
For most basic types of child shoulders. Infants should always
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child
surface against the back of the to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office.
or killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement { WARNING
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure restraint. Secure the child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint.
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle— even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41. use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Where to Put the

Restraint
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child

children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured restraints in a rear seat, even if
properly restrained in a child or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a
restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
system secured in a rear seating because the back of the the right front seat, always move
position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
We recommend that children and
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraints be secured in a rear
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
a child riding in a forward-facing passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑25 for additional
child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information.
booster seat; and children, who are position.
large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a
Never put a rear-facing child seat in system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the
the front. This is because the risk to front passenger frontal airbag, no instructions that came with the child
the rear-facing child is so great if the system is fail-safe. No one can restraint to make sure it is
airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle.
deploy under some unusual
Child restraints and booster seats
circumstance, even though it is
vary considerably in size, and some
turned off.
may fit in certain seating positions
(Continued) better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system in
child restraint and the size of the the vehicle, you need a child
child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child manufacturer will provide you with
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. instructions on how to use the child
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make restraint and its attachments. The
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. following explains how to attach a
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in child restraint with these
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the attachments in the vehicle.
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use Not all vehicle seating positions or
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. child restraints have lower anchors
installed, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible and attachments or top tether
restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed anchors and attachments.
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the Some child restraints with a top
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the tether are designed to be used
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions whether the top tether is anchored
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, as well or not. Other child restraints require
properly secure any child restraint in as the instructions in this manual. that the top tether be anchored.
the vehicle — even when no child is When installing a child restraint with A national or local law may require
in it. a top tether, you must also use that the top tether be anchored.
either the lower anchors or the
In Canada, the law requires that
safety belts to properly secure the
forward-facing child restraints have
child restraint. A child restraint must
a top tether, and that the tether be
never be installed using only the top
attached.
tether and anchor.
Convertible models do not have top Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
tether anchors to secure a child single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
restraint. If a national or local law Either will have a single
requires that the top tether be attachment (B) to secure the top
anchored, do not use a child tether to the anchor.
restraint in this vehicle because a Some child restraints that have a
top tether cannot be properly top tether are designed for use with
anchored. or without the top tether being
Lower Anchors attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether be
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built attached. Be sure to read and follow
into the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for the child
attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars a crash.
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Rear Seat — Convertible Model Lower Anchors
Anchor Locations
Rear Seat — Coupe Model
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating Top Tether Anchors

positions with two lower anchors.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
On coupe models, the top tether
anchors are on the rear seatback
filler panel. To assist in locating the
top tether anchors, the top tether
anchor symbol is on the cover of the
anchor.
Convertible top models do not have Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint
top tether anchors to be used to position without a top tether anchor Designed for the LATCH
secure a child restraint in any if a national or local law requires System
seating position. that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether { WARNING
must be attached. If a LATCH-type child restraint is
According to accident statistics, not attached to anchors, the child
children and infants are safer when restraint will not be able to protect
properly restrained in a child the child correctly. In a crash, the
restraint system or infant restraint child could be seriously injured or
system secured in a rear seating killed. Install a LATCH-type child
position. See Where to Put the restraint properly using the
Restraint on page 3‑40 for anchors, or use the vehicle safety
additional information. belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
Be sure to use an anchor on the came with the child restraint and
same side of the vehicle as the the instructions in this manual.
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not fold the empty rear seat

{ WARNING { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
Do not attach more than one child Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the
restraint to a single anchor. or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position,
Attaching more than one child wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat.
restraint to a single anchor could the safety belt continues to
cause the anchor or attachment tighten. Buckle any unused safety 1. Attach and tighten the lower
to come loose or even break belts behind the child restraint so attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
during a crash. A child or others children cannot reach them. Pull
does not have lower
could be injured. To reduce the the shoulder belt all the way out
attachments, secure the child
risk of serious or fatal injuries of the retractor to set the lock, restraint with the safety belts
during a crash, attach only one if the vehicle has one, after the and top tether, if equipped. Refer
child restraint per anchor. child restraint has been installed. to the child restraint
manufacturer instructions and
Notice: Do not let the LATCH the instructions in this manual.
attachments rub against the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
vehicle’s safety belts. This may the desired seating
damage these parts. If necessary, position.
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH 1.2. Put the child restraint on
attachments. the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. On coupe models, if the child Replacing LATCH System

restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
Parts After a Crash
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether { WARNING
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and A crash can damage the LATCH
the following steps: system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. secure the child restraint,
. If the child restraint has a
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten dual tether, route the tether resulting in serious injury or even
the top tether according to over the seatback. death in a crash. To help make
the child restraint sure the LATCH system is
instructions and the 3. Before placing a child in the
working properly after a crash,
following instructions: child restraint, make sure it is
see your dealer to have the
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the system inspected and any
LATCH path and attempt to necessary replacements made as
move it side to side and back soon as possible.
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of If the vehicle has the LATCH system
movement, for proper and it was being used during a
installation. crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
. If the child restraint has a necessary even if the LATCH
single tether, route the system was not being used at the
tether over the seatback. time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑41 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install your child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑40. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3‑41 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child restraint in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑41 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front
Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints

restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a
seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
forward-facing child restraint. See because the back of the the right front seat, always move
Where to Put the Restraint on
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
page 3‑40
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front
passenger frontal airbag under See Passenger Sensing System
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑25 for additional
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward
Sensing System on page 3‑25 and information.
position.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH
including important safety system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and
information. front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH
A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3‑41 for how and
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint
the front.” This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is
the rear-facing child is so great if the circumstance, even though it is secured using a safety belt and it
airbag deploys. turned off. uses a top tether, see Lower
(Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on

position without a top tether anchor the seat.
if a national or local law requires If the seat has a safety belt
that the top tether be anchored, or if guide, remove the safety belt
the instructions that come with the from the guide by unsnapping
child restraint say that the top strap the guide on the seat. Do not
must be anchored. secure the child restraint with
In Canada, the law requires that the safety belt routed through
forward-facing child restraints have the guide.
a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
You will be using the lap-shoulder the vehicle's safety belt through
belt to secure the child restraint in or around the restraint. The child 4. Push the latch plate into the
this position. Follow the instructions restraint instructions will show buckle until it clicks.
that came with the child restraint. you how. Position the release button on
1. Move the seat as far back as it the buckle, so that the safety
will go before securing the belt could be quickly unbuckled
forward-facing child restraint. if necessary.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
when the vehicle is started. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down indicator will come on and stay on
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3‑25 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the If the seat has a safety belt guide,
retractor is not locked, repeat return the safety belt into the guide
Steps 5 and 6. by snapping the guide around the
webbing.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Fastened Position
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 the lever. Use the key to lock and
Additional Storage Features unlock the glove box.
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Rear Storage
Rear Trunk Partition 1. Pull on the handle (A) to detach
and roll out the trunk partition (B)
The trunk partition keeps cargo at the front of the trunk (C).
away from the convertible top.
The trunk partition attaches to the
sides of the trunk to protect the
convertible top or can be rolled up
and stored when the convertible top
is up.
2. Attach the trunk partition (B) into

the brackets (A).
3. Remove any objects from the
top of the trunk partition (B).
4-2 Storage
Stored Position Center Console Storage

To open, lift the latch on the front
edge of the armrest.
There is an accessory power outlet
and an optional USB/audio jack
located in the storage area. See
Power Outlets on page 5‑5 and
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑17.
3. Attach the handle (A) to the
rolled‐up trunk partition (B) at
the front of the trunk (C).
See Convertible Top Messages on
page 5‑36.
1. Pull the handle (C) toward the
rear of the trunk while pulling up
to release the trunk partition (B)
from the brackets (A).
2. Hold the handle (C) and slowly
let the trunk partition (B) roll up
toward the front of the trunk (D).
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage
Features
Tonneau Cover
Installation
1. Remove the tonneau cover
storage bag from the trunk and
remove the tonneau cover.
3. Fold the sides of the tonneau 4. Insert the tab (A) under the
cover over. Attach the cord (A) trim (B) on both sides.
at the front edge of the tonneau
cover to the post (B) on the back
seat rear panel on both sides.
2. Unfold and place the tonneau

cover on the vehicle.
4-4 Storage
Removal
5. Push the outside rim (A) of the 6. Push the edge (A) of the center
tonneau cover under the vehicle of the tonneau cover (B) under
trim (B) on both sides. the vehicle trim (C). 1. Grip the tonneau cover at the
notch (A) and pull back to
release the tab on both sides.
Storage 4-5
Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience net
located inside the trunk, it can be
used to secure loose items.
2. Fold the sides of the tonneau

cover over and remove the
cord (A) from the post (B) on the
back seat rear panel on both
sides.
3. Fold the tonneau cover, place it The upper (A) and lower (C) hooks
in the storage bag, and store it in on each side of the trunk opening
the trunk. are provided to attach the net.
Install the opening of the net at the
top and over the two middle
hooks (B).
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Transmission Temperature
Gauge (Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . 5-14
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-30
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15 Vehicle Messages
Controls Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Airbag Status Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-36
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-37
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Cooling System
Indicators Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-38
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Traction Control System Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-38
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-23 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-39
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-39
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® OFF Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Object Detection System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Ride Control System
Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) . . . . . 5-10 Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Engine Oil Pressure High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Anti-theft Alarm System
Engine Oil Temperature Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44 while driving.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45 Adjustment
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Some audio controls can be

To adjust the steering wheel: adjusted at the steering wheel.
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles Horn 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):

with Bluetooth® or OnStar®, press Move the lever up to 3 for
to interact with those systems. See Press a on the steering wheel pad
adjustable interval wipes, then turn
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on to sound the horn.
the band up for more frequent wipes
page 7‑28 or Bluetooth or down for less frequent wipes.
(Infotainment Controls) on Windshield Wiper/Washer
page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 7‑23 or OnStar Overview
on page 14‑1.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the 9 (Off): Use to turn the windshield
infotainment system. Press again to The windshield wiper lever is on the wipers off.
turn the sound on. side of the steering column. With 3 (Mist): To use for a single wipe,
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or briefly move the wiper lever down.
select an audio source. ON/RUN, move the windshield For several wipes, hold the wiper
wiper lever to select the wiper lever down.
Turn up or down to select the next speed.
or previous favorite radio station or 3 (Windshield Washer): Pull the
CD, or MP3 track. 2: Use for fast wipes. windshield wiper lever toward you to
+ x − (Volume): Press + or − to 1: Use for slow wipes. spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers.
increase or decrease the volume.
The wipers will continue until the
lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
When the windshield wiper lever is Wipe Parking Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
released, additional wipes may If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ long periods of time with objects
occur depending on how long the OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2, that may interfere with the antenna's
windshield washer had been ability to receive a satellite signal.
activated. See Washer Fluid on or 3 , they will immediately stop. See Backglass Antenna on
page 10‑32 for information on filling If the windshield wiper lever is then page 7‑14 and Satellite Radio
the windshield washer fluid moved to 9 before the driver door Antenna on page 7‑14 for the
reservoir. is opened, or within 10 minutes, the location of the vehicle's antennas.
The compass system is designed to
wipers will restart and move to the
{ WARNING base of the windshield. operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
In freezing weather, do not use If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ needing a signal from the GPS
the washer until the windshield is OFF during a windshield wash, the satellites. When the compass
warmed. Otherwise the washer wipers will stop when they reach the display shows CAL, drive the
fluid can form ice on the base of the windshield. vehicle for a short distance in an
windshield, blocking your vision. open area where it can receive a
Compass GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
Clear ice and snow from the wiper The vehicle may have a compass
the GPS signal is restored and
blades before using them. If they display on the Driver Information
provide a heading again. See
are frozen to the windshield, Center (DIC). The compass receives
Compass Messages on page 5‑36
carefully loosen or thaw them. its heading and other information
for more information on the
Damaged wiper blades should be from the Global Positioning
messages that may be displayed for
replaced. See Wiper Blade System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
the compass.
Replacement on page 10‑38. and vehicle speed information.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
Clock 6. To save the time or date and Setting the Month & Day
return to the Time and Date Format
The infotainment system controls Settings menu, press the
are used to access the time and / BACK button at any time or 1. Press the CONFIG button.
date settings through the menu press the MENU/SELECT knob 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
system. The clock menu can only after adjusting the minutes
be used with the radio on while in 3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
or year.
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. 4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
See Operation on page 7‑4 for Setting the 12/24 Hour Format to select MM/DD (month/day) or
information about how to use the 1. Press the CONFIG button. DD/MM (day/month).
menu system.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
Setting the Time and Date Power Outlets
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
1. Press the CONFIG button. The vehicle has two accessory
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob power outlets; one is located below
2. Select Time and Date Settings. to select the 12 hour or 24 hour the climate control system and the
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. display format. other is inside the center console
storage. They can be used to plug
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to in electrical equipment, such as a
adjust the highlighted value. cell phone or an MP3 player.
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob The accessory power outlets do not
to select the next value. work when the key is removed from
the ignition and the driver door is
opened. This helps to preserve the
battery life of the vehicle.
Certain power accessory plugs Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
may not be compatible with the could be a problem with a vehicle
accessory power outlet and could Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
overload vehicle and adapter fuses. lights work together to indicate a
If a problem is experienced, see
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
your dealer. Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
When adding electrical equipment, signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
be sure to follow the proper before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
installation instructions included with to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
the equipment. See Add-On replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑68. warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power outlet Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
can cause damage not covered could be a problem with a vehicle
by the vehicle warranty. The function. Some warning lights come
power outlets are designed for on briefly when the engine is started
accessory power plugs only, such to indicate they are working.
as cell phone charge cords.
Instrument Cluster
V8 English Shown, V6, Metric, and Manual Transmission Similar

ZL1 English Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The trip odometer shows how far
vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last set
hour (mph). to zero.
Set the odometer using the Driver
Odometer Information Center (DIC).
The odometer shows how far the To set the trip odometer to zero,
vehicle has been driven, in either press and hold the SET button while
kilometers or miles. the trip odometer display is
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant showing.
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new Tachometer Metric
one is set to the mileage of the old The tachometer displays the engine
odometer. If this is not possible, it is speed in revolutions per
set at zero and a label is put on the minute (rpm).
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, a Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only)
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information
see Fuel System Messages on
page 5‑39.
Here are some situations that can
occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
English
reads full.
When the ignition is on, the fuel Metric
. It takes a little more or less fuel
gauge shows about how much fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank.
indicated. For example, the
An arrow on the fuel gauge shows gauge may have indicated the
the side of the vehicle on which the tank was half full, but it actually
fuel door is located. took a little more or less than
The gauge indicates empty before half the tank's capacity to fill
the vehicle is out of fuel, to show the tank.
that the vehicle's fuel tank should be . The pointer on the fuel gauge is
filled soon. on empty when the ignition is off.
The gauge is automatically centered

at zero every time the engine is
started. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point.
Changes in ambient pressure, such
as driving in mountains and
changing weather, will slightly
change the zero reading.
Engine Oil Pressure English

Gauge For vehicles with the oil pressure
gauge, it is located near the shift
English lever, and shows the engine oil
This gauge, located near the shift pressure in kPa (kilopascals) or psi
lever, indicates vacuum during light (pounds per square inch) when the
to moderate throttle and boost under engine is running.
heavier throttle.
It displays the air pressure level in
the intake manifold before it enters
the engine's combustion chamber.
Metric
Oil pressure may vary with engine Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Engine Oil Temperature
speed, outside temperature, and oil maintenance can damage the
viscosity, but readings above the engine. Driving with the engine
Gauge
low pressure zone indicate the oil low can also damage the
normal operating range. When engine. The repairs would not be
the oil pressure reaches the low covered by the vehicle warranty.
pressure zone, a message appears Check the oil level as soon as
in the Driver Information Center possible. Add oil if required, but
(DIC). See Engine Oil Messages on if the oil level is within the
page 5‑38 and Engine Oil on operating range and the oil
page 10‑13 for more information. pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
{ WARNING the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
Do not keep driving if the oil A reading in the low pressure zone
pressure is low. The engine can can be caused by a dangerously Metric
become so hot that it catches fire. low oil level or some other problem
Someone could be burned. Check causing low oil pressure. Check the
the oil as soon as possible and oil as soon as possible.
have the vehicle serviced.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
English English
For vehicles with this gauge, it is This gauge indicates the engine
near the shift lever and indicates coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
engine oil temperature. If the pointer moved to the H or the
gauge pointed moves to the higher shaded area, the engine coolant is
end of the gauge, the engine oil operating hotter than normal. It is
temperature is operating hotter than acceptable if this happens during
normal. It is acceptable if this aggressive driving or racetrack
happens during aggressive driving usage. The DIC will display a
or racetrack usage. The DIC will warning message if the engine oil
display a warning message if the temperature exceeds an acceptable
engine oil temperature exceeds an level. See Engine Cooling System
acceptable level. See Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑37 in DIC.
Messages on page 5‑38 in DIC.
Transmission If the gauge is reading in the red Voltmeter Gauge

area and/or a message appears in
Temperature Gauge the Driver Information Center (DIC),
(Except ZL1) the vehicle must be stopped and the
cause checked. One possible cause
is a low fluid level in the
transmission.
For information on the DIC
messages see Transmission
Messages on page 5‑44.
Notice: If the vehicle is driven Metric
with the transmission
Metric temperature gauge above the
normal operating range, the
transmission can be damaged.
This could lead to costly repairs
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not drive the
vehicle while the transmission
temperature gauge reading is
above normal. See your dealer for English
service.
For vehicles with this gauge, it is
English located near the shift lever, and
shows the battery's state of charge
For vehicles with this gauge, it is in DC volts.
located near the shift lever, and
shows the transmission oil
temperature when the ignition is on.
When the engine is running, and the However, readings in either warning This cycle may continue several
ignition is on, this gauge shows the zone can indicate a possible times if the driver remains or
condition of the charging system. problem in the electrical system. becomes unbuckled while the
The vehicle's charging system Have the vehicle serviced as soon vehicle is moving.
regulates voltage based on the state as possible. If the driver safety belt is buckled,
of charge of the battery. It is normal neither the light nor the chime
for the voltmeter to fluctuate. Safety Belt Reminders comes on.
Readings between the low and high
warning zones indicate the normal Driver Safety Belt Reminder Passenger Safety Belt
operating range. Light Reminder Light
Readings in the low warning zone There is a driver safety belt
can occur when a large number of reminder light on the instrument
electrical accessories are operating panel cluster.
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a message
appears in the Driver Information When the vehicle is started, this
Center (DIC) and/or the charging light flashes and a chime may come
system light comes on. See Battery on to remind front passengers to
Voltage and Charging Messages on When the vehicle is started, this fasten their safety belt. Then the
page 5‑35 and Charging System light flashes and a chime may come light stays on solid until the belt is
Light on page 5‑18 for more on to remind the driver to fasten buckled.
information. their safety belt. Then the light stays See Passenger Airbag Status
on solid until the belt is buckled. Indicator on page 5‑17.
This cycle continues several times if Airbag Readiness Light

the front passenger remains or { WARNING
becomes unbuckled while the This light shows if there is an
vehicle is moving. electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
If the front passenger safety belt is the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
buckled, neither the chime nor the sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be
light comes on. the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in
The front passenger safety belt the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a
reminder light and chime may turn module. For more information on the crash, or they could even inflate
on if an object is put on the seat airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
such as a briefcase, handbag, on page 3‑17. injury, have the vehicle serviced
grocery bag, laptop, or other right away.
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
The airbag readiness light comes on

for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have the vehicle
fixed immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both status
passenger airbag status indicator indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol are no lights at all, there may be a
The vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds problem with the lights or the
sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using passenger sensing system. See
Sensing System on page 3‑25 for remote start, if equipped, to start your dealer for service.
important safety information. The your vehicle from a distance, you
overhead console has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
may not see the system check.
Then, after several seconds, the
{ WARNING
status indicator will light either ON If the airbag readiness light ever
or OFF, or either the on or off comes on and stays on, it means
symbol, to let you know the status of that something may be wrong
the right front passenger frontal with the airbag system. To help
airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others,
If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right
United States lit on the passenger airbag status away. See Airbag Readiness
indicator, it means that the right Light on page 5‑16 for more
front passenger frontal airbag is information, including important
enabled (may inflate). safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
Canada and Mexico turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven

with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the
A computer system called OBD II engine is running, this indicates that
The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned there is an OBD II problem and
Generation) monitors the operation service is required.
on, but the engine is not running, as of the vehicle to ensure emissions
a check to show the light is working. are at acceptable levels, to produce Malfunctions often are indicated by
It should go out when the engine is a cleaner environment. This light the system before any problem is
started. comes on when the vehicle is apparent. Being aware of the light
If the light stays on, or comes on placed in ON/RUN, as a check to can prevent more serious damage
while driving, there may be a show it is working. If it does not, to the vehicle. This system assists
problem with the electrical charging have the vehicle serviced by your the service technician in correctly
system. Have it checked by your dealer. See Ignition Positions on diagnosing any malfunction.
dealer. Driving while this light is on page 9‑20 for more information. Notice: If the vehicle is
could drain the battery. continually driven with this light
When this light comes on, the Driver on, the emission controls might
Information Center (DIC) also not work as well, the vehicle fuel
displays a message. economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
See Battery Voltage and Charging smoothly. This could lead to
Messages on page 5‑35. costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to The following may correct an
engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle: emission system malfunction:
intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. . Check that the fuel cap is fully
vehicle or the replacement of the installed. See Filling the Tank on
original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations.
page 9‑59. The diagnostic
those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the fuel
Performance Criteria (TPC) can cap has been left off or
affect the vehicle's emission If the light continues to flash, stop
and park the vehicle. Turn the improperly installed. A loose or
controls and can cause this light missing fuel cap allows fuel to
to come on. Modifications to vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
and restart the engine. If the light is evaporate into the atmosphere.
these systems could lead to A few driving trips with the cap
costly repairs not covered by the still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer for properly installed should turn the
vehicle warranty. This could also light off.
result in a failure to pass a service as soon as possible.
required Emission Inspection/ Light On Steady: An emission
. Check that good quality fuel is
Maintenance test. See control system malfunction has used. Poor fuel quality causes
Accessories and Modifications on been detected on the vehicle. the engine not to run as
page 10‑4. Diagnosis and service might be efficiently as designed and may
required. cause stalling after start-up,
This light comes on during a stalling when the vehicle is
malfunction in one of two ways: changed into gear, misfiring,
Light Flashing: A misfire condition hesitation on acceleration,
has been detected. A misfire or stumbling on acceleration.
increases vehicle emissions and These conditions might go away
could damage the emission control once the engine is warmed up.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass
occurs, change the fuel brand used. Maintenance Programs inspection if:
It will require at least one full tank of . The malfunction indicator lamp is
the proper fuel to turn the light off. Some local governments may have
programs to inspect the on-vehicle on with the engine running, or if
See Recommended Fuel on emission control equipment. For the the light does not come on when
page 9‑56. inspection, the emission system test the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
If none of the above have made the equipment is connected to the while the engine is off.
light turn off, your dealer can check vehicle’s Data Link . The OBD II (On-Board
the vehicle. The dealer has the Connector (DLC). Diagnostics) system determines
proper test equipment and that critical emission control
diagnostic tools to fix any systems have not been
mechanical or electrical problems completely diagnosed. The
that might have developed. vehicle would be considered not
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
The DLC is under the instrument down. The diagnostic system is
panel on the outboard side of the designed to evaluate critical
steering wheel. See your dealer if emission control systems during
assistance is needed. normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake

Light system warning light also comes on { WARNING
when the parking brake is set. The
The vehicle brake system consists light stays on if the parking brake The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one does not fully release. If it stays on working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining after the parking brake is fully system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the released, it means the vehicle has a Driving with the brake system
vehicle. For normal braking brake problem. warning light on can lead to a
performance, both circuits need crash. If the light is still on after
If, while driving, the light comes on
to be working the vehicle has been pulled off
and a brake message comes on the
the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there Driver Information Center (DIC), pull
off the road and stop carefully. The have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away. pedal could be harder to push or the service.
pedal can go closer to the floor.
It could take longer to stop. If the The brake message remains on until
light is still on, have the vehicle the MENU button is pressed. The
towed for service. See Antilock brake light remains until the problem
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light is fixed. See Brake System
on page 5‑22 and Towing the Messages on page 5‑35 for more
Metric English Vehicle on page 10‑96. information.
If the vehicle has antilock brakes,

this light should come on when the
key is turned to START. If it does
not come on, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a
problem.
Antilock Brake System If the ABS light is the only light on, This light comes on when the
the vehicle has regular brakes, but Traction Control System (TCS) has
(ABS) Warning Light the antilock brakes are not been turned off by pressing and
functioning. releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
If both the ABS and the brake button.
system warning light are on, the This light also comes on and the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not system turns off if there is a problem
functioning and there is a problem with the TCS.
with the regular brakes. See your If the light comes on and stays on
dealer for service. for an extended period of time while
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started. See Brake System Warning Light on the system is turned on, the vehicle
page 5‑21 and Brake System needs service.
If the light does not come on, have it Messages on page 5‑35.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if See Traction Control System (TCS)
there is a problem. on page 9‑41 and StabiliTrak®
Traction Off Light System on page 9‑43.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the This light should come on briefly as
vehicle needs service. A chime may the engine is started. If it does not
also sound when the light comes on come on, have the vehicle serviced
steady. by your dealer.
Traction Control System If the TCS indicator/warning light This light comes on when the
comes on and stays on while StabiliTrak system is turned off.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light driving, the vehicle needs service. If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
See Traction Control System (TCS) limited. If the StabiliTrak system is
on page 9‑41 and StabiliTrak® off, the system does not assist in
System on page 9‑43 for more controlling the vehicle. Turn on the
information. TCS and the StabiliTrak system and
the warning light turns off.
Traction Control System For SS models, when both TCS and
StabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicle
The StabiliTrak system or the (TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® is in Competitive Mode. A warning
Traction Control System (TCS) OFF Light also appears in the DIC for
indicator/warning light comes on StabiliTrak Competitive Mode. See
briefly while starting the engine. Ride Control System Messages on
If it does not, have the vehicle page 5‑40.
serviced by your dealer. If the For ZL1, when both TCS and
system is working normally, the StabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicle
indicator light will then go off. is in Performance Traction
The indicator/warning light flashes Management or both TCS and
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system This light should come on briefly as StabiliTrak systems are disabled.
is working to control the vehicle on the engine is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced See Traction Control System (TCS)
a low traction surface. on page 9‑41, StabiliTrak® System
by your dealer.
on page 9‑43 and Competitive
Driving Mode on page 9‑44.
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and

Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. The oil pressure light should come
See Tire Pressure Monitor on briefly as the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10‑65. If it does not come on, have the
Monitor System (TPMS), this light vehicle serviced by your dealer.
comes on briefly when the engine is Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
started. It provides information Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
about tire pressures and the TPMS. maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. Driving with the engine could be low on oil and might have
When the Light Is On Steady
oil low can also damage the some other system problem. See
This indicates that one or more of engine. The repairs would not be your dealer.
the tires are significantly covered by the vehicle warranty.
underinflated. Check the oil level as soon as
A Driver Information Center (DIC) possible. Add oil if required, but
tire pressure message may also if the oil level is within the
display. See Tire Messages on operating range and the oil
page 5‑43. Stop as soon as pressure light remains lit, have
possible, and inflate the tires to the the vehicle serviced. Always
pressure value shown on the Tire follow the maintenance schedule
and Loading Information label. See for changing engine oil.
Tire Pressure on page 10‑62.
Immobilizer Light High-Beam On Light Taillamp Indicator Light
The immobilizer light should come This light comes on when the This light comes on when the
on briefly as the engine is started. high-beam headlamps are in use. taillamps are in use.
If it does not come on, have the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Changer on page 6‑2. Cruise Control Light
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
Front Fog Lamp Light
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Vehicle Security on
page 2‑11.
This light is white when the cruise
control is active and green when the
The front fog lamp light comes on system is set.
when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the cruise
The light goes out when the fog control is turned off. See Cruise
lamps are turned off. See Front Fog Control on page 9‑50.
Lamps on page 6‑5.
Information Displays The bottom of the DIC display Trip/Fuel Menu Items
shows what position the shift lever
Press the MENU button on the
is in (Automatic Transmission Only),
Driver Information the odometer, and the direction the
turn signal lever until Trip/Fuel
Center (DIC) Information Menu is displayed. Use
vehicle is driving.
the thumbwheel to scroll through the
The vehicle may have a DIC. The DIC Buttons following menu items:
DIC displays information about your . Digital Speedometer
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is . Trip 1
detected. See Vehicle Messages on . Trip 2
page 5‑35. All messages appear in
the DIC display located in the center
. Fuel Range
of the instrument panel cluster. . Average Fuel Economy
The vehicle may also have features A. SET/CLR: Use this button to set . Average Vehicle Speed
that can be customized through the or clear the menu item when it
controls on the radio. See Vehicle is displayed.
. Turn-by-Turn
Personalization on page 5‑46. . Blank
B. w / x (Thumbwheel): Use the
DIC Operation and Displays thumbwheel to scroll through Digital Speedometer
The DIC has different displays the items in each menu. The speedometer shows how fast
which can be accessed by using the C. Menu: Press this button to get the vehicle is moving in either
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
located on the left side of the Vehicle Information Menu. per hour (mph). The speedometer
steering wheel. The DIC displays Some models may also have a cannot be reset.
trip, fuel, vehicle system information, Performance Menu.
and warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
Trip 1 and Trip 2 Average Fuel Economy Turn-by-Turn

The Trip display shows the current The Average Fuel Economy display This display is used for the OnStar
distance traveled, in either shows the approximate average Turn-by-Turn guidance. See OnStar
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) Overview on page 14‑1.
the last reset for the trip odometer. or miles per gallon (mpg). This
The trip odometer can be reset to number is calculated based on the Blank Display
zero by pressing the trip reset stem number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded This display shows no information.
or the SET/CLR button while the trip since the last time this menu item
odometer display is showing. was reset. The fuel economy can be Vehicle Information Menu
reset by pressing the SET/CLR Items
Fuel Range button while the Average Fuel Press the MENU button on the turn
The Fuel Range display shows the Economy display is showing. signal lever until Vehicle Information
approximate distance the vehicle Menu is displayed. Use the
can be driven without refueling. The Average Vehicle Speed
thumbwheel to scroll through the
fuel range estimate is based on an The Average Vehicle Speed display following menu items:
average of the vehicle's fuel shows the average speed of the
economy over recent driving history vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
. Unit
and the amount of fuel remaining in or miles per hour (mph). This . Tire Pressure
the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be average is calculated based on the . Remaining Oil Life
reset. various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value. . Coolant Temp
The average speed can be reset by . Battery Voltage
pressing the SET/CLR button while
the Average Vehicle Speed display
. Speed Warning
is showing.
Unit When the remaining oil life is low, Coolant Temperature

Move the thumbwheel up or down to the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This display, available on some
switch between US or Metric when message will appear on the display. vehicles, shows the temperature of
the Unit display is active. Press See Engine Oil Messages on the engine cooling system fluid in
SET/CLR to confirm the setting. page 5‑38. The oil should be either degrees Celsius (°C) or
This will change the displays on the changed as soon as possible. See degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
cluster and DIC to either English Engine Oil on page 10‑13. In
(US) or metric measurements. addition to the engine oil life system Battery Voltage
monitoring the oil life, additional This display, available on some
Tire Pressure maintenance is recommended in the vehicles, shows the current battery
The display will show a vehicle with Maintenance Schedule. See voltage. If the voltage is in the
the approximate pressures of all Maintenance Schedule on normal range, the value will display.
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed page 11‑3. For example, the display may read
in either kilopascal (kPa) or in Remember, the Oil Life display Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
pounds per square inch (psi). See must be reset after each oil change. vehicle's charging system regulates
Tire Pressure Monitor System on It will not reset itself. Also, be voltage based on the state of the
page 10‑64 and Tire Pressure careful not to reset the Oil Life battery. The battery voltage can
Monitor Operation on page 10‑65. display accidentally at any time fluctuate while viewing this
other than when the oil has just information on the DIC. This is
Remaining Oil Life been changed. It cannot be reset normal. See Charging System Light
This display shows an estimate of accurately until the next oil change. on page 5‑18. If there is a problem
the oil's remaining useful life. To reset the engine oil life system with the battery charging system,
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is press the SET/CLR button while the the DIC will display a message. See
displayed, that means 99% of the Oil Life display is active. See Battery Voltage and Charging
current oil life remains. Engine Oil Life System on Messages on page 5‑35.
page 10‑16.
Speed Warning Lap Timer The battery voltage display shows

Speed Warning allows the driver to The Lap Timer display shows total the current battery voltage. The
set a speed that they do not want to time, lap times, top speed, average vehicle's charging system regulates
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, speed, and average time when voltage based on the state of the
press SET/CLR when Speed active. battery. The battery voltage can
Warning is displayed. fluctuate while viewing this
While in this display, press SET/ information on the DIC. This is
Performance Menu CLR to activate the lap timer normal. See Charging System Light
function. While timer is active, press on page 5‑18. If there is a problem
Some vehicles may have a MENU to store the current lap time with the battery charging system,
performance menu. Press the and start timer for new lap. Press the DIC will display a message. See
MENU button on the turn signal SET/CLR to pause or resume lap Battery Voltage and Charging
lever until Performance Menu is timer. Press and hold SET/CLR to Messages on page 5‑35.
displayed. Use the thumbwheel to clear and exit the lap timer function.
scroll through the following menu Compass
items: Coolant Temperature and Battery
Voltage The vehicle may have a compass
. Lap Timer display in the Driver Information
The coolant temperature display Center (DIC). See Compass on
. Coolant Temperature and shows the temperature of the
Battery Voltage page 5‑4.
engine cooling system fluid in either
degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
Head-Up Display (HUD) The images are projected through See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8 and
the HUD lens located on the driver Driver Information Center (DIC) on
side of the instrument panel. page 5‑26.
{ WARNING Notice: If you try to use the HUD
If the HUD image is too bright or image as a parking aid, you may
too high in your field of view, it misjudge the distance and
may take you more time to see damage your vehicle. Do not use
things you need to see when it is the HUD image as a parking aid.
dark outside. Be sure to keep the The tap shift gear will also appear
HUD image dim and placed low in on the HUD if the vehicle has tap
your field of view. shift and it is active. The shift timing
lights and a lateral acceleration
For vehicles with the Head-Up (G-Force) indicator appear on
Display (HUD), some information ZL1 models only.
concerning the operation of the The HUD information can be HUD Display on the Vehicle
vehicle is projected onto the displayed in one of three languages:
windshield. This includes but is not Windshield
English, French, or Spanish. The
limited to the speedometer reading, speedometer reading and other The HUD information appears as an
rpm reading, transmission position, numerical values can be displayed image focused out toward the front
outside air temperature, compass in either English or metric units. of the vehicle.
heading, and a brief display of the
The language selection is changed When the ignition key is turned to
current radio station, including XM
through the radio and the units of ON/RUN, the HUD will display an
information or CD track. It will also
measurement selection is changed introductory message for a short
display turn-by-turn information if
through the trip computer in the time, until the HUD is ready.
the vehicle has OnStar® service.
Driver Information Center (DIC).
The following indicator lights come When the HUD is on, the
on the instrument panel when speedometer reading is continually
activated and may also appear on displayed. The current radio station
the HUD: or CD track number may display for
. Turn Signal Indicators a short period of time after the radio
or CD track status changes. This
. High-Beam Indicator Symbol may happen whenever radio
The HUD temporarily displays ICE information is changed. The
POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE speedometer size is reduced when
when this message is on the DIC radio, CD information, or warnings
trip computer. are displayed on the HUD.
The HUD also temporarily displays When the phone feature is
the following messages on vehicles activated, the HUD will briefly The HUD control is located to the
with these systems, when they are display phone information, right of the steering wheel.
active: if available.
To adjust the HUD image so that
. Check Tire Pressure items are properly displayed:
. Cruise Set To 1. Adjust the driver seat to a
comfortable position.
. Low Fuel
2. Start the engine.
. Speed Limited To
3. Adjust the HUD controls.
. Traction Control Active
. Stability Control Active
Use the following settings to adjust The four formats are as follows:
the HUD.
OFF: Turn the HUD dimming knob
fully counterclockwise until the HUD
display turns off.
Brightness: Turn the dimming knob
English
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the display. English
« (Up): ª (Down): Press the up
or down arrows to center the HUD
image in your view. The HUD image
can only be adjusted up and down,
not side to side.
Metric
PAGE: Press to select the display
formats. Release the PAGE button Metric Format Two: This display includes
when the format number with the Format One: This display gives the the information in Format One
desired display is shown on the speedometer reading (in English or without the transmission
HUD. If vehicle messages are metric units), turn signal indication, information, the outside air
displayed, pressing PAGE may clear high-beam indication, transmission temperature, and compass heading.
the message. positions, outside air temperature,
and compass heading.
Transmission on page 9‑37 or

Manual Transmission on page 9‑37
for more information.
All formats except format four, will
show turn-by-turn navigation
information and provide details
English English about the next driving maneuver to
be made.
Metric Metric
Format Three: This display Format Four: This display appears English
includes the information in Format on ZL1 models only. It gives the
One along with a circular speedometer reading (in English or
tachometer, but without outside air metric units), transmission positions
temperature and compass heading. (automatic transmission only), Shift
Timing Light Position and lateral
acceleration (G) indicators. The
radio, CD, navigation, and phone Metric
information do not appear in the
format four HUD display. When you near your destination, the
HUD will display a distance bar that
The shift timing lights at the top of will empty the closer you get to your
the display will appear with increase destination.
in engine RPM. See Automatic
All navigation information is Care of the HUD If You Cannot See the HUD
provided to the HUD by the Image When the Ignition Is On
Clean the inside of the windshield
OnStar® service, for vehicles with
as needed to remove any dirt or film . Is anything covering the
this feature.
that could reduce the sharpness or HUD lens?
The HUD image displayed on the clarity of the HUD image.
windshield will automatically dim
. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, enough?
and brighten to compensate for
clean cloth that has household glass
outside lighting. However, the HUD . Is the HUD image adjusted to
cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
brightness control can still be the proper height?
HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
adjusted as needed. .
spray cleaner directly on the lens Are you wearing polarized
The HUD image can temporarily because the cleaner could leak into sunglasses?
light up depending on the angle and the unit.
position of the sunlight on the HUD If the HUD Image Is Not Clear
display. This is normal and will . Is the HUD image too bright?
change when the angle of the
sunlight on the HUD display
. Are the windshield and HUD
changes. lens clean?
Polarized sunglasses could make If the HUD image is not correct,

the HUD image harder to see. contact your dealer.
Keep in mind that the windshield is
part of the HUD system.
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and SERVICE BATTERY

Charging Messages CHARGING SYSTEM
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle or This message is displayed when
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE there is a fault in the battery
some action that may be needed
to correct a condition. Multiple This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle to
messages may display one after the vehicle has detected that the battery your dealer for service.
other. voltage is dropping beyond a
The messages that do not require
reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages
system starts reducing certain
immediate action can be features of the vehicle that you may BRAKE FLUID LOW
acknowledged and cleared by be able to notice. At the point that
pressing SET/CLR. The messages This message is displayed when the
features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low; see Brake
that require immediate action cannot is displayed. It means that the
be cleared until that action is Fluid on page 10‑34.
vehicle is trying to save the charge
performed. All messages should be in the battery. Turn off unnecessary RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
taken seriously and clearing the accessories to allow the battery to
messages does not correct the This message is displayed as a
recharge. reminder that the parking brake is
problem.
LOW BATTERY on. Release it before you attempt to
drive.
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑35.
Compass Messages CLOSE TRUNK TO TEMPERATURE TOO

OPERATE TOP LOW – TOP DISABLED
CAL
This message displays if the trunk is This message displays and a sound
This message is displayed when the open while you are trying to operate will be heard when the power
compass needs to be calibrated. the convertible top. Make sure the convertible top button is pressed
See Compass on page 5‑4. trunk is closed before operating the and the power convertible top pump
–– convertible top. See Convertible Top motor temperature is below 0°C
on page 2‑19. (32°F). Wait for the power
Dashes will be displayed if the convertible top pump motor to
compass needs service. See your COMPLETE TOP MOTION TO warm up before using the power
dealer for service. OPEN TRUNK convertible top.
This message displays if attempting TOP NOT SECURE
Convertible Top to open the trunk before the top has
Messages been fully opened or closed. This message displays when the
power convertible top is closed
BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO REDUCE VEHICLE SPEED TO without the convertible top front
LOW – TOP DISABLED OPERATE TOP latch engaged or when the folding
This message is displayed when the top is not fully stowed. Press and
This message displays when the
vehicle is moving too fast to safely hold the convertible top button in the
battery voltage is too low to operate
operate the convertible top. Reduce open direction until a beep is heard
the convertible top.
the vehicle speed. or close the top and engage the
EXTEND CARGO SHADE TO latch.
OPERATE
This message displays if the rear
trunk partition is not extended and
engaged.
TOP SYSTEM OVERHEATED, Door Ajar Messages Engine Cooling System

PLEASE WAIT Messages
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the power This message will display when the A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
convertible top button is pressed driver door is open. Close the door ENGINE TEMP
and the power convertible top pump completely. This message displays when the
motor is overheated. Wait for the HOOD OPEN engine coolant becomes hotter than
power convertible top pump motor the normal operating temperature.
to cool down before using the power This message will display when the To avoid added strain on a hot
convertible top. hood is open. Close the hood engine, the air conditioning
completely. compressor automatically turns off.
UNLATCH TOP
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN When the coolant temperature
This message displays and a sound returns to normal, the air
will be heard if you try to lower the This message will display when the conditioning compressor turns
convertible top without first passenger door is open. Close the back on. You can continue to drive
releasing the front latch. See door completely. the vehicle.
Convertible Top on page 2‑19.
TRUNK OPEN If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
Cruise Control Messages This message will display when the
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
trunk is open. Close the trunk
CRUISE SET TO XXX completely. damage to the engine.
cruise control is set and shows the
speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑50.
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
COOLANT ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message will display if the This message displays if low oil
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant This message displays when the pressure levels occur. Stop the
on page 10‑24. engine oil needs to be changed. vehicle as soon as safely possible
When you change the engine oil, be and do not operate it until the cause
ENGINE sure to reset the Oil Life System. of the low oil pressure has been
OVERHEATED — IDLE See Engine Oil Life System on corrected. Check the oil as soon as
ENGINE page 10‑16, Driver Information possible and have the vehicle
Center (DIC) on page 5‑26, Engine serviced by your dealer.
Oil on page 10‑13 and Maintenance
engine coolant temperature is too
Schedule on page 11‑3. Engine Power Messages
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
ENGINE ENGINE
OVERHEATED — STOP This message displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced.
ENGINE engine oil temperature is too hot. Reduced engine power can affect
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
This message displays and a until it cools down.
continuous chime sounds if the If this message is on, but there
engine cooling system reaches ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL is no reduction in performance,
unsafe temperatures for operation. proceed to your destination. The
This message displays when the performance may be reduced the
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
engine oil level is too low. Check the next time the vehicle is driven. The
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
oil level. See Engine Oil on vehicle may be driven at a reduced
severe damage. This message
page 10‑13. speed while this message is
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature. on, but maximum acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on, the REPLACE BATTERY IN LEFT FRONT TURN
vehicle should be taken to your REMOTE KEY INDICATOR FAILURE
dealer for service as soon as
possible. This message displays when the This message is displayed if the
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry turn signal bulb needs to be
(RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced. See Headlamps, Front
Fuel System Messages replaced. Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
FUEL LEVEL LOW (Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑43 or
Lamp Messages Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as AUTOMATIC LIGHT page 10‑42 and Replacement Bulbs
soon as possible CONTROL ON on page 10‑46.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message is displayed when the LEFT REAR TURN INDICATOR
This message displays when the automatic light control has been FAILURE
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 6‑3. This message is displayed if the
fuel cap. turn signal bulb needs to be
AUTOMATIC LIGHT replaced. See Bulb Replacement on
Key and Lock Messages CONTROL OFF page 10‑41.
NUMBER OF KEYS This message is displayed when the
PROGRAMMED automatic light control has been
turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
This message displays when System on page 6‑3.
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
RIGHT FRONT TURN Object Detection System Ride Control System

INDICATOR FAILURE Messages Messages
This message is displayed if the
turn signal bulb needs to be PARK ASSIST OFF PERF TRACTION 1 – WET
replaced. See Headlamps, Front This message displays when the ACTIVE HANDLING ON
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps park assist system has been turned SUSPENSION MODE TOUR
(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑43 or off or when there is a temporary (ZL1 Only)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and condition causing the system to be This message displays when this
Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking Performance Traction Management
page 10‑42 and Replacement Bulbs Assist on page 9‑52. mode is selected. The instrument
on page 10‑46. panel cluster light will also be on
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
RIGHT REAR TURN when this mode is selected. Once
This message displays if there is a this message is acknowledged,
INDICATOR FAILURE problem with the Ultrasonic Rear PTM1 – WET ESC = ON displays
This message is displayed if the Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do on the bottom of the digital speed
turn signal bulb needs to be not use this system to help you page. Launch Control is available
replaced. See Bulb Replacement on park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist when this mode is selected. In this
page 10‑41. on page 9‑52. See your dealer for mode, the Traction Control and
service. Active Handling System are
TURN SIGNAL ON
available but intended for use on
This message is displayed if the wet race track conditions. Adjust
turn signal has been left on. Turn off your driving accordingly. See
the turn signal. “Performance Traction Management
(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch
Control (V8 with Manual
Transmission Only)” under
Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑44.
PERF TRACTION 2 – DRY PERF TRACTION 3 – SPORT1 PERF TRACTION 4 – SPORT2

ACTIVE HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
SUSPENSION MODE TOUR SUSPENSION MODE SPORT SUSPENSION MODE SPORT
(ZL1 Only) (ZL1 Only) (ZL1 Only)
This message displays when this This message displays when this This message displays when this
Performance Traction Management Performance Traction Management Performance Traction Management
mode is selected. The instrument mode is selected. The instrument mode is selected. The instrument
panel cluster light will also be on panel cluster light will also be on panel cluster light will also be on
when this mode is selected. Once when this mode is selected. Once when this mode is selected. Once
this message is acknowledged, this message is acknowledged, this message is acknowledged,
PTM2 – DRY ESC = ON displays PTM3 – SPORT1 ESC = ON PTM4 – SPORT2 ESC = OFF
on the bottom of the digital speed displays on the bottom of the digital displays on the bottom of the digital
page. Launch Control is available speed page. Launch Control is speed page. Launch Control is
when this mode is selected. In this available when this mode is available when this mode is
mode, the Traction Control and selected. In this mode, the Traction selected. In this mode, the Traction
Active Handling System are Control and Active Handling System Control is available but intended for
available but intended for use are available but intended for use use on dry race track conditions.
on dry race track conditions. Adjust on dry race track conditions. Adjust The Active Handling System is
your driving accordingly. See your driving accordingly. See disabled when this mode is
“Performance Traction Management “Performance Traction Management selected. This mode will require
(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch (PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch more driver skill than modes 1–3.
Control (V8 with Manual Control (V8 with Manual Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Transmission Only)” under Transmission Only)” under “Performance Traction Management
Competitive Driving Mode on Competitive Driving Mode on (PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch
page 9‑44. page 9‑44. Control (V8 with Manual
Transmission Only)” under
page 9‑44.
PERF TRACTION 5 – RACE SERVICE STABILITRAK SERVICE SUSPENSION

ACTIVE HANDLING OFF This message displays if there is a SYSTEM (ZL1 Only)
SUSPENSION MODE TRACK problem with the StabiliTrak® This message displays when the
(ZL1 Only) system. If this message appears, try Selective Ride Control system has
This message displays when this to reset the system. Stop; turn off detected a malfunction and the
Performance Traction Management the engine and remove the key from vehicle speed will be limited. The
mode is selected. The instrument the ignition; open and close the system must be serviced. See your
panel cluster light will also be on driver door and wait for at least dealer. See Selective Ride Control
when this mode is selected. Once one minute. During this time you on page 9‑49 and “SPEED LIMITED
this message is acknowledged, should notice the lights on the TO XXX (ZL1 Only)” under Vehicle
PTM5 – RACE ESC = OFF displays cluster turn off. After a minute has Speed Messages on page 5‑45.
on the bottom of the digital speed passed, start the engine again.
If this message still comes on, it SERVICE TRACTION
page. Launch Control is available
when this mode is selected. In this means there is a problem. See your CONTROL
mode, the Traction Control is dealer for service. The vehicle is This message displays when there
available but intended for use on dry safe to drive; however, you do not is a problem with the Traction
race track conditions. The Active have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so Control System (TCS). When this
Handling System is disabled when reduce your speed and drive message is displayed, the system
this mode is selected. This mode accordingly. will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
will require more driver skill than driving accordingly. See your dealer
modes 1–4. Adjust your driving for service.
accordingly. See “Performance
Traction Management (PTM) (ZL1
Only)” and “Launch Control (V8 with
Manual Transmission Only)” under
page 9‑44.
STABILITRAK COMPETITIVE Anti-theft Alarm System Tire Messages

MODE (LS3 and L99 Only) Messages CHECK XXX TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when or TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
Competitive Mode is selected. See THEFT ATTEMPTED
“Competitive Driving Mode (Non
AIR TO TIRE
This message displays if the vehicle
ZL1)” under Competitive Driving detects a tamper condition. This message displays if the vehicle
Mode on page 9‑44. detects low pressure in one or more
Service Vehicle Messages tires.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message also displays
This message displays when the SERVICE AC SYSTEM LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,
traction control system has been This message is displayed if there is LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
disabled. See Traction Control a problem with the air conditioning indicate the location of the low tire.
System (TCS) on page 9‑41. system. Take the vehicle to your The low tire pressure warning light
dealer for service. will also come on. See Tire
Airbag System Messages Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
SERVICE AIRBAG If a tire pressure message appears
This message is displayed if there is
This message displays if there is a a problem with the power steering on the DIC, stop as soon as you
problem with the airbag system. system. Take the vehicle to your can. Inflate the tires by adding air
Take the vehicle to your dealer for dealer for service. until the tire pressure is equal to the
service. values shown on the Tire and
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Loading Information label. See Tires
This message is displayed if there is on page 10‑54, Vehicle Load Limits
a problem with the vehicle. Take the on page 9‑14, and Tire Pressure on
vehicle to your dealer for service. page 10‑62.
The DIC also shows the tire Transmission Messages SHIFT TO PARK
pressure values. See Driver
1 – 4 SHIFT This message displays when the
Information Center (DIC) on
transmission needs to be shifted to
page 5‑26. This message displays when you P (Park). This may appear when
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR can only shift from 1 (First) to attempting to remove the key from
SYSTEM 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to the ignition if the vehicle is not in
2 (Second). See Manual P (Park).
This message displays if there is a Transmission on page 9‑37.
problem with the Tire Pressure TRANSMISSION HOT – IDLE
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire PRESS CLUTCH TO START ENGINE
Pressure Monitor Operation on This message displays when This message displays and a chime
page 10‑65. attempting to start a vehicle with a sounds if the transmission fluid in
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE manual transmission without the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
pressing on the clutch pedal. transmission fluid temperature high
This message displays when the can cause damage to the vehicle.
system is learning new tires. See SERVICE TRANSMISSION
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on This message displays if there is a allow the transmission to cool. This
page 10‑65. problem with the transmission. See message clears when the fluid
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM your dealer. temperature reaches a safe level.
RESET SHIFT DENIED
This message displays when This message displays when
resetting the TPMS. See Tire attempting to use the automatic
Pressure Monitor Operation on transmission manual mode to shift
page 10‑65. to too low of a gear. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑34.
Vehicle Reminder Vehicle Speed Messages Window Messages

Messages DRIVER SELECTED SPEED OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE LIMIT EXCEEDED WINDOW
WITH CARE This message is displayed when the This message is displayed when the
This message is displayed when ice vehicle speed is greater than the set window needs to be reprogrammed.
conditions are possible. speed. See “Speed Warning” under If the vehicle's battery has been
Driver Information Center (DIC) on recharged or disconnected, you will
TURN WIPER CONTROL TO page 5‑26. need to reprogram each front
INTERMITTENT FIRST window for the express-up feature to
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX work. See Power Windows on
This message is displayed when (ZL1 Only) page 2‑15.
attempting to adjust the intermittent
wiper speed without intermittent This message displays when a OPEN, THEN CLOSE
selected on the wiper control. See malfunction is present in the
Selective Ride Control system. The PASSENGER WINDOW
Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3. vehicle speed will be limited to a This message is displayed when the
value determined by the vehicle window needs to be reprogrammed.
when the shock absorber system If the vehicle's battery has been
has failed and the shocks are in recharged or disconnected, you will
their full soft mode. Have the vehicle need to reprogram each front
serviced by your dealer as soon as window for the express-up feature to
possible. work. See Power Windows on
page 2‑15.
Vehicle 3. Press the center of the MENU/ Climate and Air Quality
SELECT knob to select the
Personalization Select the Climate and Air Quality
Vehicle Settings menu.
menu and the following will be
The audio system controls are used The following list of menu items will displayed:
to access the personalization be available: . Remote Start Heated Seats
menus for customizing vehicle . Climate and Air Quality
features. Remote Start Heated Seats
. Comfort and Convenience
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to When on, this feature will turn the
access the Configuration . Collision/Detection Systems heated seats on when using remote
Settings Menu. . Language start on cold days.
MENU/SELECT Knob: Press the . Lighting Press the MENU/SELECT knob
center of this knob to enter the when Remote Start Heated Seats is
menus and select menu items. Turn
. Power Door Locks highlighted. Turn the knob to select
the knob to scroll through the . Remote Lock/Unlock On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
menus. and go back to the last menu.
. Return to Factory Settings
/ BACK: Press to exit or move
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Comfort and Convenience
backward in a menu.
highlight the menu. Press the knob Select the Comfort and
Entering the Personalization to select it. Each of the menus is Convenience menu and the
Menus detailed in the following information. following will be displayed:
1. Press the CONFIG button to . Chime Volume
access the Configuration
Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight Vehicle Settings.
Chime Volume Language Press the MENU/SELECT knob

This allows the selection of the when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
Select the Language menu and the
chime volume level. Turn the knob to select Off,
following will be displayed:
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob . English Press the knob to confirm and go
when Chime Volume is highlighted. back to the last menu.
. French
Turn the knob to select Normal or
High. Press the knob to confirm and . Spanish Vehicle Locator Lights
go back to the last menu. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to This allows the vehicle locator lights
select the language. Press the knob to be turned on or off.
Collision/Detection Systems
to confirm and go back to the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Select the Collision/Detection last menu. when Vehicle Locator Lights is
Systems menu and the following will
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
be displayed: Lighting
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
. Park Assist Select the Lighting menu and the and go back to the last menu.
following will be displayed:
Park Assist Power Door Locks
. Exit Lighting
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking Select Power Door Locks and the
Assist feature to be turned on or off. . Vehicle Locator Lights following will be displayed:
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Exit Lighting . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
when Park Assist is highlighted. This allows the selection of how .
Turn the knob to select On or Off. Auto Door Unlock
long the exterior lamps stay on
Press the knob to confirm and go when leaving the vehicle when it is
. Delayed Door Lock
back to the last menu. dark outside.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Delayed Door Lock Unlock Feedback (Lights)
When on, this feature will keep the When on, this feature will delay the When on, the exterior lamps will
driver door from locking when the locking of the doors. To override the flash when unlocking the vehicle
door is open. If Off is selected, the delay, press the power door lock on with the RKE transmitter.
Delayed Door Lock menu will be the instrument panel. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
available. Press the MENU/SELECT knob when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
Press the MENU/SELECT knob when Delayed Door Lock is highlighted. Turn the knob to select
when Auto Door Unlock is highlighted. Turn the knob to select Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob
highlighted. Turn the knob to select On or Off. Press the knob to confirm to confirm and go back to the
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm and go back to the last menu. last menu.
and go back to the last menu.
Remote Lock/Unlock Locking Feedback
Auto Door Unlock This allows selection of what type of
Select Remote Lock/Unlock and the
This allows selection of which of the following may be displayed: feedback is given when unlocking
doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
. Unlock Feedback (Lights)
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) Press the MENU/SELECT knob
(automatic transmission) or when . Locking Feedback
when Locking Feedback is
the key is removed from the ignition . Door Unlock Options highlighted. Turn the knob to select
(manual transmission). Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Only, or Off. Press the knob to
when Auto Door Unlock is confirm and go back to the
highlighted. Turn the knob to select last menu.
All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Door Unlock Options Universal Remote devices such as garage door

This allows selection of which doors openers, security systems, and
will unlock when pressing the unlock
System home automation devices.
button on the RKE transmitter. See Radio Frequency Statement on Do not use the Universal Remote
Press the MENU/SELECT knob page 13‑22 for information system with any garage door opener
when Door Unlock Options is regarding Part 15 of the Federal that does not have the stop and
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Communications Commission (FCC) reverse feature. This includes any
All Doors or Driver Door Only. Press rules and Industry Canada garage door opener model
the knob to confirm and go back to Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. manufactured before April 1,1982.
the last menu. Read the instructions completely
Universal Remote System before attempting to program the
Return to Factory Settings Programming Universal Remote system. Because
Select Return to Factory Settings of the steps involved, it may be
to return all of the vehicle helpful to have another person
personalization to the default available to assist with programming
settings. Turn the knob to select Yes the Universal Remote system.
or No. Press the knob to confirm Keep the original hand-held
and go back to the last menu. transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal
If the vehicle has this feature, you Remote system programming. It is
will see these buttons with one also recommended that upon the
indicator light below them in the sale of the vehicle, the programmed
overhead console. Universal Remote system buttons
be erased for security purposes.
This system provides a way to See “Erasing Universal Remote
replace up to three remote control System Buttons” later in this
transmitters used to activate section.
When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and garage
park outside of the garage. Park 1. Hold the end of the hand-held door openers may require
directly in line with and facing the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm substitution of Step 2 with the
garage door opener motor-head or (1 to 3 in) away from the procedure noted in “Gate
gate motor-head. Be sure that Universal Remote system Operator and Canadian
people and objects are clear of the buttons while keeping the Programming” later in this
garage door or gate being indicator light in view. The section.
programmed. hand-held transmitter was 3. Press and hold for five seconds
It is recommended that a new supplied by the manufacturer of the newly trained Universal
battery be installed in the hand-held the garage door opener receiver Remote system button
transmitter for quicker and more (motor-head unit). (the button selected in Step 2)
accurate transmission of the 2. At the same time, press and while observing the indicator
radio-frequency signal. hold both the hand-held light and garage door activation.
Programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the . If the indicator light stays on
Remote System three Universal Remote system continuously or the garage
buttons to be used to operate door starts to move when
For questions or help programming the garage door. Do not release the Universal Remote
the Universal Remote system, call the Universal Remote system system button is pressed
1-800-355-3515 or go to button or the hand-held and released, then the
www.homelink.com. transmitter button until the programming is complete.
Programming a garage door opener indicator light changes from a There is no need to
involves time-sensitive actions, so slowly to a rapidly flashing light. continue programming
read the entire procedure before You now may release both Steps 4–6.
starting. Otherwise, the device will buttons.
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.

. If the Universal Remote 5. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two
system indicator light blinks “Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Remote system buttons,
rapidly for two seconds, pressing this button, you will begin with Step 1 of “Programming
then turns to a constant have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Remote System.”
light and the garage door Step 6.
does not move, continue Gate Operator and Canadian
with programming 6. Immediately return to the Programming
Steps 4–6. vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal If you have questions or need help
It may be helpful to have Remote system button, selected programming the Universal Remote
another person assist with in Step 2 to control the garage system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
the remaining Steps 4–6. door, and then release it. If the to www.homelink.com.
garage door does not move or Canadian radio-frequency laws
the lamp on the garage door require transmitter signals to time
opener receiver (motor-head out or quit after several seconds of
unit) does not flash, press and transmission. This may not be long
hold the same button a second enough for the Universal Remote
time for two seconds, then system to pick up the signal during
release it. Again, if the door programming. Similarly, some U.S.
does not move or the garage gate operators are manufactured to
door lamp does not flash, press time out in the same manner.
“Learn” or “Smart” Button and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, then
4. After Steps 1–3 have been
release.
completed, locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button inside the garage The Universal Remote system
on the garage door opener should now activate the
receiver (motor-head unit). The garage door.
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single
having difficulty programming a gate Universal Remote System
operator or garage door opener by
Operation
Button
using the “Programming the Using the Universal Remote
Universal Remote System” To reprogram any of the three
System Universal Remote system buttons:
procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 2 under Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold the desired
“Programming the Universal Remote Universal Remote system button for Universal Remote system
System” with the following: at least half of a second. The button. Do not release the
indicator light will come on while the button.
Continue to press and hold the signal is being transmitted.
Universal Remote system button 2. The indicator light will begin to
while you press and release every Erasing Universal Remote flash after 20 seconds. Without
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held System Buttons releasing the button, proceed
transmitter button until the with Step 1 under “Programming
frequency signal has been All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or the Universal Remote System.”
successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The the lease ends. If you have questions or need help
Universal Remote system indicator To erase all programmed buttons on programming the Universal Remote
light will flash slowly at first and the Universal Remote system system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 device: to www.homelink.com. You may
under “Programming the Universal also call the customer assistance
1. Press and hold down the phone number under Customer
Remote System” to complete. two outside buttons until the Assistance Offices (U.S. and
indicator light begins to flash. Canada) on page 13‑5 or Customer
This should take about Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
10 seconds. page 13‑5.
2. Release both buttons.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting It controls the following systems:

. Headlamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
. Parking Lamps
Headlamp High/Low-Beam . Taillamps
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. License Plate Lamps
Daytime Running . Instrument Panel Lights
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 . Fog Lamps
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 The exterior lamps control has four
Turn and Lane-Change positions:
The exterior lamps control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
instrument panel, on the outboard P (Off): Briefly turn to this position
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
side of the steering wheel. to turn the automatic light control off
Interior Lighting or on again. When released, the
Instrument Panel Illumination control returns to the AUTO
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 position.
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the A warning chime sounds if the driver

headlamps on automatically at door is opened when the ignition . Instrument Panel Lights
normal brightness, together with the switch is off and the parking lamps
following: are on. See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
. Parking Lamps 5 (Headlamps): Turns the Headlamp High/
headlamps on together with the
. Taillamps
lamps listed below. Low-Beam Changer
. Sidemarker Lamps Push the turn signal/lane change
. Parking Lamps
. License Plate Lamps lever away from you and release, to
. Taillamps turn the high beams on. To return to
. Instrument Panel Lights low beams, push the lever again or
. Sidemarker Lamps
AUTO also controls the Daytime pull it toward you and release.
Running Lamps (DRL). See
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on . Instrument Panel Lights
page 6‑3. A warning chime sounds if the driver
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the door is opened when the ignition
parking lamps on together with the switch is off and the headlamps
following: are on.
. Taillamps # (Front Fog Lamps): Turns the This indicator light turns on in the
. Sidemarker Lamps fog lamps on or off. The fog lamps
instrument panel cluster when the
come on together with the following:
. License Plate Lamps high-beam headlamps are on.
. Parking Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights . Taillamps
. Sidemarker Lamps
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system will make the When it is bright enough outside,
low‐beam headlamps come on at a the headlamps will go off and the
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with reduced brightness or for vehicles DRL will come on.
the low beams or Daytime Running with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lamps (DRL) on or off. To turn the DRL off or on again, turn
headlamps, the dedicated DRL the exterior lamps control to the off
To flash the high beams, pull the lights will come on when the position and then release. For
turn signal/lane change lever all the following conditions are met: vehicles first sold in Canada, the
way toward you, then release it. . The ignition is in the ON/RUN DRL cannot be turned off.
position. The regular headlamp system
Daytime Running . The exterior lamps control is in should be turned on when needed.
Lamps (DRL) AUTO, or has been briefly
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can turned to OFF to turn the Automatic Headlamp
automatic light control on again.
make it easier for others to see the System
front of your vehicle during the day. . The engine is running.
Fully functional Daytime Running When it is dark enough outside and
Lamps are required on all vehicles When the DRL are on, the the headlamp switch is in AUTO,
first sold in Canada. headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, the automatic headlamp system will
instrument panel, and other lamps turn on the headlamps at the normal
A light sensor on top of the will not be on. brightness along with other lamps
instrument panel makes the DRL such as the taillamps, sidemarker
work, so be sure it is not covered. The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular lamps, parking lamps, license plate
headlamps depending on the lamps, and the instrument panel
darkness of the surroundings. The lights. The radio lights will also
other lamps that come on with the be dim.
headlamps will also come on.
6-4 Lighting
To turn off the automatic headlamp There is a delay in the transition Hazard Warning Flashers
system, turn the exterior lamps between the daytime and nighttime
switch to the off position and then operation of the Daytime Running
release. For vehicles first sold in Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
Canada, the transmission must be headlamp systems so that driving
in the P (Park) position, before the under bridges or bright overhead
automatic headlamp system can be street lights does not affect the
turned off. system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be
affected when the light sensor sees
a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
garage, the automatic headlamp Press this button to make the front
system comes on immediately. If it and rear turn signal lamps flash on
is light outside when the vehicle and off. This warns others that you
leaves the garage, there will be a are having trouble. Press again to
slight delay before the automatic turn the flashers off.
The vehicle has a light sensor headlamp system changes to the
located on the top of the instrument DRL. During that delay, the
panel. Do not cover this sensor or instrument panel cluster may not be
the system will come on whenever as bright as usual. Make sure the
the ignition is on. instrument panel brightness control
The system may also turn on the is in the full bright position. See
headlamps when driving through a Instrument Panel Illumination
parking garage, heavy overcast Control on page 6‑6.
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
Lighting 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change If after signaling a turn or lane # (Front Fog Lamps): Press to
change the arrow flashes rapidly or turn the fog lamps on or off. An
Signals does not come on, a signal bulb indicator light on the instrument
might be burned out. panel cluster comes on when the
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb fog lamps are on.
is not burned out, check the fuse. The fog lamps come on together
See Electrical System Overload on with the parking and sidemarker
page 10‑47. lamps.
If the high-beam headlamps are
Front Fog Lamps turned on, the fog lamps will
turn off. If the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will
An arrow on the instrument panel turn back on again.
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change. For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, the
Move the lever all the way up or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
down to signal a turn. replace the fog lamps.
Raise or lower the lever until the Some localities have laws that
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane require the headlamps to be on
change. Hold it there until the lane For vehicles with front fog lamps, along with the fog lamps.
change is completed. If the lever is the button is located on the exterior
briefly pressed and released, the lamp control, on the outboard side
turn signal flashes three times. of the steering wheel.
The lever returns to its starting The ignition must be turned to ON/
position whenever it is released. RUN to turn on the fog lamps.
6-6 Lighting
Interior Lighting Dome Lamps Lighting Features

Instrument Panel Entry Lighting
Illumination Control The lamps inside the vehicle come
on when any door is opened. They
stay on for about 20 seconds. When
all of the doors have been closed or
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
they gradually fade out. They also
come on when K is pressed on the
The dome lamp buttons are Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
overhead near the rearview mirror. system transmitter.
To change the settings, press the The lamps inside the vehicle stay on
following: for about 20 seconds after the key is
removed from the ignition to provide
( (Off): Turns the lamp off, even
light as you exit.
when a door is open.
This feature controls the brightness H (Door): Turns the lamp on Theater Dimming
of the instrument panel lights. automatically when a door is
opened. This feature allows for a three to five
D (Instrument Panel second fade out of the courtesy
Brightness): Move the ' (On): Turns the lamp on. lamps instead of having them turn
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to off immediately.
brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights.
Lighting 6-7
Battery Load The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in
idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being
Management high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
The vehicle has Electric Power This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
Management (EPM) that estimates (alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable
the battery's temperature and state enough at idle to produce all of the to the driver. If so, a DIC message
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage power needed for very high might be displayed, and it is
for best performance and extended electrical loads. recommended that the driver reduce
life of the battery. A high electrical load occurs when the electrical loads as much as
several of the following are on, such possible. See Battery Voltage and
When the battery's state of charge
as: headlamps, high beams, fog Charging Messages on page 5‑35.
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up. lamps, rear window defogger,
When the state of charge is high, climate control fan at high speed, Battery Power Protection
the voltage is lowered slightly to heated seats, engine cooling fans, This feature shuts off the dome
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle trailer loads, and loads plugged into lamp if it is left on for more than
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage accessory power outlets. 10 minutes when the ignition is in
display on the Driver Information EPM works to prevent excessive LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
Center (DIC), you may see the discharge of the battery. It does this the battery from running down.
voltage move up or down. This is by balancing the generator's output
normal. If there is a problem, an and the vehicle's electrical needs.
alert will be displayed. It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction
System Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Infotainment
Phone Read the following pages to
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-23 become familiar with the
Introduction Bluetooth (Infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 infotainment system features.
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Bluetooth (Voice
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 { WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road for
Radio extended periods could cause a
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 crash resulting in injury or death
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
to you or others. Do not give
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14 extended attention to infotainment
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 tasks while driving.
Diversity Antenna System . . . 7-14
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14 This system provides access to
many audio and non-audio listings.
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: Contact your dealer Theft-Deterrent Feature
road while driving, do the following before adding any equipment.
while the vehicle is parked: The theft-deterrent feature works by
Adding audio or communication learning a portion of the Vehicle
. Become familiar with the equipment could interfere with Identification Number (VIN) to the
operation and controls of the the operation of the engine, radio, infotainment system. The
audio system. or other systems, and could infotainment system does not
. Set up the tone, speaker damage them. Follow federal operate if it is stolen or moved to a
adjustments, and preset radio rules covering mobile radio and different vehicle.
stations. telephone equipment.
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3. The vehicle has Retained

Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the infotainment system can play
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑25.
Overview C. Buttons 1−6

. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
D. FAV
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
E. MENU/SELECT
. Press: Opens the menus
and selects menu items.
. Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
in a menu. Manually
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio.
F. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
A. VOL/ O B. INFO . Selects the radio when
. Press: Turns the system
. Radio: Shows available listening to a different
on or off. information about the audio source.
current station.
. Turn: Adjusts the volume. G. X (CD Eject)
. CD/MP3: Shows available
information about the
. Removes the CD from
current track. the slot.
H. CD/AUX L. SEEK 6 Operation

. Selects between the CD . Radio: Seeks the next
player or a connected
Controls
station.
external audio source. The infotainment system is
. CD: Selects the next track operated by using the pushbuttons,
I. PHONE or fast forwards within a multifunction knobs, and menus that
. Opens the phone track. are shown on the display, and
main menu. M. CONFIG steering wheel controls, if equipped.
. Mutes the audio system. . Opens the Configuration Turning the System On or Off
J. SEEK 7 Settings menu.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
. Radio: Seeks the previous N. TONE turn the system on and off.
station. . Opens the Tone
Automatic Off
. CD: Selects the previous Settings menu.
If the infotainment system has
track or rewinds within a O. BACK / been turned on after the ignition is
track.
. Menu: Moves one turned off, the system turns off
K. CD Slot level back. automatically after 10 minutes.
. Insert a CD. . Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Volume Control MENU/SELECT: Press to: Selecting a Menu Option

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to
. Enter the menu system.
adjust the volume. . Select or activate the highlighted
PHONE: For vehicles with menu option.
OnStar®, press and hold PHONE to . Confirm a set value.
mute the infotainment system. Press . Switch a system setting on
and hold PHONE again, or turn
or off.
VOL/O to cancel mute. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
Turn to: move the highlighted bar.
For vehicles without OnStar, press
PHONE to mute the infotainment
. Highlight a menu option. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
system. Press PHONE again, . Select a value. to select the highlighted option.
or turn VOL/O to cancel mute. BACK /: Press to: Submenus
Menu System . Exit a menu.
Controls . Return from a submenu screen
The MENU/SELECT knob and the to the previous menu screen.
BACK / button are used to . Delete the last character in a
navigate the menu system. sequence.
An arrow on the right-hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off Press the BACK / button to delete
the last character or press and hold
BACK / to delete the entire
character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to player source.
highlight the setting. highlight the function.
To adjust the audio setting, press
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob the TONE button and select the
to activate the setting. to turn the function on or off.
audio setting. Press the / BACK
Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence button to go back to the Tone
Settings menu.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Highlight the option.
2. Press and hold the MENU/
SELECT knob until the value
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to changes to 0.
change the current value of the highlight the character.
setting. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the character.
to confirm the setting.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) 3. Select Radio Favorites.
and Bass For vehicles that have an equalizer: 4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the BACK / button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume
1. Select Treble, Midrange, The auto volume feature
1. Select EQ. automatically adjusts the radio
or Bass.
2. Select the setting. volume to compensate for road and
2. Select the value. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
System Settings or slows down, so that the volume
Configuring the Number of level is consistent.
Favorite Pages The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
1. Select Fader or Balance.

2. Select the value.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings. 2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume. Radio RDS (Radio Data System)

4. Select the setting. The radio may have RDS. The RDS
5. Press the BACK / button to go AM-FM Radio feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
back to the System Control Buttons information. This feature only works
Configuration menu. when the information from the radio
The buttons used to control the
Maximum Startup Volume radio are: station is available. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast
The maximum volume played when RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the incorrect information that causes the
the radio is first turned on can radio on and choose between AM, radio features to work improperly.
be set. FM, and XM™, if equipped. If this happens, contact the radio
SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to station.
search for stations. While the radio is tuned to an
FAV: Press to open the FM-RDS station, the station name
favorites list. or call letters display.
1−6: Press to select preset Radio Menus

stations. Radio menus are available for AM,
MENU/SELECT: Turn to manually FM, and XM, if equipped.
2. Select Radio Settings. search for stations. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
3. Select Maximum Startup open the main radio menu for that
Volume. frequency.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the BACK / button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.
Selecting a Band Manual Tuning Updating Station and Category

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Lists
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. select the frequency on the display. If stations stored in the station list
The last station that was playing can no longer be received:
Favorites List
starts playing again. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Selecting a Station 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
2. Select Favorites List. List, if the stations stored in the
Seek Tuning
3. Select the station. station list are no longer
Briefly press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 Station Lists
received. A station search will be
to automatically search for the next completed and the first station in
available station. If a station is not 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. the updated list will play.
found, the radio switches to a more 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All To cancel the station search, press
sensitive search level. If a station receivable stations in the current the MENU/SELECT knob.
still is not found, the frequency that reception area are displayed.
was last active begins to play. If no station list has been Category Lists
created, an automatic station Most stations that broadcast an
Press and hold SEEK 7 or
search is done. RDS program type (PTY) code
SEEK 6 until the station on the specify the type of programming
display is reached, then release the 3. Select the station.
transmitted. Some stations change
button. the PTY code depending on the
content. The system stores the RDS
stations, sorted by program type, in
the FM category list.
To search for a programming type Storing a Station as a Favorite During your trial or when you
determined by station: To store the station to a position in subscribe, you will get unlimited
1. Select FM category list. A list of the list, press the corresponding access to XM Radio Online for
all programming types available numeric button 1−6 until the station when you are not in the vehicle.
displays. can be heard again. A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. If XM service needs
2. Select the programming type. Retrieving Stations to be reactivated, the radio will
A list of stations that transmit display "No Subscription Please
programming of the selected Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another Renew" on channel XM1.
type displays. For more information, contact
favorite page. Briefly press one of
3. Select the station. the 1−6 buttons to retrieve the XM at www.xmradio.com or
station. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
The category lists are updated when and www.xmradio.ca or
the corresponding station lists are 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
updated. Satellite Radio
Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radio Control Buttons
Storing and Retrieving
Favorites tuner and a valid XM Satellite Radio The buttons used to control the XM
subscription can receive XM radio are:
Stations from all bands can be programming.
stored in the favorite lists in any RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
order. XM Satellite Radio Service radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM.
Up to six stations can be stored in XM is a satellite radio service based
each favorite page and the number in the 48 contiguous United States SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to
of available favorite pages can and 10 Canadian provinces. XM search for stations.
be set. Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound.
FAV: Press to open the Selecting an XM Station To select a station using the menu:
favorites list. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
XM stations can be selected by
1−6: Press to select preset using SEEK 7 or SEEK 6, the 2. Select XM Stations List.
stations. MENU/SELECT knob, or the menu
3. Select the station.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to search for system.
stations. To select an XM station using Selecting a Station by Category
Selecting the XM Band SEEK 7 or SEEK 6, do one of the 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Press the RADIO/BAND button to following: 2. Select XM Category List. A list of
choose between the AM, FM, and all programming types available
. Press and release SEEK 7 or
XM bands. The last station played in displays.
that band begins to play when that SEEK 6 to go to the previous or
3. Select the programming type.
band is selected. next station.
4. Select the station.
XM Categories
. Press and hold SEEK 7 or
SEEK 6 to scroll through the Storing and Retrieving
XM stations are organized in Favorites
categories. previous or next stations until
the station is reached. Stations from all bands can be
Removing or Adding Categories To select an XM station using the stored in any order in the favorite
1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SELECT knob: pages.
2. Select XM Categories. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Up to six stations can be stored in
highlight an XM station. each favorite page and the number
3. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to of available favorite pages can
highlight the category. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob be set.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the station, or leave the
to remove or add the category. station highlighted.
Storing a Station as a Favorite Channel Off Air: This channel is No XM Signal: The vehicle may be
To store the station to a position in not currently in service. in a location that where the XM
the list, press and hold the Channel Unauth: This channel is signal is being blocked. When the
corresponding 1−6 button until the blocked or cannot be received with vehicle is moved, the signal should
station can be heard again. the XM subscription package. return.
Channel Unavail: This previously CAT Not Found: There are no

Retrieving Stations channels available for the selected
assigned channel is no longer
Press the FAV button to open a assigned. category.
favorite page or to switch to another XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
favorite page. Briefly press one of No Artist Info: No artist
information is available. in the vehicle may have been in
the 1−6 buttons to retrieve the another vehicle. XM receivers
station. No Title Info: No song title cannot be swapped between
XM Messages information is available. vehicles. If this message is received
No CAT Info: No category after having the vehicle serviced,
XL (Explicit Language check with your dealer.
Channels): These channels, or any information is available.
others, can be blocked by request, No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the informational messages are this message alternates with the XM
U.S. and 1-877-438-9677 in available. Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This
Canada. label is needed to activate the
No Subscription Please Renew: service.
XM Updating: The encryption code XM subscription needs to be
is being updated; no action is reactivated. Contact XM at Unknown: If this message is
required. www.xmradio.com or received when tuned to channel 0,
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and there could be a receiver fault.
Loading XM: The audio system is Consult with your dealer.
acquiring and processing audio and www.xmradio.ca or
text data; no action is needed. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Check XM Receiver: If this FM XM™ Satellite Radio Service

message does not clear within a
FM signals only reach about 16 to XM Satellite Radio Service gives
short period of time, the receiver
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the digital radio reception from coast to
could have a fault. Consult with your
radio has a built-in electronic circuit coast in the 48 contiguous United
dealer.
that automatically works to reduce States, and in Canada. Just as with
XM Not Available: If this message interference, some static can occur, FM, tall buildings or hills can
does not clear within a short period especially around tall buildings or interfere with satellite radio signals,
of time, the receiver could have a hills, causing the sound to fade in causing the sound to fade in and
fault. Consult with your dealer. and out. out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
Radio Reception AM garages, or tunnels may cause loss
The range for most AM stations is of the XM signal for a period of time.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
Cellular Phone Usage
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience station frequencies to interfere with Cellular phone usage may cause
accessories, and external electronic each other. For better radio interference with the vehicle's radio.
devices are plugged into the reception, most AM radio stations This interference may occur when
accessory power outlet. If there is boost the power levels during the making or receiving phone calls,
interference or static, unplug the day, and then reduce these levels charging the phone's battery,
item from the accessory power during the night. Static can also or simply having the phone on. This
outlet. occur when things like storms and interference can cause an increased
power lines interfere with radio level of static while listening to the
reception. When this happens, try radio. If static is received while
reducing the treble on the radio. listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna If a cellular telephone antenna Diversity Antenna System

needs to be attached to the glass,
The fixed mast antenna can make sure that the grid lines for the For vehicles with convertible tops,
withstand most car washes without AM-FM antenna are not damaged. the AM-FM antenna is a hidden
being damaged as long as it is There is enough space between the self‐tuning system and is located in
securely attached to the base. If the grid lines to attach a cellular the rear spoiler. It optimizes the AM
mast becomes slightly bent, telephone antenna without and FM signals relative to the
straighten it out by hand. If the interfering with radio reception. vehicle's position and radio station
mast is badly bent, replace it. source. No maintenance or
Notice: Using a razor blade or adjustments are needed. Do not
Occasionally check to make sure sharp object to clear the inside
the antenna is tightened to its base. place loads on the spoiler. If the
rear window can damage the rear spoiler is replaced, be sure it is
If tightening is required, tighten by window antenna and/or the rear
hand until fully seated plus replaced with the correct GM parts
window defogger. Repairs would for the best AM and FM reception.
one quarter turn. not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside Satellite Radio Antenna
Backglass Antenna rear window with sharp objects.
The AM-FM antenna is integrated For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
with the rear window defogger, Service, the antenna is located on
glass tinting with metallic film.
located in the rear window. Make the decklid of the vehicle. Keep the
The metallic film in some tinting
sure that the inside surface of the antenna clear of obstructions for
materials will interfere with or
rear window is not scratched and clear radio reception.
distort the incoming radio
that the lines on the glass are not reception. Any damage caused to
damaged. If the inside surface is your backglass antenna due to
damaged, it could interfere with metallic tinting materials will not
radio reception. For proper radio be covered by the vehicle
reception, the antenna connector warranty.
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
Audio Players If the bottom surface of a disc is

dirty, take a soft lint-free cloth,
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a into the slot at a time, or an
CD Player mild neutral detergent solution attempt is made to play scratched
The CD player can play audio CDs mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe or damaged CDs, the CD player
and MP3 CDs. the disc from the center to the could be damaged. While using
outer edge. the CD player, use only CDs in
The CD player will not play 8 cm good condition without any label,
(3 in) CDs. Care of the CD Player load one CD at a time, and keep
Care of CDs Do not add a label to a disc, as it the CD player and the loading slot
could get caught in the CD player. free of foreign materials, liquids,
Sound quality can be reduced due If a label is needed, label the top of and debris.
to disc quality, recording method, the recorded disc with a
quality of the music recorded, and marking pen. Control Buttons
how the disc has been handled.
Do not use disc lens cleaners The buttons used to control the CD
Handle discs carefully and store
because they could contaminate the player are:
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct lens of the disc optics and damage CD/AUX: Press to choose between
sunlight and dust. If the bottom the CD player. the CD and AUX player.
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all. SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to
Do not touch the bottom surface of select tracks or to fast forward or
a disc while handling it; this could rewind within a track.
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to select Playing a CD or MP3 CD Playing Tracks in Random Order

tracks. Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
Press the CD/AUX button if there is
INFO: Press to display additional a disc in the player; it begins then set Shuffle Songs to On.
information about the CD that may playing.
be available. Fast Forward and Rewind
Information about the disc and
X (Eject): Press to remove current track is shown on the Press and hold SEEK 7 or
the CD. display depending on the data SEEK 6 to fast forward or rewind
stored. within the current track.
Inserting a CD
With the printed side facing up, Selecting a CD Track Selecting an MP3 Track
insert a disc into the CD slot until it Using the control buttons: Using the control buttons:
is drawn in.
Press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to Press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to
Removing a CD select the previous or next track. select the previous or next track.
Press X. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
counterclockwise or clockwise to counterclockwise or clockwise to
The disc is pushed out of the select the previous or next track. select the previous or next track.
CD slot.
Using the CD Menu: Using the CD Menu:
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
few seconds. 2. Select Tracks list. 2. Select Playlists/Folders.
3. Select the track. 3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for MP3 Tracks Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Jack

It is normal for the search feature to The AUX Input allows portable Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
take some time to display the devices to connect to the vehicle the auxiliary input jack to use a
information after reading the disc using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input portable audio player.
due to the amount of information jack, the USB port, if equipped, Playback of an audio device that is
stored on the disc. The infotainment or Bluetooth® wireless technology, connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
system automatically switches to if equipped. only be controlled using the controls
FM while the disc is being read.
Portable devices are controlled by on the device.
Tracks can be searched by: using the menu system described in Adjusting the Volume
. Playlists Operation on page 7‑4.
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
. Artists
volume of the infotainment system
. Albums after the volume level has been set
. Song Titles on the portable audio device.
. Genres USB Port
. Folder View For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
To search for tracks:
and controlled by the infotainment
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. system.
2. Select Search. . iPods
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
Song Titles, Genres,
The AUX input is located in the . USB Drives
or Folder View.
center console. . Zunes
4. Select the track.
Connecting and Controlling To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track.
an iPod® 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. Off: Starts playback from the
Not all iPods can be controlled by 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after
the infotainment system. the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Connecting an iPod Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a
Connect the iPod to the USB port Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
using the cable that came with the 4. Select the track. or Zune™
device. Connecting a PFD or Zune
Shuffle
Searching for a Track Connect the PFD or Zune to the
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
Tracks can be searched for by: set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On USB port using the cable that came
with the device.
. Playlists or Off, then press the BACK /
button to return to the main screen. Searching for a Track
. Artists
On: Plays tracks in the current Tracks can be searched for by:
. Albums
folder in random order. . Playlists
. Song Titles
Off: Plays tracks in the current . Artists
. Podcasts folder in sequential order.
. Albums
. Genres Repeat . Song Titles
. Audiobooks Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off, then press
. Podcasts
. Composers
the BACK / button to return to the
. Genres
main screen.
To search for tracks: Connecting and Controlling a Files that do not have any meta
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. USB Drive data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from Tracks can be searched for by:
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, a USB drive. .
Song Titles, Podcasts, Playlists*
or Genres Only the first 10,000 songs are . Artists
recognized on the device.
4. Select the track. . Albums
When a device is not supported, the
Shuffle Functionality message “No supported data found.
. Song Titles
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and You can safely disconnect the . Genres
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On device” appears. . Folder View
or Off. Connecting a USB Drive *This only displays if a playlist is
On: Plays current tracks in random Connect the USB drive to the USB found on the device.
order. port using the cable that came with To search for tracks:
Off: Plays current tracks in the device.
sequential order. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Searching for a Track
Repeat Functionality 2. Select Search.
It is normal for the search feature to
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and take some time to display the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
set Repeat to On or Off. information after reading the disc Song Titles, Genres,
due to the amount of information or Folder View.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
stored on the disc. 4. Select the track.
track.
Repeat Off: Starts playback from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Shuffle Functionality Connecting a Bluetooth®

. Only one paired device can be
Device connected to the infotainment
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and system at a time.
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On Before a Bluetooth device can be
or Off. connected to the infotainment
. Pairing should only need to be
system, it must first be paired to the completed once, unless changes
On: Plays current tracks in random to the pairing information have
order. system. Not all Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the infotainment been made or the device is
Off: Plays current tracks in system. Before pairing the Bluetooth deleted.
sequential order. device, become familiar with its user Bluetooth Setup Menu
Repeat Functionality guide for Bluetooth functions. The
system only connects to Bluetooth The Bluetooth Setup menu can be
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and devices that support A2DP accessed with or without a device
set Repeat to On or Off. attached to the USB port.
(Advanced Audio Distribution
Repeat On: Repeats the current Profile) version 1.2. To select the Bluetooth Setup menu
track. Pairing Information: when a device is attached to the
USB port and active:
Repeat Off: Starts playback from . Up to five devices can be paired
the beginning of the current track to the system. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
after the last track finishes. while in the iPod, Zune, PFD,
. The pairing process is disabled or USB device main menu.
when the vehicle is moving.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
. The infotainment system
automatically links with the first
available paired device in the
order the device was paired.
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup 3. After the system determines To connect a paired device when no
menu when a device is not attached what type of Bluetooth device is other device is connected to the
to the USB port, or when a device is being paired, the Bluetooth infotainment system:
attached to the USB port but not device will need to be put into 1. Select the Select Device option
active: discovery mode. from the Bluetooth Music
1. Press the CD/AUX button until 4. Some devices may require a Setup menu.
AUX is the active source. personal identification number 2. Select the new device.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. (PIN) in order to complete the
pairing process. Locate the To connect a paired device when
3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup. device named “GMusicConnect” another device is connected to the
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup in the list on the Bluetooth infotainment system:
menu when a Bluetooth device is device and follow the 1. Select the Select Device option
connected and active: instructions on the device to from the Bluetooth Music
enter the four-digit PIN provided Setup menu.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. by the infotainment system.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup. 2. Select the new device.
Connecting to a Device
3. The active device is
Pairing a Device Once a device is paired to the disconnected from the system
1. Select Connect To New Device infotainment system, it can be and the new device is
from the Bluetooth Music connected to the infotainment connected.
Setup menu. system.
2. The system asks a series of
Yes/No questions to determine
what type of device is being
paired.
Removing a Device Messages Press and release SEEK 7 or

1. Select Remove Device from the The following messages may SEEK 6 to skip tracks. Press and
Bluetooth Music Setup menu. appear on the infotainment screen. hold SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to fast
2. Select the device. Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality: forward or fast reverse within a
3. The device is removed from the This message displays when the track.
system. Bluetooth signal strength is low.
Other Information
Before connecting to the removed This Feature is Unavailable While
Vehicle is Moving: This message The Bluetooth® word mark and
device again, it will need to paired logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
to the infotainment system. displays when an action is not
allowed while the vehicle is moving. SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
Changing the PIN by General Motors is under license.
Controlling a Bluetooth® Other trademarks and trade names
To change the default PIN: Device are those of their respective owners.
1. Select Change Default PIN from Bluetooth devices that support See Radio Frequency Statement on
the Bluetooth Music AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote page 13‑22 for Federal
Setup menu. Control Profile) version 1.4 may be Communications Commission and
2. Select a pre-defined PIN, able to be controlled by the Industry Canada information.
or select Other to create a PIN. infotainment system.
To create a PIN:
1. Select the length of the PIN.
2. Enter the character sequence.

. Review the controls and
Phone operation of the infotainment { WARNING
system.
Bluetooth (Overview) . Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
For vehicles equipped with The system may not work with
Bluetooth capability, the system can too often at the screen of the
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
interact with many cell phones, this section. phone or the infotainment
allowing: (navigation) system. Taking your
. If the cell phone has voice eyes off the road too long or too
. Placement and receipt of calls in dialing capability, learn to use often could cause a crash
a hands-free mode. that feature to access the resulting in injury or death. Focus
. Sharing of the cell phone’s address book or contact list. See your attention on driving.
address book or contact list with “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
the vehicle. section.
.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
To minimize driver distraction, See “Storing and Deleting Phone
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
before driving, and with the vehicle Numbers” in this section.
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to
parked: make and receive phone calls. The
. Become familiar with the infotainment system and voice
features of the cell phone. recognition are used to control the
Organize the phone book and system. The system can be used
contact lists clearly and delete while in ON/RUN or ACC/
duplicate or rarely used entries. ACCESSORY. The range of the
If possible, program speed dial Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
or other shortcuts. (30 ft). Not all phones support all
functions and not all phones
work with the Bluetooth system.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for For information about how to Audio System

more information about compatible navigate the menu system using the
When using the Bluetooth system,
phones. infotainment controls, see Operation
sound comes through the vehicle's
on page 7‑4.
Bluetooth Controls front audio system speakers and
PHONE: Press to enter the Phone overrides the audio system. Use the
Use the buttons located on the main menu.
infotainment system and the VOL/ O knob during a call to
steering wheel to operate the Voice Recognition change the volume level. The
Bluetooth system. adjusted volume level remains in
The voice recognition system uses memory for later calls. The system
Steering Wheel Controls commands to control the system maintains a minimum volume level.
and dial phone numbers.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to Other Information
answer incoming calls, confirm Noise: The system may not
system information, and start voice recognize voice commands if there The Bluetooth® word mark and
recognition. is too much background noise. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to When to Speak: A tone sounds to
by General Motors is under license.
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an indicate that the system is ready for
Other trademarks and trade names
operation. a voice command. Wait for the tone
are those of their respective owners.
and then speak.
Infotainment System Controls See Radio Frequency Statement on
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
If equipped, the infotainment system page 13‑22 for information
calm and natural voice.
allows certain controls to be regarding Part 15 of the Federal
selected on the infotainment display. Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

. The pairing process is disabled
Bluetooth when the vehicle is moving.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four-digit Personal
(Infotainment Controls) . Identification Number (PIN)
Pairing only needs to be
For information about how to completed once, unless the appears on the display. The PIN
navigate the menu system using the pairing information on the cell is used in Step 6.
infotainment controls, see Operation phone changes or the cell phone 5. Start the pairing process on the
on page 7‑4. is deleted from the system. cell phone to be paired to the
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can vehicle. See the cell phone
be connected to the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone information on this process.
system at a time.
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are 6. Locate the device named “Your
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
your cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first phone. Follow the instructions
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the on the cell phone to enter the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired PIN provided in Step 4. After the
phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To link to a PIN is successfully entered, the
made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see system prompts you to provide a
Calling, if available. See OnStar “Linking to a Different Phone” name for the paired cell phone.
Overview on page 14‑1. later in this section. This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone paired and connected to the
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press the CONFIG button. vehicle. The system responds
capability cannot be paired to with “<Phone name> has been
2. Select Phone Settings or successfully paired” after the
the vehicle as a phone and an Bluetooth Settings.
MP3 player at the same time. pairing process is complete.
3. Select Bluetooth. 7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pair
. Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system. additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected Linking to a Different Phone Making a Call Using
Phones To link to a different phone, the new Phone Book
1. Press the CONFIG button. phone must be in the vehicle and For cell phones that support the
2. Select Phone Settings or available to be connected to the phone book feature, the Bluetooth
Bluetooth Settings. Bluetooth system before the system can use the contacts stored
process is started. on your cell phone to make calls.
3. Select Bluetooth. See your cell phone manufacturer‘s
4. Select Device List. user guide or contact your wireless
2. Select Phone Settings or provider to find out if this feature is
Deleting a Paired Phone Bluetooth Settings. supported by your phone.
1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth. When a cell phone supports the
2. Select Phone Settings or 4. Select Device List. phone book feature, the Phone
Bluetooth Settings. Book and Call Lists menus are
5. Select the new phone to link to
automatically available.
3. Select Bluetooth. and follow the on screen
prompts. The Phone Book menu allows you
4. Select Device List.
to access the phone book stored in
5. Select the phone to delete and If delete is selected, the
the cell phone to make a call.
follow the on screen prompts. highlighted phone will be
deleted. The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your cell
phone to make a call.
To make a call using the Phone Making a Call Call Waiting

Book menu:
To make a call: Call waiting must be supported on
1. Press the PHONE button once the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
1. Press the PHONE button once
or twice. the wireless service carrier to work.
or twice.
2. Select Phone Book. Accepting a Call
2. Enter the character sequence.
3. Search through the list by See “Entering a Character Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
selecting the letter group the Sequence” in Operation on “Answer” and press the MENU/
phone book entry begins with, page 7‑4. SELECT knob to accept the call.
or press the MENU/SELECT
3. Select Call to start dialing the Declining a Call
knob to scroll through the entire
number.
list of names/numbers in the Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
phone book. Accepting or Declining a Call “Decline” and press the MENU/
4. Select the name or number you When an incoming call is received, SELECT knob to decline the call.
want to call. the infotainment system mutes and Switching Between Calls (Call
To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Waiting Calls Only)
Lists menu: Accepting a Call To switch between calls:
1. Press the PHONE button once Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 1. Turn or press the MENU/
or twice. “Answer” and press the MENU/ SELECT knob.
2. Select Call Lists. SELECT knob to accept the call. 2. Select Switch Call from
3. Select the Incoming Calls, Declining a Call the menu.
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
Calls list.
“Decline” and press the MENU/
4. Select the name or number you SELECT knob to decline the call.
want to call.
Conference Calling Ending a Call Bluetooth (Voice

Conference calling and three-way Turn or press the MENU/SELECT Recognition)
calling must be supported on the knob and select Hang Up.
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Using Voice Recognition
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call
To use voice recognition, press the
To start a conference while in a To Mute a Call b / g button located on the steering
current call: wheel. Use the commands below for
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
the various voice features. For
1. Turn or press the MENU/ knob and select Mute Call.
additional information, say “Help”
SELECT knob. To Cancel Mute while you are in a voice
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the MENU/SELECT recognition menu.
3. Enter the character sequence knob and select Mute Call. Pairing
then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in Dual Tone Multi-Frequency A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
Operation on page 7‑4. (DTMF) Tones must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
4. After the call has been placed, The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
vehicle before it can be used. See
turn or press the MENU/ send numbers during a call. This is
your cell phone manufacturer's user
SELECT knob and choose used when calling a menu-driven guide for Bluetooth functions before
Merge Calls. phone system.
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
5. To add more callers to the 1. Turn or press the MENU/ phone is not connected, calls will be
conference call, repeat SELECT knob and select Enter made using OnStar Hands-Free
Steps 1−4. The number of Number. Calling, if available. See OnStar
callers that can be added is 2. Enter the character sequence. Overview on page 14‑1.
limited by your wireless service See “Entering a Character
carrier. Sequence” in Operation on
page 7‑4.
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone This name will be used to

indicate which phones are
A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
.
capability cannot be paired to paired and connected to the

responds “Ready,” followed by vehicle. The system responds
the vehicle as a phone and an a tone.
MP3 player at the same time. with “<Phone name> has been
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command successfully paired” after the
. Up to five cell phones can be can be skipped. pairing process is complete.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds 6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair
. The pairing process is disabled with instructions and a four-digit additional phones.
when the vehicle is moving. Personal Identification Number Listing All Paired and Connected
. Pairing only needs to be (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. Phones
completed once, unless the 4. Start the pairing process on the
pairing information on the cell The system can list all cell phones
cell phone that you want to pair. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
phone changes or the cell phone For help with this process, see
is deleted from the system. also connected to the vehicle, the
your cell phone manufacturer's system responds with “is connected”
. Only one paired cell phone can user guide. after that phone name.
be connected to the Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your
system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. Press b / g. The system
. If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions responds “Ready,” followed by
within range of the system, the on the cell phone to enter the a tone.
system connects to the first PIN provided in Step 3. After the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
available paired cell phone in the PIN is successfully entered, the
system prompts you to provide a 3. Say “List.”
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a name for the paired cell phone.
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.” Digit Store: This command allows
If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.” a phone number to be stored as a
delete is unknown, see “Listing All name tag by entering the digits one
. If another cell phone is at a time.
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be
Delete: This command is used to
1. Press b / g. The system “<Phone name> is now
delete individual name tags.
responds “Ready,” followed by connected.”
a tone. . If another cell phone is not Delete All Name Tags: This
found, the original phone command deletes all stored name
2. Say “Bluetooth.” tags in the Hands-Free Calling
remains connected.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks Directory and the Destinations
for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone Directory.
4. Say the name of the phone you Numbers Using the “Store” Command
want to delete. The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags in 1. Press b / g. The system
Connecting to a Different Phone responds “Ready,” followed by
the Hands-Free Directory that is
To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and a tone.
the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems. 2. Say “Store.”
next available cell phone in the
The following commands are used 3. Say the phone number or group
order in which all the available cell
to delete and store phone numbers. of numbers you want to store all
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store a at once with no pauses, then
connect to, you may have to use phone number, or a group of follow the directions given by the
this command several times. numbers as a name tag. system to save a name tag for
this number.
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
Using the “Digit Store” Command Using the “Delete” Command Listing Stored Numbers
If an unwanted number is 1. Press b / g. The system The list command will list all the
recognized by the system, say responds “Ready,” followed by stored numbers and name tags.
“Clear” at any time to clear the last a tone.
number. Using the “List” Command
2. Say “Delete.”
To hear all of the numbers 1. Press b / g. The system
recognized by the system, say 3. Say the name tag you want to responds “Ready,” followed by
“Verify” at any time. delete. a tone.
1. Press b / g. The system Using the “Delete All Name Tags” 2. Say “Directory.”
responds “Ready,” followed by Command
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
a tone. This command deletes all stored
4. Say “List.”
name tags in the Hands-Free
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Calling Directory and the Making a Call
3. Say each digit, one at a time, Destinations Directory.
that you want to store. After Calls can be made using the
To delete all name tags: following commands.
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard 1. Press b / g. The system Dial or Call: The dial or call
followed by a tone. After the last responds “Ready,” followed by command can be used
digit has been entered, say a tone. interchangeably to dial a phone
“Store,” and then follow the number or a stored name tag.
directions given by the system to 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
save a name tag for this number. Digit Dial: This command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Re-dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Using the “Dial” or “Call” To hear all of the numbers Using the “Re-dial” Command
Command recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time. 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system responds “Ready,” followed by
responds “Ready,” followed by 1. Press b / g. The system a tone.
a tone. responds “Ready,” followed by 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” a tone. system dials the last number
3. Say the entire number without 2. Say “Digit Dial.” called from the connected cell
pausing or say the name tag. 3. Say each digit, one at a time, phone.
Once connected, the person called that you want to dial. After each Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio digit is entered, the system will be heard through the audio
speakers. repeats back the digit it heard speakers.
followed by a tone. After the last
Using the “Digit Dial” Command digit has been entered, Receiving a Call
The digit dial command allows a say “Dial.” When an incoming call is received,
phone number to be dialed by Once connected, the person called the audio system mutes and a ring
entering the digits one at a time. will be heard through the audio tone is heard in the vehicle.
After each digit is entered, the speakers. . Press b / g to answer the call.
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. . Press $ / i to ignore a call.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to The cell phone must be paired and
dial the number of the third party connected with the Bluetooth
Call waiting must be supported on
to be called. system before a call can be
the cell phone and enabled by the
4. Once the call is connected, transferred. The connection process
wireless service carrier.
can take up to two minutes after the
press b / g to link all callers
. Press b / g to answer an ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
together.
incoming call when another call To Transfer Audio from the
is active. The original call is Ending a Call Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
placed on hold.
Press $ / i to end a call. During a call with the audio in the
. Press b / g again to return to vehicle:
the original call. Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
1. Press b / g.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
person on the other end of the call
. Press $ / i to disconnect the To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
cannot hear them.
System from a Cell Phone
current call and switch to the call
on hold. To mute a call, press b / g , and During a call with the audio on the
then say “Mute Call.” cell phone, press b / g. The audio
Three-Way Calling
To cancel mute, press b / g , and transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
Three-way calling must be then say “Un-mute Call.” does not transfer to the vehicle, use
supported on the cell phone and the audio transfer feature on the
enabled by the wireless service Transferring a Call cell phone. See your cell phone
carrier. manufacturer's user guide for more
Audio can be transferred between
information.
1. While on a call, press b / g. the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
2. Say “Three-way call.”
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass-thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell menu-driven phone system. information. See the previous
phone: Account numbers can also be sections on “Deleting a Paired
stored for use. Phone” and “Deleting Name Tags.”
1. Press b / g. The system
Sending a Number or Name Tag
responds “Ready,” followed by
During a Call
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 1. Press b / g. The system
can be skipped. responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing 2. Say “Dial.”
<phone name>.” 3. Say the number or name tag
The cell phone's normal prompt to send.
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be
Climate Control Systems controlled with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
A. Fan Control E. Air Conditioning

B. Heated Seats F. Defrost
C. Temperature Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Delivery Mode Controls H. Recirculation
8-2 Climate Controls
A (Fan Control): Turn to increase 7 (Floor): Air is directed to the Air Conditioning
or decrease the fan speed. Turn the floor outlets.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
knob to O to turn the fan off. W (Defog): Clears the windows of turn the air conditioning on or off. An
Temperature Control: Turn to fog or moisture. Air is directed to the indicator light turns on. If the fan is
increase or decrease the windshield and floor outlets. turned off or the outside
temperature inside the vehicle. 0 (Defrost): Clears the temperature falls below freezing, the
Maximum cooling occurs when the windshield of fog or frost more air conditioning will not work.
temperature knob is turned to MAX quickly. Air is directed to the The air conditioning might
# and the air conditioning system windshield and side window outlets. automatically come on when 0 is
is turned on and air is recirculated
inside the vehicle. For best results, clear all snow and selected.
ice from the windshield before ) (Recirculation): Press to turn
Air Delivery Mode Control: To defrosting.
change the current mode, press one on the recirculation. An indicator
of the following: Do not drive the vehicle until all light comes on. Air is recirculated
windows are clear. inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly
F (Vent): Air is directed to the cool the air inside the vehicle or
instrument panel outlets. prevent outside air and odors from
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the entering.
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
Climate Controls 8-3
Operation in the recirculation mode Rear Window Defogger Passenger Compartment Air
while the air conditioner is off Filter
increases humidity and may cause
1 (Rear Defogger): Press to
turn the rear window defogger on The passenger compartment air
the windows to fog.
or off. The rear window defogger filter removes most of the pollen and
Recirculation is not available in the turns off automatically after about dust from the air that enters the
defrost or defog modes. 12 minutes. It can also be turned off vehicle. The filter will need to be
To improve fuel efficiency and to by turning the ignition to ACC/ replaced periodically. See
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. Maintenance Schedule on
may be automatically selected in If turned on again it runs for about page 11‑3.
warm weather. The recirculation six minutes before turning off. At
Using the climate control system
higher vehicle speeds, the rear
light will not come on. Press the ) without an air filter installed is not
defogger can stay on continuously.
to select recirculation; press it again recommended. Water or other
to select outside air. Do not drive the vehicle until all debris could enter the system and
windows are clear. result in leaks or noises. Always
Notice: Do not use a razor blade install a new filter when removing
or sharp object to clear the inside the old filter.
rear window. Do not adhere For more information, see your
anything to the defogger grid dealer.
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
L / M (Heated Seats): Press to
turn on or off. See Heated Front
Seats on page 3‑6.
8-4 Climate Controls

. Keep the path under the front
Air Vents seats clear of objects to help
Use the air outlets located in the circulate the air inside of the
center and on the side of the vehicle more effectively.
instrument panel to direct the . Use of non‐GM approved hood
airflow. Use the thumbwheels near deflectors can adversely affect
the center air outlets to direct airflow the performance of the system.
to the left or right. Check with your dealer before
Operation Tips adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
. In defog or defrost mode, warm
air flows from some air outlets.
To improve side window
defogging or defrosting, direct
side air outlets toward the side
windows.
. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . .
9-41
9-43
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-44
Driving Information Parking (Manual Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-48
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-49
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Cruise Control
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-29
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust Object Detection Systems
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-52
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Running the Vehicle While Rear Vision
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Racing or Other Competitive
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission Fuel
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-30 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-10 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Manual Transmission and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-37 California Fuel
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Brakes Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-58
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-19 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Front Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Filling a Portable Fuel
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing (ZL1) . . . . . . . . . 9-66 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Trailer Towing task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Conversions and Add-Ons governments have enacted laws driving.
Add-On Electrical
regarding driver distraction. Become
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or
other electronic devices.
Defensive Driving
{ WARNING { WARNING
Defensive driving means “always
Taking your eyes off the road too expect the unexpected.” The first Drinking and then driving is very
long or too often could cause a step in driving defensively is to wear dangerous. Your reflexes,
crash resulting in injury or death. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on perceptions, attentiveness, and
Focus your attention on driving. page 3‑8. judgment can be affected by even
. Assume that other road users a small amount of alcohol. You
Refer to the infotainment section for (pedestrians, bicyclists, and can have a serious — or even
more information on using that other drivers) are going to be fatal — collision if you drive after
system, including pairing and using careless and make mistakes. drinking.
a cell phone. Anticipate what they might do Do not drink and drive or ride with
and be ready. a driver who has been drinking.
If equipped, refer to the navigation
manual for information on that . Allow enough following distance Ride home in a cab; or if you are
system, including pairing and using between you and the driver in with a group, designate a driver
a cell phone. front of you. who will not drink.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Control of a Vehicle
Drunk Driving
Braking, steering, and accelerating
Death and injury associated with are important factors in helping to
drinking and driving is a global control a vehicle while driving.
tragedy.
Braking If the engine ever stops while the If power steering assist is lost due
vehicle is being driven, brake to a system malfunction, the vehicle
Braking action involves perception normally but do not pump the can be steered, but may require
time and reaction time. Deciding to brakes. Doing so could make the increased effort. See your dealer if
push the brake pedal is perception pedal harder to push down. If the there is a problem.
time. Actually doing it is engine stops, there will be some
reaction time. If the steering wheel is turned until it
power brake assist but it will be reaches the end of its travel, and is
Average driver reaction time is used when the brake is applied. held against that position for an
about three-quarters of a second. In Once the power assist is used up, it extended period of time, power
that time, a vehicle moving at can take longer to stop and the steering assist may be reduced.
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m brake pedal will be harder to push.
(66 ft), which could be a lot of Normal use of the power steering
distance in an emergency. Steering assist should return when the
system cools down.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind Electric Power Steering
include: See specific vehicle steering
(ZL1 Only) messages under Vehicle Messages
. Keep enough distance between The vehicle has electric power on page 5‑35.
you and the vehicle in front steering. It does not have power
of you. steering fluid. Regular maintenance
. Avoid needless heavy braking. is not required.
. Keep pace with traffic.
Hydraulic Power Steering Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery

(Except ZL1) . Take curves at a reasonable
Your vehicle has hydraulic power speed.
steering. It may require . Reduce speed before entering a
maintenance. See Power Steering curve.
Fluid (Except ZL1) on page 10‑31 or
Power Steering Fluid (ZL1 Only) on
. Maintain a reasonable steady
page 10‑32. speed through the curve.
If power steering assist is lost due
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
to a system malfunction, the vehicle the curve before accelerating
can be steered, but may require gently into the straightaway.
increased effort. Steering in Emergencies
See your dealer if there is a . There are some situations when
problem. steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
. Holding both sides of the shoulder while driving. Follow
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
a hand. then, if there is nothing in the
. The Antilock Brake System way, steer the vehicle so that it
(ABS) allows steering while straddles the edge of the
braking. pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
. Try to avoid sudden steering,
one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to acceleration, or braking,
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not including reducing vehicle speed
pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But by shifting to a lower gear. Any
skids are always possible. sudden changes could cause
3. Then turn the steering wheel to the tires to slide.
go straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions: Remember: Antilock brakes help
Loss of Control avoid only the braking skid.
. Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly
Skidding
steer the way you want the
Racing or Other
There are three types of skids that vehicle to go. The vehicle may Competitive Driving
correspond to the vehicle's three straighten out. Be ready for a Racing or competitive driving may
control systems: second skid if it occurs. affect the vehicle warranty. See the
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your warranty book before using the
rolling. driving according to weather vehicle for racing or other
. Steering or Cornering conditions. Stopping distance competitive driving.
Skid — too much speed or can be longer and vehicle Notice: If you use the vehicle for
steering in a curve causes tires control can be affected when racing or other competitive
to slip and lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water, driving, the engine may use more
snow, ice, gravel, or other oil than it would with normal use.
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
throttle causes the driving Low oil levels can damage the
recognize warning clues — such engine. For information on how to
wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed add oil, see Engine Oil on
snow on the road to make a page 10‑13.
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Be sure to check the oil level If the vehicle is used for racing or Notice: The new vehicle break‐in
often during racing or other other competitive driving, the rear period should be completed
competitive driving and keep the axle fluid temperatures may be before performing the brake
level at or near the upper mark higher than would occur in normal burnish procedure or damage
that shows the proper operating driving. We recommend that the may occur to the powertrain/
range on the engine oil dipstick. rear axle fluid be drained and engine. See New Vehicle Break-In
For racing or competitive driving, it refilled with new fluid after every on page 9‑19.
is recommended that the brake fluid 24 hours of racing or competitive When performed as instructed,
be replaced with a high performance driving. See Recommended Fluids these procedures will not damage
brake fluid that has a dry boiling and Lubricants on page 11‑12. the brakes. During the burnishing
point greater than 279°C (534°F). To prepare the Camaro ZL1 or SS procedure, the brake pads will
After conversion to the high brake system for track events and smoke and produce an odor. The
performance brake fluid, racing, the High Performance Brake braking force and pedal travel may
follow the brake fluid service Burnish as described below should increase. After the procedure is
recommendations outlined by the be completed: complete, the brake pads may
fluid manufacturer. Do not use appear white at the rotor contact.
silicone or DOT-5 brake fluids. Brake Burnishing
Run this procedure in a safe
ZL1 Only: For racing or competitive New brake pads must be burnished manner and in compliance with all
driving, it is recommended that the before racing or other competitive local and state ordinances/laws
loading of the vehicle be limited to driving. regarding motor vehicle operation.
the driver only, with no other cargo, Notice: These procedures are Run this procedure only on dry
and that tires be inflated to at least specific to the ZL1 or Camaro SS pavement.
180 kPa (26 psi). brake package. This procedure
should not be run on other
Camaro models as damage may
result.
Racing/Track Brake Burnish 2. Repeatedly apply the brakes 3. Cool down: Drive at 100 km/h
Procedure from 100 km/h (60 mph) to (60 mph) for approximately
Notice: Brake pedal fade will 25 km/h (15 mph) while 15 km (10 mi) without using
occur during this track burnish decelerating at 0.8 g. This is a brakes.
procedure and can cause brake hard brake application, without 4. Apply the brake 25 times from
pedal travel and force to increase. activating the antilock brake 100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h
This could extend stopping system (ABS). Drive for at least (30 mph) while decelerating at
distance until the brakes are fully 1 km (0.6 mi) between stops. 0.4 g. This is a medium brake
burnished. Repeat until the brake pedal application. Drive for at least
travel starts to increase. 1 km (0.6 mi) between
1. Apply the brake 25 times starting Depending on conditions, this
100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h applications.
should take no longer than
(30 mph) while decelerating at 25 brake applications.
0.4 g. This is a medium brake
application. Drive for at least
1 km (0.6 mi) between applying
the brake. This first step may be
skipped if there are more than
200 miles (320 km) on the
brake pads.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates can build up under the vehicle's
ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through tires so they actually ride on the
Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the water. This can happen if the road is
of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this wet enough and you are going fast
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle enough. When the vehicle is
deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not hydroplaning, it has little or no
ignore police warnings and be contact with the road.
{ WARNING very cautious about trying to drive There is no hard and fast rule about
through flowing water. hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Wet brakes can cause crashes. slow down when the road is wet.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep the interior
temperature cool. transmission.
. Have good tires with proper . Shift to a lower gear when going
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 10‑54. the road ahead and to the sides.
. Turn off cruise control.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑39 improves vehicle
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving stability during hard stops on
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. You or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for
engine running and the vehicle in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain icy
. Stay in your own lane. Do not when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be
swing wide or cut across the clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand.
center of the road. Drive at maneuvers and braking while
speeds that let you stay in your Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
own lane. condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
. Be alert on top of hills; surfaces.
quickly causes the wheels to spin
something could be in your lane
and makes the surface under the
(stalled car, accident).
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
vehicle unless there is help nearby. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
If possible, use the Roadside cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Assistance Program (U.S. and inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
Assistance Program (Mexico) on cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
page 13‑10. To get help and keep cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
everyone in the vehicle safe: death. to the highest setting. See
. Turn on the hazard warning “Climate Control Systems” in
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
flashers. the Index.
. Clear away snow from around
. Tie a red cloth to an outside For more information about
the base of your vehicle,
mirror. carbon monoxide, see Engine
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe. Exhaust on page 9‑29.
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does Run the engine for short periods
not collect there. only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
. Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
(Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
short periods as needed to warm it Out
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
until help arrives but only when you front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
feel really uncomfortable from the system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
cold. Moving about to keep warm between R (Reverse) and a forward
traction system off and use the
also helps. gear, or with a manual transmission,
rocking method.
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
If it takes some time for help to R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING little as possible. To prevent
the engine, push the accelerator transmission wear, wait until the
pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high wheels stop spinning before shifting
faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you gears. Release the accelerator
keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The pedal while shifting, and press
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an lightly on the accelerator pedal
with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other when the transmission is in gear.
as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little Slowly spinning the wheels in the
as possible and avoid going forward and reverse directions
above 56 km/h (35 mph). causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
For information about using tire
might need to be towed out. If the
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
vehicle does need to be towed out,
Chains on page 10‑76.
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑96.
Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING Label
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any
carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross
vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating
includes the weight of all (GVWR), or either the
occupants, cargo and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on the vehicle show This can cause systems to
how much weight it may break and change the way the
properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
the Certification label. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, the label is attached
near the door lock post. The Tire
and Loading Information label
shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity Steps for Determining Correct 4. The resulting figure equals
weight (B) in kilograms and Load Limit the available amount of cargo
pounds. 1. Locate the statement “The and luggage load capacity.
The Tire and Loading combined weight of For example, if the “XXX”
Information label also shows occupants and cargo should amount equals 1400 lbs and
the tire size of the original never exceed XXX kg or there will be five 150 lb
equipment tires (C) and the XXX lbs” on your vehicle's passengers in your vehicle,
recommended cold tire inflation placard. the amount of available cargo
pressures (D). For more and luggage load capacity is
2. Determine the combined 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
information on tires and inflation weight of the driver and
see Tires on page 10‑54 and = 650 lbs).
passengers that will be
Tire Pressure on page 10‑62. riding in your vehicle. 5. Determine the combined
There is also important loading weight of luggage and cargo
3. Subtract the combined being loaded on the vehicle.
information on the Certification
weight of the driver and That weight may not safely
label. It tells you the Gross
passengers from XXX kg or exceed the available cargo
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and calculated in Step 4.
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
6. If your vehicle will be towing

a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing (Except ZL1)
on page 9‑66 or Trailer Towing
(ZL1) on page 9‑66 for important
information on towing a trailer, Example 1 Example 2
towing safety rules, and A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
trailering tips. Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
136 kg (300 lbs). 340 kg (750 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
(700 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and A vehicle-specific Certification

Loading Information label for label is attached to the vehicle's
specific information about the center pillar (B-pillar). With the
vehicle's capacity weight and driver door open, the label is
seating positions. The combined attached near the door lock
weight of the driver, passengers, post. The label tells the gross
and cargo should never exceed weight capacity of the vehicle,
the vehicle's capacity weight. called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
Certification Label
includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and
Example 3 cargo. Never exceed the GVWR
for the vehicle, or the Gross
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
Example 3 = 453 kg either the front or rear axle.
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Label Example
And, if there is a heavy load, it If you put things inside the

should be spread out. See vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
“Steps for Determining Correct tools, packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
Load Limit” earlier in this else — they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
section. vehicle goes. If you have to stop inside the vehicle so that
or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
{ WARNING crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
{ WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
Vehicle Weight Rating Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
(GVWR), or either the strike and injure people in a . Secure loose items in the
maximum front or rear Gross sudden stop or turn, or in a vehicle.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). crash.
This can cause systems to . Do not leave a seat folded
. Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
break and change the way the area of the vehicle. In the
vehicle handles. This could cargo area, put them as
cause loss of control and a far forward as possible.
crash. Overloading can also Try to spread the weight
shorten the life of the vehicle. evenly.
(Continued)

. Do not let the engine labor. . New brake linings also need
Starting and Never lug the engine in high a break-in period. Avoid
Operating gear at low speeds. With a making hard stops during
manual transmission, shift to the first 322 km (200 mi). This
New Vehicle Break-In the next lower gear. This rule is recommended every time
applies at all times, not just brake linings are replaced.
Notice: Follow these during the break-in period. . Should the vehicle be used
recommended guidelines during . Do not participate in racing for racing or competitive
the first 2 414 km (1,500 mi) of
events, sport driving driving (after break-in), the
driving this vehicle. Parts have a
schools, or similar activities rear axle lubricant must be
break-in period and performance
during this break-in period. replaced before hand.
will be better in the long run.
. Check engine oil with See Racing or Other Competitive
. For the first
every refueling and add if Driving on page 9‑6.
2 414 km (1,500 mi):
necessary. Oil and fuel
. Avoid full throttle starts and consumption may be higher Front Fascia
abrupt stops. than normal during the first
2 414 km (1,500 mi). The vehicle is equipped with a front
. Do not exceed fascia which has minimal ground
4000 engine rpm. . To break in new tires, drive at clearance.
. Avoid driving at any one moderate speeds and avoid
hard cornering for the first Use care when approaching curbs,
constant speed, fast or slow. bumps or objects on road surfaces
322 km (200 mi). New tires do
. Do not drive above not have maximum traction and avoid them when possible.
129 km/h (80 mph). and may tend to slip.
. Avoid downshifting to brake
or slow the vehicle when the
engine speed will exceed
4,000 rpm.
Ignition Positions To shift out of P (Park), turn the If the vehicle must be shut off in an
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the emergency:
brake pedal. 1. Brake using a firm and steady
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ pressure. Do not pump the
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is brakes repeatedly. This may
stopped, turn the ignition switch to deplete power assist, requiring
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. increased brake pedal force.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
will remain active. See Retained can be done while the vehicle is
Accessory Power (RAP) on moving. After shifting to neutral,
page 9‑25. continue to firmly apply the
This is the only position from which brakes and steer the vehicle to a
the key can be removed. This locks safe location.
the steering wheel, ignition, and 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
The ignition switch has four different automatic transmission. to P (Park) with an automatic
positions. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a
Notice: Using a tool to force the transmission, the shift lever must be manual transmission. Turn the
key to turn in the ignition could in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch ignition to LOCK/OFF.
cause damage to the switch or to the LOCK/OFF position. 4. Set the parking brake. See
break the key. Use the correct Do not turn the engine off when the Parking Brake on page 9‑40.
key, make sure it is all the way in, vehicle is moving. This will cause a
and turn it only with your hand. loss of power assist in the brake
If the key cannot be turned by and steering systems and disable
hand, see your dealer. the airbags.
The key must be fully extended to
start the vehicle.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This The battery could be drained if the

{ WARNING position provides power to some of key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
the electrical accessories. It unlocks or ON/RUN position with the engine
Turning off the vehicle while the steering wheel and ignition. To off. The vehicle might not start if the
moving may cause loss of power move the key from ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an
assist in the brake and steering ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push extended period of time.
systems and disable the airbags. in the key and then turn it to
While driving, only shut the D (START): This position starts the
LOCK/OFF. engine. When the engine starts,
vehicle off in an emergency.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch release the key. The ignition switch
stays in this position when the will return to ON/RUN for normal
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, engine is running. This position can driving.
and must be shut off while driving, be used to operate the electrical A warning tone sounds when the
turn the ignition to ACC/ accessories, including the driver door is opened if the ignition
ACCESSORY. ventilation fan and 12-volt power is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
The ignition switch can bind in the outlet, as well as to display some key is in the ignition.
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels warning and indicator lights. This
turned off center. If this happens, position can also be used for
move the steering wheel from right service and diagnostics, and to
to left while turning the key to ACC/ verify the proper operation of the
ACCESSORY. If this does not work, malfunction indicator lamp as may
then the vehicle needs service. be required for emission inspection
purposes. The transmission is also
unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
Key Lock Release The key lock release is always Starting the Engine
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than Place the transmission in the
9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has an proper gear.
uncharged battery or a battery with Automatic Transmission
low voltage, try charging or jump
starting the battery. See Jump Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
Starting on page 10‑93. N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
If charging or jump starting the vehicle when it is already moving,
battery does not work, locate the use N (Neutral) only.
hole below the ignition lock. Insert a
flat bladed tool or another key from Notice: Do not try to shift to
the key chain into the opening. P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
When the lever can be felt, actuate If you do, you could damage the
the lever toward the driver and transmission. Shift to P (Park)
Vehicles with an automatic only when the vehicle is stopped.
transmission are equipped with an remove the key from the ignition.
electronic key lock release system. Manual Transmission
The key lock release is designed to The shift lever should be in Neutral
prevent ignition key removal unless and the parking brake engaged.
the shift lever is in P (Park). Hold the clutch pedal down to the
floor and start the engine. The
vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure damage. To prevent gear maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at

1. With your foot off the accelerator damage, this system also least 15 seconds between each
pedal, turn the ignition key to prevents cranking if the engine try, to allow the cranking motor
START. When the engine starts, is already running. Engine to cool. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed cranking can be stopped by let go of the key and accelerator.
will go down as the engine turning the ignition switch to If the vehicle starts briefly but
warms. Do not race the engine ACC/ACCESSORY or then stops again, repeat the
immediately after starting it. LOCK/OFF. procedure. This clears the extra
Allow the oil to warm up and Notice: Cranking the engine for gasoline from the engine. Do not
lubricate all moving parts. long periods of time, by returning race the engine immediately
the key to the START position after starting it. Operate the
The vehicle has a engine and transmission gently
Computer-Controlled Cranking immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage until the oil warms up and
System. This feature assists in lubricates all moving parts.
starting the engine and protects the cranking motor, and drain the
components. If the ignition key is battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Notice: The engine is designed to
turned to the START position, between each try, to let the work with the electronics in the
and then released when the cranking motor cool down. vehicle. If you add electrical parts
engine begins cranking, the 2. If the engine does not start after or accessories, you could change
engine will continue cranking for five to 10 seconds, especially in the way the engine operates.
a few seconds or until the very cold weather (below −18°C Before adding electrical
vehicle starts. If the engine does or 0°F), it could be flooded with equipment, check with your
not start and the key is held in too much gasoline. Push the dealer. If you do not, the engine
START for many seconds, accelerator pedal all the way to might not perform properly. Any
cranking stops after 15 seconds the floor and hold it there as you resulting damage would not be
to prevent cranking motor hold the key in START for a covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Heater WARNING (Continued)

The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather overheat and cause a fire. You
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) could be seriously injured. Plug
for easier starting and better fuel the cord into a properly grounded
economy during engine warm-up. three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
Plug in the coolant heater at least If the cord will not reach, use a
four hours before starting the heavy-duty three-prong extension
vehicle. An internal thermostat in cord rated for at least 15 amps.
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F). 4. Before starting the engine, be
The electrical cord is located on sure to unplug and store the
Using the Engine Coolant the passenger side of the engine cord as it was before to keep it
Heater compartment, next to the engine away from moving engine parts.
compartment fuse block for If you do not it could be
1. Turn off the engine.
V6 models. damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded The length of time the heater should
electrical cord.
110-volt AC outlet. remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
{ WARNING area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
(Continued)
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
Power (RAP) (Automatic Transmission)
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
These vehicle accessories may be set the parking brake.
used for up to 10 minutes after the { WARNING
engine is turned off: See Parking Brake on page 9‑40
It can be dangerous to get out of for more information.
. Audio System the vehicle if the shift lever is not
2. Hold the button on the shift lever
. Power Windows fully in P (Park) with the parking
and push the lever toward the
. brake firmly set. The vehicle can front of the vehicle into P (Park).
Sunroof (if equipped)
roll. If you have left the engine
The power windows and sunroof will running, the vehicle can move 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
continue to work for up to suddenly. You or others could be 4. Remove the key.
10 minutes or until any door is injured. To be sure the vehicle will
opened. The radio will work when not move, even when you are on
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ fairly level ground, use the steps
ACCESSORY. Once the key is
that follow. If you are pulling a
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
the radio will continue to work for
10 minutes, or until the driver door is and Towing Tips on page 9‑62.
opened or the key is removed from
the ignition.
Leaving the Vehicle with the Torque Lock Shifting out of Park
Engine Running Torque lock is when the weight This vehicle is equipped with an
of the vehicle puts too much electronic shift lock control system.
{ WARNING force on the parking pawl in the The shift lock release is
transmission. This happens when designed to:
It can be dangerous to leave the parking on a hill and shifting the
vehicle with the engine running. transmission into P (Park) is not
. Prevent ignition key removal
The vehicle could move suddenly done properly and then it is difficult unless the shift lever is in
if the shift lever is not fully in to shift out of P (Park). To prevent P (Park) with the shift lever
P (Park) with the parking brake torque lock, set the parking brake button fully released.
firmly set. And, if you leave the and then shift into P (Park). To find . Prevent movement of the shift
vehicle with the engine running, it out how, see “Shifting Into Park” lever out of P (Park), unless the
could overheat and even catch listed previously. ignition is in ON/RUN and the
fire. You or others could be If torque lock does occur, the brake pedal is applied.
injured. Do not leave the vehicle vehicle may need to be pushed The shift lock release is always
with the engine running. uphill by another vehicle to relieve functional except in the case of an
the parking pawl pressure, so you uncharged or low voltage (less than
If you have to leave the vehicle with can shift out of P (Park). 9-volt) battery.
the engine running, the vehicle must If the vehicle has an uncharged
be in P (Park) and the parking battery or a battery with low voltage,
brake set. try charging or jump starting the
Release the button and check that battery. See Jump Starting on
the shift lever cannot be moved out page 10‑93.
of P (Park).
To shift out of P (Park): Shift Lock Manual Release To access the shift lock manual
1. Apply the brake pedal. release:
The transmission has an electric
2. Release the parking brake. See park lock called a shift lock manual 1. Apply the parking brake.
Parking Brake on page 9‑40. release. The key must be in the ON/
RUN position, and the brake pedal
3. Press the shift lever button. pressed so the shift lever can be
4. Move the shift lever to the moved from the P (Park) position.
desired position. If the battery has lost power, the
shift lever cannot be moved from
If still unable to shift out of P (Park): P (Park) unless the shift lock manual
1. Fully release the shift lever release is disengaged manually.
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position. 2. Pull the passenger side console
trim away from the front half of
If the shift lever still cannot be the console to expose the shift
moved from P (Park), see Shift Lock lever mechanism.
Manual Release.
8. Place the console trim panel in Parking over Things

the original position, aligning the
fasteners on the trim panel with
That Burn
the slots in the console. Press in
the side trim until it clicks in { WARNING
place.
Things that can burn could touch
The shift lever locks if it is moved hot exhaust parts under the
back to the P (Park) position. vehicle and ignite. Do not park
3. Remove the retainer and the over papers, leaves, dry grass,
Parking (Manual or other things that can burn.
shift lock manual release cover.
Transmission)
4. Push and hold the manual
release lever toward the rear of If the vehicle has a manual
the vehicle. transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
5. Press the select button and R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
move the shift lever to the parking brake. Once the shift lever
N (Neutral) position. has been placed into R (Reverse)
6. Release the lever. with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
7. After the vehicle has been
remove the key, and release the
moved, align the shift lock
clutch.
manual release cover plate and
install the retainer so the If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
automatic transmission can is pulling a trailer, see Driving
operate properly. Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑62.
Active Fuel Management® Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles with V8 engines and an
automatic transmission, except ZL1, { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
have Active Fuel Management®.
This system allows the engine to Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
operate on either all or half of its monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
cylinders, depending on the driving seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
conditions. can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
When less power is required, such even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
as cruising at a constant vehicle Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
speed, the system will operate in . Drive it only with the windows
the half cylinder mode, allowing the
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
vehicle to achieve better fuel
economy. When greater power garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
demands are required, such as that may block underbody immediately.
accelerating from a stop, passing, airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
or merging onto a freeway, the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
system will maintain full-cylinder sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
operation. . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission
It is better not to park with the The automatic transmission has a
engine running. But if you ever have the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully shift lever located on the console
to, here are some things to know. between the seats.
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays the current gear selected in
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you the lower left corner. When Sport
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the Mode is active, an S is displayed.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can If Manual Mode or Electronic Range
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others Select (ERS) Mode are active, an M
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the and the current gear selected (Tap
vehicle will not move, even when Shift) or the maximum gear allowed
which cannot be seen or smelled.
you are on fairly level ground, (ERS Mode) are displayed next to
It can cause unconsciousness the M.
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure
Exhaust on page 9‑29. the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 9‑25.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑62.
system. The regular brake must be

{ WARNING fully applied first and then the shift
lever button pressed before shifting
It is dangerous to get out of the from P (Park) when the ignition key
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
in P (Park) with the parking brake of P (Park), ease pressure on the
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever, then push the shift lever
Do not leave the vehicle when the all the way into P (Park) as you
engine is running unless you maintain brake application. Then
have to. If you have left the press the shift lever button and
engine running, the vehicle can move the shift lever into another
move suddenly. You or others gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9‑26.
could be injured. To be sure the
P (Park): This position locks the vehicle will not move, even when R (Reverse): Use this gear to
rear wheels. It is the best position to you are on fairly level ground, back up.
use when starting the engine always set the parking brake and
because the vehicle cannot move Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
move the shift lever to P (Park). while the vehicle is moving
easily. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic forward could damage the
Transmission) on page 9‑25. transmission. The repairs would
If you are pulling a trailer, see not be covered by the vehicle
Driving Characteristics and warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
Towing Tips on page 9‑62. after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
Make sure the shift lever is fully in get out of snow, ice, or sand without
P (Park) before starting the engine. damaging the transmission, see If
The vehicle has an automatic the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑13.
transmission shift lock control
N (Neutral): In this position, the Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or Powertrain Braking (V6 and
engine does not connect with the N (Neutral) with the engine V8 Engines Except ZL1)
wheels. To restart the engine when running at high speed may When driving on steep descents
the vehicle is already moving, use damage the transmission. The with the shift lever in D (Drive) or
N (Neutral) only. Also, use repairs would not be covered by M (Manual Mode) where frequent
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is the vehicle warranty. Be sure the braking is required, the transmission
being towed. engine is not running at high will shift down a gear to help hold
speed when shifting the vehicle. vehicle speed and reduce brake
{ WARNING D (Drive): This position is for wear. If the driver continues to press
normal driving. It provides the best the brake, the transmission will
Shifting into a drive gear while the fuel economy. When the ZL1 is in downshift until 3 (Third) gear is
engine is running at high speed is D (Drive), the first shift after start will reached.
dangerous. Unless your foot is be from 1 (First) gear. Following
firmly on the brake pedal, the If the brake is released for some
starts will begin in 2 (Second) gear. time, the transmission will upshift a
vehicle could move very rapidly.
If more power is needed for gear. If the road levels out and the
You could lose control and hit
passing, and the vehicle is: accelerator pedal is pressed, the
people or objects. Do not shift transmission will upshift until the
into a drive gear while the engine . Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator appropriate gear is reached.
is running at high speed.
pedal about halfway down. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or accelerate slowly or not shift
more, push the accelerator all gears when you go faster, and
the way down. you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.
M (Manual Mode): This position transmission may remain in a gear line or while turning. The
allows the driver to select gears longer than it would in the normal transmission may remain in a gear
appropriate for current driving driving mode based on throttle input longer than it would in the normal
conditions. and vehicle lateral acceleration. driving mode based on throttle input
With the shift lever in M (Manual If there is a rapid reduction in and vehicle lateral acceleration.
Mode) position, vehicles with axle throttle from a heavy throttle If there is a rapid reduction in
code GW8 will enter ERS Mode. position, the transmission will throttle from a heavy throttle
See Manual Mode on page 9‑34. maintain the current gear up to near position, the transmission will
redline rpm. While braking, the maintain the current gear up to
With the shift lever in M (Manual transmission will automatically approximately 4600 rpm. While
Mode) position, and without using downshift to the next lower gear braking, the transmission will
the Tap Shift controls on the keeping engine speed above automatically downshift to the next
steering wheel, vehicles with any approximately 3000 rpm. If the lower gear keeping engine speed
axle other than GW8 will be in Sport vehicle is then driven for a short below approximately 3000 rpm.
Mode. Sport Mode provides firmer, time at a steady speed, and If the vehicle is then driven for a
quicker shifting. The transmission without high cornering loads, the short time at a steady speed, and
will shift automatically until the Tap transmission will up-shift one gear without high cornering loads, the
Shift controls are used. Tap Shift at a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. After transmission will up-shift one gear
activates driver manual gear shifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or coming at a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. After
selection. See Manual Mode on to a complete stop, the transmission shifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or coming
page 9‑34. will return to normal Sport Mode to a complete stop, the transmission
V6 models without Axle GW8, shifting. will return to normal sport mode
V8 models except ZL1 shifting.
ZL1
While driving in Sport Mode, if Tap While driving in Sport Mode, if Tap
Shift has not been activated, the Shift has not been activated, the
transmission determines when the transmission determines when the
vehicle is being driven in a vehicle is being driven in a
competitive manner. The competitive manner, in a straight
If the vehicle detects aggressive Vehicles with this feature have operate in. This means that all
cornering, even without a heavy indicators on the steering wheel. gears below that number are
application of the throttle, the The controls are on the back of the available. For example, when
transmission will downshift and hold steering wheel. 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
a lower gear to near redline rpm, to To use this feature: 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
aid in vehicle handling balance and automatically shifted by the vehicle.
to improve corner exit speeds. 1. Move the shift lever to The transmission will not shift into
M (Manual Mode). 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
Manual Mode 2. Press the plus/minus buttons used or you shift back into D (Drive).
located on the back of the While in M (Manual Mode), the
Electronic Range Select steering wheel, to increase or transmission will prevent shifting to
(ERS) Mode decrease the gear range a lower gear range if the engine
Vehicles with axle code GW8 have available. speed is too high. The DIC will still
an ERS Mode. ERS Mode allows When you shift from D (Drive) to indicate the lower gear range
you to choose the top-gear limit of M (Manual Mode), the transmission selected, but the transmission will
the transmission with fully automatic will shift to a lower gear range. The not initiate the downshift until the
gear selection. This can help control highest gear available for this range vehicle has met a minimum speed
the vehicle's speed while driving is displayed next to the M in the requirement.
downhill or towing a trailer. The DIC. The number displayed in the
vehicle has an electronic shift DIC is the highest gear that the
position indicator within the transmission will be allowed to
instrument panel cluster. When
using the ERS mode a number will
display next to the M, indicating the
current maximum gear allowed.
Tap Shift Tap the left control to downshift, and

the right control to upshift. The DIC
display indicates the gear the
vehicle is in.
While in M (Manual Mode), the
transmission will prevent shifting to
a lower gear if the engine speed is ZL1 vehicles equipped with a
too high. If the tap down − (Minus) Head-Up Display (HUD) also have
button is held while the vehicle shift timing lights across the top of
slows down, the M in the DIC will the display. As you approach a shift
flash, and the downshift will be point, the row of lights grow closer
allowed when vehicle speed is low together. The transmission should
enough. Continuing to hold the tap be shifted before the lights come
down − (Minus) button will not cause together in the middle of the display.
Vehicles with any axle other than the transmission to continue If the lights begin flashing, you have
GW8 have a Tap Shift Mode. Tap downshifting. Each downshift must exceeded the shift point. Shift
Shift allows the driver to manually be requested separately by immediately.
control the automatic transmission. releasing and reapplying the tap
To use Tap Shift, the shift lever must down − (Minus) button.
be in M (Manual Mode). Vehicles
with this feature have indicators on
the steering wheel. The controls are
on the back of the steering wheel.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) The driver may use this for sport When coasting to a stop in Tap Shift
on page 5‑26 and Head-Up Display driving or when climbing or Mode, the V6 transmission will
(HUD) on page 5‑30. descending hills, to stay in gear automatically downshift to 1 (First)
When in Tap Shift Mode, the longer, or to downshift for more gear, and the V8 transmission will
driver can exit Tap Shift by holding power or engine braking. The automatically downshift to
the right (upshift) control for transmission will only allow you to 2 (Second) gear. A 1 (First) gear
two seconds. The transmission will shift into gears appropriate for the start can be selected using the Tap
return to automatic shifting. vehicle speed and engine Shift controls on V8 models. When
revolutions per minute (rpm). The accelerating from a stop, the
The driver may choose to briefly transmission will not automatically transmissions will hold these gears
enter Tap Shift Mode while in shift to the next higher gear if the until the driver manually selects
D (Drive). Tapping either the upshift engine rpm is too high. If shifting is higher gears using the Tap Shift
or downshift control will place the prevented for any reason, the controls.
transmission in Tap Shift Mode. The message SHIFT DENIED will
driver may then exit Tap Shift Mode When accelerating the vehicle from
appear in the DIC, indicating that a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
by holding the upshift control for the transmission has not shifted
two seconds. The system will you may want to shift into
gears. While in the Tap Shift Mode, 2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratio
return to automatic shifting after the transmission will not
10 seconds of cruising at a steady allows you to gain more traction on
automatically downshift on hard slippery surfaces. ZL1 vehicles may
speed, or when the vehicle comes acceleration.
to a stop. also be shifted into 3 (Third) gear.
Manual Transmission Shift Pattern (V6 Engine) You can shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
Shift Pattern (V8 Engines) (40 mph). If you come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift
into 1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
These are the shift patterns for the 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
six-speed manual transmissions. 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
To operate the transmission: 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly you press the accelerator pedal.
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal. To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when One to Four Shift Message You must complete the shift into
you start or idle the engine. The (V8 Only) 4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
shift lever is in Neutral when it is This helps you get the best possible
centered in the shift pattern, not in fuel economy.
any gear. After shifting to 4 (Fourth), you may
R (Reverse): To back up, press downshift to a lower gear if you
down the clutch pedal and shift into prefer.
R (Reverse). On V8 models, apply Notice: Forcing the shift lever
pressure to get the lever past into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) into when the 1 — 4 SHIFT message
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch comes on may damage the
pedal slowly while pressing the transmission. Shift only from
accelerator pedal. 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
message comes on.
Driver Information Center This message will come on when:
When this message comes on, you . The engine coolant temperature
can only shift from 1 (First) to is higher than 76°C (169°F).
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
2 (Second). The message will be
. The vehicle is accelerating from
displayed in the Driver Information a stop and going 24 to 31 km/h
Center. (15 to 19 mph).
. The vehicle is at 21 percent
throttle or less.
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has the Antilock
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
ZL1 vehicles equipped with a Brake System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the
Head-Up Display (HUD) also have electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel.
shift timing lights across the top of prevent a braking skid.
the display. As you approach a shift ABS can change the brake pressure
When the engine is started and the
point, the row of lights grow closer to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
together. The transmission should than any driver could. This can help
checks itself. A momentary motor or
be shifted before the lights come the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while
together in the middle of the display. while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might
If the lights begin flashing, you have even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the
exceeded the shift point. Shift pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates
immediately. on wheel speed and controls
See Driver Information Center (DIC) braking pressure accordingly.
on page 5‑26 and Head-Up Display
(HUD) on page 5‑30.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.
Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake To release the parking brake:
the time needed to get a foot up to 1. Hold the brake pedal down.
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too 2. Pull the parking brake handle up
close to the vehicle in front of you, until you can press the release
there will not be enough time to button.
apply the brakes if that vehicle 3. Hold the release button in as
suddenly slows or stops. Always you move the brake handle all
leave enough room up ahead to the way down.
stop, even with ABS.
Notice: Driving with the parking
Using ABS brake on can overheat the brake
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold system and cause premature
the brake pedal down firmly and let wear or damage to brake system
ABS work. You might hear the ABS parts. Make sure that the parking
pump or motor operating and feel To apply the parking brake, pull up brake is fully released and the
on the parking brake handle. It is brake warning light is off before
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
not necessary to push in on the driving.
normal.
release button while applying the
Driving with the parking brake
Braking in Emergencies parking brake. If the ignition is in the
applied will cause a warning chime
ON/RUN position, the brake system
ABS allows the driver to steer and to sound and the RELEASE
warning light will come on. See
brake at the same time. In many PARKING BRAKE message to
Brake System Warning Light on
emergencies, steering can help appear in the DIC. The message will
page 5‑21.
more than even the very best remain on until:
braking. . The parking brake is released.
. The vehicle comes to a stop.
If you are towing a trailer and Minor brake pedal pulsation or Ride Control Systems
parking on a hill, see Driving pedal movement during this time
Characteristics and Towing Tips on is normal and the driver should
page 9‑62. continue to apply the brake Traction Control
pedal as the driving situation System (TCS)
Brake Assist dictates. The brake assist feature
The vehicle has a Traction Control
will automatically disengage when
This vehicle has a brake assist System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
the brake pedal is released or brake
feature designed to assist the driver The system utilizes engine and
pedal pressure is quickly
in stopping or decreasing vehicle braking controls to control wheel
decreased.
speed in emergency driving spin during acceleration at all
conditions. This feature uses the driving speeds for maximum driver
stability system hydraulic brake control regardless of conditions.
control module to supplement the When the system senses impending
power brake system under wheel slip during acceleration, it
conditions where the driver has signals the throttle control to reduce
quickly and forcefully applied the drive wheel torque. Under extreme
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly situations, such as going from
stop or slow down the vehicle. The pavement to ice during acceleration,
stability system hydraulic brake the system will selectively apply the
control module increases brake brakes to maintain control. The
pressure at each corner of the system may be heard or felt while it
vehicle until the ABS activates. is working, but this is normal.
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,

or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. Also, turn TCS off while in
deep snow or on loose gravel, to
assist vehicle motion at lower
speeds. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on page 9‑13. See also Winter Press and release the TCS/
flashes when the TCS is limiting Driving on page 9‑11 for information StabiliTrak button and the TCS turns
wheel spin. on using TCS when driving in snowy off. The TCS warning light comes
or icy conditions. on when the TCS is off. Press and
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on solid if there is a problem release the button again to turn the
with the traction control system. See system back on. For information on
Traction Control System (TCS)/ turning StabiliTrak off and on, see
StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑23. “StabiliTrak System” following.
If the light stays on, see your dealer
for service. When the TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. To turn the system off, press and
Adjust your driving accordingly. release the TCS/StabiliTrak button
located on the console in front of the
TCS automatically comes on shift lever.
whenever the vehicle is started. To
limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. The Traction Control System (TCS)/ If there is a problem detected
StabiliTrak button is located on the with StabiliTrak, a SERVICE
StabiliTrak activates when the console in front of the shift lever. STABILITRAK message displays on
computer senses a discrepancy the DIC and the StabiliTrak/TCS
between the intended path and the warning light on the instrument
direction the vehicle is actually panel cluster comes on. When this
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively message and warning light display,
applies braking pressure at any one the system is not operational.
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer Driving should be adjusted
the vehicle in the direction which accordingly. See Ride Control
you are steering. System Messages on page 5‑40
When the system activates, the
If cruise control is being used when TCS/StabiliTrak warning light and Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise flashes on the instrument panel StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑23.
control will automatically disengage. cluster. You may also hear a noise
Press the cruise control button to or feel vibration in the brake pedal.
reengage when road conditions This is normal. Continue to steer the
allow. See Cruise Control on vehicle in the intended direction.
page 9‑50.
Engine Drag Control (EDC) course race track and are not
intended for use on public roads.
EDC improves vehicle stability by
They will not compensate for a
sensing if there is a difference in
driver’s inexperience or lack of
speed between the free rolling front
familiarity with the race track.
wheels and the rear drive wheels
Drivers who prefer to allow the
that often occurs when the driver
system to have more control of the
takes their foot off the accelerator
engine, brake, and suspension are
pedal on slippery surfaces (snow,
advised to turn the normal TCS and
ice, etc.). When this is detected,
StabiliTrak systems on.
EDC sends more torque to the rear
wheels to make sure all four wheels Notice: Do not attempt to shift
are spinning at similar speeds, when the drive wheels are
making the vehicle more stable. spinning and do not have
StabiliTrak comes on automatically traction. This may cause damage
whenever the vehicle is started. The to the transmission. Damage
system should be left on to help Competitive Driving Mode
caused by misuse of the vehicle
assist with directional control of the Competitive Driving Mode, is not covered by the vehicle
vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be Performance Traction Management warranty. See the warranty book
turned off, press and hold the TCS/ (PTM), and Launch Control are for additional information.
StabiliTrak button until the Traction systems designed to allow
Control Off light and the StabiliTrak increased performance while
Off light come on in the instrument accelerating and/or cornering. This
panel cluster. If the system has is accomplished by regulating and
been turned off, press and release optimizing the engine, brakes, and
the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn suspension performance. These
the system back on. modes are for use at a closed
Competitive Driving Mode When the TCS/StabiliTrak button is

(SS Only) pressed again, the TCS and
StabiliTrak systems are on. The
Competitive Driving Mode allows full appropriate message displays
engine power while the StabiliTrak briefly in the DIC.
system helps maintain directional
control of the vehicle by selective Performance Traction
brake application. In this mode, TCS Management (PTM) (ZL1 Only)
is off and Launch Control is
available. Adjust your driving style PTM integrates the TCS,
to account for the available engine StabiliTrak, and Selective Ride
power. See “Launch Control” later in Control systems to provide
this section. improved and consistent
performance when cornering. The
These lights are on when the amount of available engine power is
vehicle is in the Competitive based on the mode selected, track
Driving Mode. conditions, driver skill, and the
This optional handling mode can be radius of each corner.
selected by pressing the TCS/
StabiliTrak button on the console
quickly two times. The appropriate
message displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑40 for more information.
To experience the performance The PTM system contains five

benefit of this system, after entering modes. These modes are selected
a curve and at the point where the by pressing the Selective Ride
driver would normally start to Control/PTM TOUR − or
increase acceleration, the SPORT + button on the center
accelerator pedal can be fully console. The driver scrolls up or
pressed. The PTM system will down through modes 1–5 by
modify the level of engine power for pressing the TOUR − or
a smooth and consistent corner exit. SPORT + button.
The following is a DIC display
description and the recommended
usage of each mode.
These lights are on when the PERF TRACTION 1 – WET /
vehicle is in the PTM Mode. ACTIVE HANDLING ON
This optional handling mode can be . Intended for all driver skill levels.
selected by pressing the TCS/ To select a mode while in PTM,
StabiliTrak button on the console push the Selective Ride Control/
. Wet or damp conditions
quickly two times. The appropriate PTM − TOUR or + SPORT button only — not intended for use in
message displays in the DIC. See on the center console. heavy rain or standing water.
Ride Control System Messages on . StabiliTrak is on and engine
page 5‑40. power is reduced based on
conditions.
PERF TRACTION 2 – DRY / PERF TRACTION 4 – Use mode 5 for most consistent
ACTIVE HANDLING ON SPORT 2 / ACTIVE performance during drag strip use.
. For use by less experienced HANDLING OFF When the TCS/StabiliTrak button is
drivers or while learning a new . For use by drivers who are pressed again, the vehicle exits
track. familiar with the track. PTM mode and the TCS and
StabiliTrak systems are on.
. Dry conditions only. . Requires more driving skill than
. StabiliTrak is on and engine modes 2 or 3. Launch Control (V8 with
power is slightly reduced based . Dry conditions only. Manual Transmissions Only)
on conditions. A Launch Control feature is
. StabiliTrak is off and available
engine power is available is the available, within Competitive Driving
PERF TRACTION 3 – Mode or PTM, on vehicles with a
SPORT 1 / ACTIVE same as mode 3.
manual transmission to allow the
HANDLING ON PERF TRACTION 5 – RACE / driver to achieve high levels of
. For use by drivers who are ACTIVE HANDLING OFF vehicle acceleration in a straight
familiar with the track. line. Launch Control is a form of
. For use by drivers who are traction control that manages tire
. Requires more driving skill than familiar with the track. spin while launching the vehicle.
mode 2. . Requires more driving skill than This feature is intended for use
. Dry conditions only. in other modes. during closed course race events
. StabiliTrak is on and more . Dry conditions only. where consistent zero to sixty
engine power is available than in and quarter mile times are
. StabiliTrak is off and available
mode 2. desirable.
engine power is available for
maximum cornering speed.
Launch Control is only available After the vehicle is launched, the Limited-Slip Rear Axle
when the following criteria are met: system continues in Competitive
Driving Mode or PTM. Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
. Competitive Driving Mode is can give more traction on snow,
selected or any of the PTM Competitive Driving Mode, PTM, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
modes are selected. and Launch Control are systems traction is low, this feature allows
. The vehicle is not moving. designed for a closed course race the drive wheel with the most
track and not intended for use on traction to move the vehicle. The
. The steering wheel is pointing public roads. The systems are not limited-slip rear axle also gives the
straight. intended to compensate for lack of driver enhanced control when
. The clutch is pressed and the driver experience or familiarity with cornering hard or completing a
vehicle is in first gear. the race track. maneuver, such as a lane change.
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly ZL1 Only
applied to wide open throttle. Use Mode 5 for the most consistent
The Launch Control feature will performance during drag strip use.
initially limit engine speed as the
driver rapidly applies the accelerator
pedal to wide open throttle.
A smooth, quick release of the
clutch, while maintaining the fully
pressed accelerator pedal, will
manage wheel slip. Complete shifts
are described in Manual
Transmission on page 9‑37.
Selective Ride Control TOUR: Use for normal city and The Selective Ride button indicator
highway driving. The TOUR button lights will not illuminate when any
ZL1 Only selects a suspension and Electric PTM mode is selected. When this
The vehicle has a ride control Power Steering (EPS) calibration mode is selected, pressing the
system called Magnetic Selective that provides a smooth, soft ride. Selective Ride button will change
Ride Control. The system provides SPORT: Use where road conditions the PTM mode and the suspension
the following performance benefits: or personal preference demand setting will be determined
more control. The SPORT button automatically. See Competitive
. Reduced Impact Harshness Driving Mode on page 9‑44.
selects a suspension and EPS
. Improved Road Isolation calibration that provides more “feel,” If a malfunction occurs with the
. Improved High-Speed Stability or response to the road conditions. Selective Ride Control system, the
The setting can be changed at any appropriate messages will be
. Improved Handling Response displayed in the DIC. See Ride
time. Based on road conditions,
. Better Control of Body Ride steering wheel angle, and the Control System Messages on
Motions vehicle speed, the system page 5‑40.
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.
The Selective Ride buttons are

located on the center console.
Press to select the suspension of
your choice. The indicator light will
illuminate the current suspension
setting.
Cruise Control RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):

Move the thumbwheel up to make
With cruise control, the vehicle can the vehicle resume to a previously
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h set speed or to accelerate to a
(25 mph) or more without keeping higher speed.
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
control does not work at speeds
thumbwheel down to set a speed or
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
to make the vehicle decelerate.
{ WARNING Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control can be dangerous If 5 is on when not in use, it could

where you cannot drive safely at get bumped and go into cruise when
The cruise control buttons are on not desired. Keep the cruise control
a steady speed. So, do not use
the outboard side of the steering switch off when cruise is not
the cruise control on winding wheel. being used.
roads or in heavy traffic.
5 (On/Off): Use to turn the cruise 1. Press 5 to turn cruise
Cruise control can be dangerous control system on and off. An
on slippery roads. On such roads, control on.
indicator light comes on in the
fast changes in tire traction can instrument panel cluster. 2. Get to the speed desired.
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
\ (Cancel): Press to disengage 3. Press the thumbwheel toward
cruise control without erasing the SET/− and release it.
cruise control on slippery roads.
set speed from memory. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control shuts off.
Resuming a Set Speed

. To increase the speed in small Passing Another Vehicle While
amounts, press the thumbwheel Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control is set at a up toward RES/+ briefly and
desired speed and then the brakes then release it. Each time this is Use the accelerator pedal to
are applied, the cruise control is done, the vehicle goes about increase the vehicle speed. When
disengaged without erasing the set 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. you take your foot off the pedal, the
speed from memory. vehicle will slow down to the
Reducing Speed While Using previous set cruise control speed.
The indicator light on the instrument
Cruise Control
panel cluster goes out when the Using Cruise Control on Hills
cruise is no longer engaged. Once If the cruise control system is
already activated: How well the cruise control works
the vehicle speed reaches about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the on hills depends upon the vehicle's
. Press the thumbwheel toward speed, load, and the steepness of
thumbwheel up toward RES/+ SET/− and hold until the desired
briefly on the steering wheel. The the hills. When going up steep hills,
lower speed is reached, then you might have to step on the
vehicle returns to the previous set release it.
speed and stays there. accelerator pedal to maintain the
. To slow down in small amounts, vehicle speed. When going
Increasing Speed While Using press the thumbwheel toward downhill, you might have to brake or
Cruise Control SET/− briefly. Each time this is shift to a lower gear to maintain the
If the cruise control system is done, the vehicle goes about vehicle speed. When the brakes are
already activated: 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. applied the cruise control is
disengaged.
. Press the thumbwheel up toward
RES/+ and hold it until the
vehicle accelerates to the
desired speed, and then
release it.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

There are three ways to end the
{ WARNING
cruise control:
Systems The URPA system does not
. To disengage cruise control, detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
Ultrasonic Parking Assist animals, or any other objects
step lightly on the brake pedal or
clutch. The indicator light on the For vehicles with the Ultrasonic located below the bumper or that
instrument panel cluster Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, are too close or too far from the
goes out. it assists the driver with parking and vehicle. To prevent injury, death,
avoiding objects while in or vehicle damage, even with
. Press \ on the steering wheel. R (Reverse). URPA operates at URPA, always check the area
. To turn off cruise control, press speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). around the vehicle and check all
5 on the steering wheel. The sensors on the rear bumper mirrors before backing.
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
Erasing Speed Memory behind the vehicle, and at least
The cruise control set speed is 20 cm (8 in) off the ground. How the System Works
erased from memory if 5 is pressed URPA comes on automatically when
or if the vehicle is turned off. the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than When the System Does Not
. The park assist sensors are
30 cm (12 in), the beeping is a Seem to Work Properly covered by frost or ice. Frost or
continuous tone for five seconds. ice can form around and behind
The following messages may be the sensors and may not always
To be detected, objects must be at displayed on the DIC: be seen; this can occur after
least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and washing the vehicle in cold
below trunk level. Objects must also SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: If
this message occurs, take the weather. The message may not
be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear clear until the frost or ice has
bumper. The distance objects can vehicle to your dealer to repair the
system. melted.
be detected may be less during
warmer or humid weather. PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA
. An object was hanging out of the
system does not activate due to a trunk during the last drive cycle.
Turning the System On and Off temporary condition, the message Once the object is removed,
The URPA system can be turned on displays on the DIC. This can occur URPA will return to normal
and off using the infotainment under the following conditions: operation.
system controls. See Vehicle . The driver has disabled the
. The bumper is damaged. Take
Personalization on page 5‑46. system. the vehicle to your dealer to
When the system is off, PARK repair the system.
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
. Other conditions, such as
Information Center (DIC). The bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, vibrations from a jackhammer or
message disappears after a short ice, and slush. For cleaning the compression of air brakes on
period of time. instructions, see Exterior Care a very large truck, are affecting
URPA defaults to the on setting on page 10‑97. system performance.
each time the vehicle is started.
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)

Rear Vision Camera Errors
Camera (RVC) If the rear vision camera system
Failure to use proper care before requires service, a flashing symbol
This vehicle may have an RVC will appear in the inside rearview
system. Read this entire section backing may result in injury,
death, or vehicle damage. Always mirror.
before using it.
check before backing by checking If any other problem occurs or if a
behind and around the vehicle. problem persists, see your dealer.
{ WARNING
Rear Vision Camera Location
The RVC system does not display The rear vision camera system is
pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, designed to help the driver when
or any other object located backing up by displaying a view of
outside the camera's field of view, the area behind the vehicle. When
below the bumper, or under the the key is in ON/RUN and the driver
vehicle. shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),
the video image automatically
Do not back the vehicle using appears on the inside rearview
only the RVC screen, such as mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
during longer, higher speed R (Reverse), the video image
backing maneuvers, or where automatically disappears from the
there could be cross-traffic. inside rearview mirror.
Perceived distances may be
different from actual distances.
(Continued) The camera is located above the
license plate.
The area displayed by the camera is When the System Does Not
limited. It does not display objects Seem to Work Properly
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper and can vary The RVC system may not work
depending on vehicle orientation or properly or display a clear image if:
road conditions. The distance of the . It is dark.
image that appears on the screen is . The sun or the beam of
different from the actual distance.
headlamps are shining directly
The following illustration shows the into the camera lens.
field of view that the camera . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
provides.
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
. The back of the vehicle is in an
accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Fuel Recommended Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
is an important part of the proper (VIN Code 3), use regular unleaded
maintenance of this vehicle. To help gasoline with a posted octane rating
keep the engine clean and maintain of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
optimum vehicle performance, we is less than 87, an audible knocking
recommend the use of gasoline noise, commonly referred to as
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent spark knock, might be heard when
Gasoline. driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
Look for the TOP TIER label on the higher as soon as possible. If heavy
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets knocking is heard when using
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle gasoline rated at 87 octane or
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows higher, the engine needs service.
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that
Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. The If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
www.toptiergas.com. VIN is at the top left of the (VIN Code W) or the 6.2L V8 engine
instrument panel. See Vehicle (VIN Code J), use premium
Identification Number (VIN) on unleaded gasoline with a posted
page 12‑1. octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. You can also
use regular unleaded gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher, but the
vehicle's acceleration could be
slightly reduced, and a slight audible
knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard. use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or California Fuel
If the octane rating is less than 87, a higher as soon as possible.
heavy knocking noise might be Otherwise, you could damage the
Requirements
heard when driving. If this occurs, engine. If heavy knocking is heard If the vehicle is certified to meet
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or when using gasoline rated at California Emissions Standards, it is
higher as soon as possible. 87 octane or higher, the engine designed to operate on fuels that
Otherwise, you could damage the needs service. meet California specifications. See
engine. If heavy knocking is heard the underhood emission control
when using gasoline rated at Gasoline Specifications label. If this fuel is not available in
87 octane or higher, the engine states adopting California Emissions
needs service.
(U.S. and Canada Only) Standards, the vehicle will operate
At a minimum, gasoline should satisfactorily on fuels meeting
Required Fuel (ZL1 Only) meet ASTM specification federal specifications, but emission
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine D 4814 in the United States or control system performance might
(VIN Code P), use premium CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. be affected. The malfunction
unleaded gasoline with a posted Some gasolines contain an indicator lamp could turn on and the
octane rating of 91 or higher. For octane-enhancing additive called vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
best performance, use premium methylcyclopentadienyl manganese See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
unleaded gasoline with a posted tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to
octane rating of 93. You can also against the use of gasolines your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
use regular unleaded gasoline rated containing MMT. See Fuel Additives If it is determined that the condition
at 87 octane or higher, but the on page 9‑58 for additional is caused by the type of fuel used,
vehicle's acceleration could be information. repairs might not be covered by the
slightly reduced, and a slight audible vehicle warranty.
knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard.
If the octane rating is less than 87, a
heavy knocking noise might be
heard when driving. If this occurs,
Fuels in Foreign regulations. To help keep fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates,

injectors and intake valves clean such as ethers and ethanol, and
Countries and avoid problems due to dirty reformulated gasolines might be
Never use leaded gasoline or any injectors or valves, look for gasoline available in your area. We
other fuel not recommended in the that is advertised as TOP TIER recommend that you use these
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs Detergent Gasoline. Look for the gasolines, if they comply with the
caused by use of improper fuel TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to specifications described earlier.
would not be covered by the vehicle ensure gasoline meets enhanced However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
warranty. detergency standards developed by other fuels containing more than
the auto companies. A list of 15% ethanol must not be used in
To check the fuel availability, ask an
marketers providing TOP TIER vehicles that were not designed for
auto club, or contact a major oil
Detergent Gasoline can be found at those fuels.
company that does business in the
www.toptiergas.com. Notice: This vehicle was not
country where you will be driving.
For customers who do not use TOP designed for fuel that contains
Fuel Additives TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, methanol. Do not use fuel
one bottle of GM Fuel System containing methanol. It can
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel corrode metal parts in the fuel
in the United States are now tank at every engine oil change, can system and also damage plastic
required to contain additives that help clean deposits from fuel and rubber parts. That damage
help prevent engine and fuel system injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel would not be covered under the
deposits from forming, allowing the System Treatment PLUS is the only vehicle warranty.
emission control system to work gasoline additive recommended by
properly. In most cases, nothing General Motors. It is available at
should have to be added to the fuel. your dealer.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
Some gasolines that are not Filling the Tank

reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called { WARNING
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Fuel vapor burns violently and a
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
where you buy gasoline whether the
To help avoid injuries to you and
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. others, read and follow all the
Fuels containing MMT can reduce instructions on the fuel pump
spark plug life and affect emission island. Turn off the engine when
control system performance. The refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
malfunction indicator lamp might or when refueling the vehicle. Do
turn on. If this occurs, return to your not use cellular phones. Keep The fuel cap is located behind a
dealer for service. sparks, flames, and smoking hinged fuel door on the passenger
materials away from fuel. Do not side of the vehicle. To open the fuel
leave the fuel pump unattended door, push the rearward center edge
when refueling the vehicle. This is in and release and it will open.
against the law in some places. To unlock the fuel cap on vehicles
Do not re-enter the vehicle while equipped with the locking fuel cap,
pumping fuel. Keep children away use the key that is part of the
from the fuel pump; never let Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
children pump fuel. transmitter.
When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks, otherwise
the malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5‑18.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not

{ WARNING top off or overfill the tank and wait a { WARNING
few seconds after you have finished
Fuel can spray out on you if you pumping before removing the If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then surfaces as soon as possible. See nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
something ignites it, you could be Exterior Care on page 10‑97. shutting off the pump or by
badly burned. This spray can notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Leave the area immediately.
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
and is more likely in hot weather.
the cap is fully installed. The
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Notice: If a new fuel cap is
diagnostic system can determine if
for any hiss noise to stop. Then the fuel cap has been left off or needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. improperly installed. This would type of cap from your dealer. The
allow fuel to evaporate into the wrong type of fuel cap might not
atmosphere. See Malfunction fit properly, might cause the
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18. malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
Information
Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer.
vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
and the vehicle damaged if this See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to
the ground. tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled The following information has

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules for
page 10‑96. For information on your safety and that of your
towing the vehicle behind another have been followed. Ask your passengers. Read this section
vehicle such as a motor home, see dealer for advice and information carefully before pulling a trailer.
Recreational Vehicle Towing on about towing a trailer with the
page 10‑96. vehicle. Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is . There are many laws, including
and Towing Tips equipped with the proper trailer speed limit restrictions, that
towing equipment. To identify the apply to trailering. Check for
trailering capacity of the vehicle, see
{ WARNING Trailer Towing (Except ZL1) on
legal requirements with state or
provincial police.
The driver can lose control when page 9‑66 or Trailer Towing (ZL1)
on page 9‑66. Trailering changes
. Do not tow a trailer at all during
pulling a trailer if the correct the first 1 600 km (1,000 mi) the
handling, acceleration, braking,
equipment is not used or the new vehicle is driven. The
durability, and fuel economy. With
vehicle is not driven properly. For engine, axle or other parts could
the added weight, the engine,
example, if the trailer is too transmission, wheel assemblies, be damaged.
heavy, the brakes may not work and tires are forced to work harder . During the first 800 km (500 mi)
well — or even at all. The driver and under greater loads. The trailer that a trailer is towed, do not
and passengers could be also adds wind resistance, drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
seriously injured. The vehicle may increasing the pulling requirements. do not make starts at full throttle.
also be damaged; the resulting For safe trailering, correctly use the This reduces wear on the
repairs would not be covered by proper trailering equipment. vehicle.
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
(Continued)

. Vehicles with automatic Driving with a Trailer Towing with a Stability Control
transmissions can tow in System
D (Drive), but M (Manual Mode) Towing a trailer requires experience.
is recommended. See Get familiar with handling and When towing, the sound of the
“Manual Mode” in Automatic braking with the added trailer stability control system might be
Transmission on page 9‑30 for weight. The vehicle is now longer heard. The system is reacting to the
more information. Use a lower and not as responsive as the vehicle movement caused by the
gear if the transmission shifts vehicle is by itself. trailer, which mainly occurs during
too often. For vehicles with a Check all trailer hitch parts and cornering. This is normal when
manual transmission, it is better attachments, safety chains, towing heavier trailers.
not to use the highest gear. electrical connectors, lamps, tires, Following Distance
. Use the cruise control when and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle Stay at least twice as far behind the
towing.
and trailer moving and then apply vehicle ahead as you would when
. Obey speed limit restrictions. the trailer brake controller by hand driving the vehicle without a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the to be sure the brakes are working. This can help to avoid situations
maximum posted speed for that require heavy braking and
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h During the trip, check regularly to be sudden turns.
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the sure that the load is secure, and the
vehicle. lamps and trailer brakes are working Passing
properly. More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.
Backing Up Turn Signals when Towing a longer work well. Vehicles with
Trailer automatic transmissions can tow in
Hold the bottom of the steering
D (Drive), but M (Manual Mode) is
wheel with one hand. Then, to move The arrows on the instrument panel recommended. See “Manual Mode”
the trailer to the left, move that hand flash whenever signaling a turn or in Automatic Transmission on
to the left. To move the trailer to the lane change. Properly hooked up, page 9‑30 for more information. Use
right, move your hand to the right. the trailer lamps also flash, telling a lower gear if the transmission
Always back up slowly and, other drivers the vehicle is turning, shifts too often. For vehicles with a
if possible, have someone changing lanes, or stopping. manual transmission, it is better not
guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on to use the highest gear.
Making Turns the instrument panel flash for turns When towing at high altitude on
even if the bulbs on the trailer are steep uphill grades, consider the
Notice: Making very sharp turns burned out. For this reason you may
while trailering could cause the following: Engine coolant will boil at
think other drivers are seeing the a lower temperature than at normal
trailer to come in contact with the signal when they are not. It is
vehicle. The vehicle could be altitudes. If the engine is turned off
important to check occasionally to immediately after towing at high
damaged. Avoid making very be sure the trailer bulbs are still
sharp turns while trailering. altitude on steep uphill grades, the
working. vehicle may show signs similar to
When turning with a trailer, make engine overheating. To avoid this,
wider turns than normal. Do Driving on Grades
let the engine run while parked,
this so the trailer won't strike soft Reduce speed and shift to a preferably on level ground, with the
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees lower gear before starting down a automatic transmission in P (Park)
or other objects. Avoid jerky or long or steep downgrade. If the for a few minutes before turning the
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in transmission is not shifted down, the engine off. For vehicles with manual
advance. brakes might have to be used so transmissions, let the engine run
much that they would get hot and no while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of
gear and the parking brake applied,
for a few minutes before turning the 2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance when Trailer
engine off. If the overheat warning under the trailer wheels. Towing
comes on, see Engine Overheating 3. When the wheel chocks are in
on page 10‑30. The vehicle needs service more
place, release the brake pedal often when pulling a trailer. See this
Parking on Hills until the chocks absorb the load. manual's Maintenance Schedule or
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then Index for more information. Things
{ WARNING apply the parking brake and shift that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
into P (Park) for vehicles with an
Parking the vehicle on a hill with automatic transmission or into transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the trailer attached can be gear for vehicles with a manual lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
dangerous. If something goes transmission. brake system. It is a good idea to
wrong, the rig could start to move. inspect these before and during
5. Release the brake pedal. the trip.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all
damaged. When possible, always 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
park the rig on a flat surface. while you: Engine Cooling when Trailer
. start the engine, Towing
If parking the rig on a hill: . shift into a gear, and The cooling system may temporarily
1. Press the brake pedal, but do . overheat during severe operating
not shift into P (Park) yet for release the parking brake.
conditions. See Engine Overheating
vehicles with an automatic 2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 10‑30.
transmission, or into gear for
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
vehicles with a manual
clear of the chocks.
transmission. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill or 4. Stop and have someone pick up
into traffic if facing uphill. and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing (ZL1) It depends on how the rig is used. Weight of the Trailer Tongue
For example, speed, altitude, road
The vehicle is neither designed nor The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
grades, outside temperature, and
intended to tow a trailer. an important weight to measure
how much the vehicle is used to pull
because it affects the total gross
a trailer are all important. It can
Trailer Towing weight of the vehicle. The Gross
depend on any special equipment
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
(Except ZL1) on the vehicle, and the amount of
curb weight of the vehicle, any
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
Before pulling a trailer, there are cargo carried in it, and the people
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
three important considerations that who will be riding in the vehicle.
later in this section for more
have to do with weight: If there are a lot of options,
information.
equipment, passengers or cargo in
. The weight of the trailer. Maximum trailer weight is calculated the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
. The weight of the trailer tongue. assuming only the driver is in the weight the vehicle can carry, which
tow vehicle and it has all the will also reduce the trailer weight the
. The total weight on your
required trailering equipment. The vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
vehicle's tires.
weight of additional optional the tongue load must be added to
Weight of the Trailer equipment, passengers and cargo in the GVW because the vehicle will
the tow vehicle must be subtracted be carrying that weight, too. See
How heavy can a trailer safely be? from the maximum trailer weight. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14
It should never weigh more than Ask your dealer for our trailering for more information about the
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that information or advice, or you can vehicle's maximum load capacity.
can be too heavy. write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for
more information.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's

. Will any holes be made in the
Tires body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
Be sure the vehicle's tires are are, seal the holes when the
inflated to the upper limit for cold hitch is removed. If the holes are
tires. These numbers can be found not sealed, dirt, water, and
on the Tire and Loading Information deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on from the exhaust can get into the
page 9‑14. Make sure not to go over vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
the GVW limit for the vehicle, page 9‑29.
including the weight of the trailer
tongue. Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
The trailer tongue (A) should weigh Towing Equipment vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded safety chains under the tongue of
trailer weight (B). Hitches the trailer to help prevent the tongue
After loading the trailer, weigh the Use the correct hitch equipment. from contacting the road if it
trailer and then the tongue, See your dealer or a hitch dealer for becomes separated from the hitch.
separately, to see if the weights are assistance. Leave enough slack so the rig can
proper. If they aren't, adjustments turn. Never allow safety chains to
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
might be made by moving some drag on the ground.
is not intended for hitches. Do
items around in the trailer. not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Trailer Brakes Conversions and The vehicle has an airbag system.

Before attempting to add anything
Does the trailer have its own Add-Ons electrical to the vehicle, see
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and Add-On Electrical Vehicle on page 3‑30 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
maintained properly. Equipment Vehicle on page 3‑30.
Because the vehicle has antilock Notice: Do not add anything
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's electrical to the vehicle unless
brake system. If this is done, both you check with your dealer first.
brake systems will not work well, Some electrical equipment can
or at all. damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual (Include Mex) - 2012 - 2nd - 11/16/11 Black plate (1,1)
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Park Brake and P (Park)

Vehicle Care (ZL1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-37
Cooling System (Except ZL1 Wiper Blade
Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
General Information Cooling System (ZL1 Windshield Replacement . . . 10-38
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
California Proposition Cooling System Headlamp Aiming
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 (Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
California Perchlorate Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Bulb Replacement
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-30 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Accessories and Power Steering Fluid
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 High Intensity Discharge
Vehicle Checks Power Steering Fluid (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Doing Your Own (ZL1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Headlamps, Front Turn
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Signal and Parking Lamps
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 (Base Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Compartment Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Headlamps, Front Turn
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Signal and Parking Lamps
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 (Uplevel Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-36 Daytime Running
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-16 Automatic Transmission Shift Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Automatic Transmission Lock Control Function Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Manual Transmission Ignition Transmission Lock Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-46
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Jump Starting

Electrical System When It Is Time for New Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Fuses and Circuit Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Towing
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Different Size Tires and Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Engine Compartment Fuse Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Recreational Vehicle
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Uniform Tire Quality Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Instrument Panel Fuse Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Appearance Care
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Rear Compartment Fuse Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Wheels and Tires If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Tire Sealant and
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Storing the Tire Sealant and
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-56 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-92
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Vehicle Care 10-3
General Information California Proposition California Perchlorate

For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning Materials Requirements
your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag
and supported service people. known to the State of California to initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in
these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials.
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary.
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Accessories and Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks

resulting from modifications or the
Modifications installation or use of non‐GM
Adding non‐dealer accessories or certified parts, including control Doing Your Own
making modifications to the vehicle module or software modifications, is Service Work
can affect vehicle performance and not covered under the terms of the
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
{ WARNING
handling, emissions systems, affected parts. It can be dangerous to work on
aerodynamics, durability, and GM Accessories are designed to your vehicle if you do not have
electronic systems like antilock complement and function with other the proper knowledge, service
brakes, traction control, and stability systems on the vehicle. See your manual, tools, or parts. Always
control. These accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle follow owner manual procedures
modifications could even cause using genuine GM Accessories and consult the service manual
malfunction or damage not covered installed by a dealer technician. for your vehicle before doing any
by the vehicle warranty. service work.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑30. If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑18.
Vehicle Care 10-5
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑30.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11‑15.
2. Pull up on the secondary hood

release. The lever is located
near the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle located 3. Lift the hood.
below the instrument panel to Before closing the hood, be sure all
the left of the steering wheel. filler caps are on properly. Then lift
the hood to relieve pressure. Pull
the hood down on the passenger
side to close it firmly.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
3.6L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Underhood Electrical Center. E. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View). I. Brake Master Cylinder and
See Engine Compartment Fuse See Engine Coolant on Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
Block on page 10‑48. page 10‑24. (if equipped with manual
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle F. Power Steering Reservoir and transmission). See Brakes on
and Cap. See Engine Coolant Cap (Out of View). See Power page 10‑33 or Hydraulic Clutch
on page 10‑24. Steering Fluid (Except ZL1) on on page 10‑17.
C. Engine Cover on page 10‑11. page 10‑31 or Power Steering J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
Fluid (ZL1 Only) on page 10‑32. See Battery on page 10‑35.
D. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1 Engines) on Oil on page 10‑13. (Except ZL1) on page 10‑18 or
page 10‑20 or Cooling System H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1
(ZL1 Engine Only) on View). See Engine Oil on Only) on page 10‑19.
page 10‑22 or Cooling System page 10‑13. L. Windshield Washer Fluid
(Intercooler) on page 10‑23. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑32.
10-8 Vehicle Care
6.2L V8 Engine (L99 Engine Shown, LS3 Similar)

Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Underhood Electrical Center. G. Power Steering Reservoir and J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Fuse Cap (Under Engine Cover). See (Except ZL1) on page 10‑18 or
Block on page 10‑48. Power Steering Fluid (Except Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle ZL1) on page 10‑31 or Power Only) on page 10‑19.
and Cap. See Engine Coolant Steering Fluid (ZL1 Only) on K. Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 10‑24. page 10‑32. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine H. Brake Master Cylinder and page 10‑32.
Oil on page 10‑13. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir L. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View).
(if equipped with manual See Engine Coolant on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of transmission). See Brakes on
View). See Engine Oil on page 10‑24.
page 10‑33 or Hydraulic Clutch
page 10‑13. on page 10‑17.
E. Engine Cover on page 10‑11. I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
F. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of See Battery on page 10‑35.
View). See Cooling System
(Except ZL1 Engines) on
page 10‑20 or Cooling System
(ZL1 Engine Only) on
page 10‑22 or Cooling System
(Intercooler) on page 10‑23.
10-10 Vehicle Care
6.2L V8 Engine (ZL1)

Vehicle Care 10-11
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle H. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of Engine Cover
and Cap. See Engine Coolant View). See Cooling System
on page 10‑24. (Except ZL1 Engines) on 3.6L V6 Engine Cover
B. Underhood Electrical Center. page 10‑20 or Cooling System
See Engine Compartment Fuse (ZL1 Engine Only) on
Block on page 10‑48. page 10‑22 or Cooling System
(Intercooler) on page 10‑23.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑13. I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1) on page 10‑18 or
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1
View). See Engine Oil on Only) on page 10‑19.
page 10‑13.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
E. Engine Cover on page 10‑11. See Battery on page 10‑35.
F. Radiator Fill Cap. See Engine K. Brake Master Cylinder and
Coolant on page 10‑24. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
G. Intercooler Fill Cap (Out of (if equipped with manual A. Engine Cover
View). See Cooling System transmission). See Brakes on
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
(Except ZL1 Engines) on page 10‑33 or Hydraulic Clutch
page 10‑20 or Cooling System on page 10‑17. To remove:
(ZL1 Engine Only) on L. Windshield Washer Fluid 1. Remove the engine oil
page 10‑22 or Cooling System Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on fill cap (B).
(Intercooler) on page 10‑23. page 10‑32. 2. Lift the engine cover (A) to
disengage one front attachment
point.
10-12 Vehicle Care
3. Pull the engine cover forward to To remove: 6.2L V8 Engine Cover

disengage it from the two 1. Remove the engine oil (ZL1 Only)
rear tabs. fill cap (A).
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall 2. Lift the engine cover (B) to
the engine cover. disengage the two front
6.2L V8 Engine Cover (L99 attachment points.
Engine Shown, LS3 Similar) 3. Pull the engine cover forward to
disengage it from the horizontal
rear attachments.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
the engine cover.
A. Engine Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover
To remove:
1. Remove the engine oil
fill cap (A).
A. Engine Oil Fill Cap
2. Lift the engine cover (B) to
B. Engine Cover disengage front the attachment
points.
Vehicle Care 10-13
3. Pull the engine cover forward to

. Change the engine oil at the Obtaining an accurate oil level
disengage and remove. appropriate time. See Engine Oil reading is essential:
Life System on page 10‑16.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall 1. If the engine has been running
the engine cover.
. Always dispose of engine oil recently, turn off the engine and
properly. See “What to Do with allow several minutes for the oil
Engine Oil Used Oil” in this section. to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking Engine Oil Checking the oil level too soon
To ensure proper engine after engine shutoff will not
performance and long life, careful It is a good idea to check the engine provide an accurate oil level
attention must be paid to engine oil. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to reading.
Following these simple, but get an accurate reading, the vehicle
important steps will help protect must be on level ground. The 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
your investment: engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow with a paper towel or cloth, then
loop. See Engine Compartment push it back in all the way.
. Always use engine oil approved Remove it again, keeping the tip
to the proper specification and of Overview on page 10‑6 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick. down, and check the level.
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
. Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
10-14 Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Oil levels above or below the
Selecting the right engine oil
acceptable operating range
depends on both the proper oil
shown on the dipstick are harmful
specification and viscosity grade.
to the engine. If you find that you
See Recommended Fluids and
have an oil level above the
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level Specification
gets above the cross-hatched
If the oil is below the cross-hatched Use and ask for licensed engine oils
area that shows the proper
area at the tip of the dipstick, add with the dexos1® approved
operating range, the engine could
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil certification mark. Engine oils
be damaged. You should drain
and then recheck the level. See meeting the requirements for the
out the excess oil or limit driving
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in vehicle should have the dexos1
of the vehicle and seek a service
this section for an explanation of approved certification mark. This
professional to remove the
what kind of oil to use. For engine certification mark indicates that the
excess amount of oil.
oil crankcase capacity, see oil has been approved to the dexos1
Capacities and Specifications on See Engine Compartment Overview specification.
page 12‑2. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Vehicle Care 10-15
If in an area of extreme cold, where What to Do with Used Oil

the temperature falls below −20°F
Used engine oil contains certain
(−29°C), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
elements that can be unhealthy for
be used. An oil of this viscosity
your skin and could even cause
grade will provide easier cold
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
starting for the engine at extremely
your skin for very long. Clean your
Notice: Failure to use the low temperatures. When selecting
skin and nails with soap and water,
recommended engine oil or an oil of the appropriate viscosity
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
equivalent can result in engine grade, always select an oil that
properly dispose of clothing or rags
damage not covered by the meets the dexos1 specification or
containing used engine oil. See the
vehicle warranty. Check with your equivalent. See “Specification” for
manufacturer's warnings about the
dealer or service provider on more information.
use and disposal of oil products.
whether the oil is approved to the Engine Oil Additives/Engine
dexos1 specification. Used oil can be a threat to the
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your
Viscosity Grade Do not add anything to the oil. The own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity recommended oils with the dexos from the filter before disposal. Never
grade for the vehicle. Do not use specification and displaying the dispose of oil by putting it in the
other viscosity grade oils such as dexos certification mark are all that trash or pouring it on the ground,
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. is needed for good performance and into sewers, or into streams or
engine protection. bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil
the best conditions, the oil life Life System
When to Change Engine Oil system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. To reset the
on a combination of factors which and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained system:
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven. service people who will perform this 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
Based on driving conditions, the work and reset the system. It is also the engine off.
mileage at which an oil change is important to check the oil regularly
2. Fully press and release the
indicated can vary considerably. For over the course of an oil drain
accelerator pedal three times
the oil life system to work properly, interval and keep it at the proper
within five seconds.
the system must be reset every time level.
The system is reset when the
the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
When the system has calculated accidentally, the oil must be
message goes off.
that oil life has been diminished, it changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
indicates that an oil change is
Remember to reset the oil life message comes back on when the
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
system whenever the oil is changed. vehicle is started, the engine oil life
OIL SOON message comes on. See
system has not been reset. Repeat
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑38.
the procedure.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
Vehicle Care 10-17
Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the Hydraulic Clutch
intervals listed in Maintenance
Fluid Schedule on page 11‑3, and be sure For vehicles with a manual
to use the fluid listed in transmission, it is not necessary to
How to Check Automatic regularly check brake/clutch fluid
Transmission Fluid Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12. unless there is a leak suspected.
It is not necessary to check Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
the transmission fluid level. Manual Transmission A fluid loss in this system could
A transmission fluid leak is the indicate a problem. Have the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak Fluid system inspected and repaired.
occurs, take the vehicle to your It is not necessary to check the
dealer and have it repaired as soon When to Check and What
manual transmission fluid level.
as possible. A transmission fluid leak is the only
to Use
The vehicle is not equipped with a reason for fluid loss. If a leak
transmission fluid level dipstick. occurs, take the vehicle to your
There is a special procedure for dealer and have it repaired as soon
checking and changing the as possible. See Recommended
transmission fluid. Because this Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12
procedure is difficult, this should be for the proper fluid to use.
done at the dealer. Contact the The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
dealer for additional information or reservoir cap has this symbol on it.
the procedure can be found in the The common hydraulic clutch and
service manual. To purchase a brake master cylinder fluid reservoir
service manual, see Service is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
Publications Ordering Information indicated on the reservoir cap. See
on page 13‑18. Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-18 Vehicle Care
How to Check and Add Fluid If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,

inspect the filter at each engine oil
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
change.
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the How to Inspect the Engine Air
side of the reservoir. The brake/ Cleaner/Filter
hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed. To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
Do not remove the cap to check the and lightly shake the filter to release
fluid level or to top‐off the fluid level. loose dust and dirt. If the filter
Remove the cap only when remains covered with dirt, a new
necessary to add the proper fluid filter is required.
until the level reaches the MIN line.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1) 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the 2. Locate the air filter housing on
engine air cleaner/filter. the front of the driver side of the
engine compartment. See
When to Inspect the Engine Air Engine Compartment Overview
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑6.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals 3.6L V6 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and replace it at the appropriate Housing Shown (6.2L V8 Engines
interval. See Maintenance Schedule Similar)
on page 11‑3 for more information.
Vehicle Care 10-19
3. Loosen the clamp at the duct of Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

the air cleaner/filter housing. { WARNING (ZL1 Only)
4. Unlatch the retaining clips on the Operating the engine with the air
air cleaner/filter housing. See Engine Compartment Overview
cleaner/filter off can cause you or on page 10‑6 for the location of the
5. Lift the cover at the retaining clip others to be burned. The air engine air cleaner/filter.
location high enough to clear the cleaner not only cleans the air; it
retaining clips and pull the cover helps to stop flames if the engine When to Inspect the Engine Air
outward to remove it from the air backfires. Use caution when Cleaner/Filter
cleaner/filter housing hinges. working on the engine and do not Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
6. Pull straight up on the cover; drive with the air cleaner/filter off. scheduled maintenance intervals
while holding the cover, remove and replace it at the appropriate
the air filter. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is interval. See Maintenance Schedule
off, dirt can easily get into the on page 11‑3 for more information.
7. Inspect or replace the air filter.
engine, which could damage it. If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
See Maintenance Replacement
Always have the air cleaner/filter inspect the filter at each engine oil
Parts on page 11‑14.
in place when you are driving. change.
the cover. How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
10-20 Vehicle Care
To inspect or replace the engine air 4. Pull straight up on the cover; Cooling System
cleaner/filter: while holding the cover, remove
the air filter.
(Except ZL1 Engines)
5. Inspect or replace the air filter. When it is safe to lift the hood:
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑14.
the cover.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
A. Air Duct Clamp cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
B. Screws backfires. Use caution when 3.6L V6 Engine
1. Open the hood. See Hood on working on the engine and do not A. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
page 10‑5. drive with the air cleaner/filter off. B. Electric Cooling Fans
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by (Out of View)
loosening the screw on the air Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is C. Radiator Cap (Under Engine
duct clamp. off, dirt can easily get into the Cover)
3. Remove the two screws engine, which could damage it.
securing the cover on the air Always have the air cleaner/filter
cleaner/filter housing. in place when you are driving.
Vehicle Care 10-21
{ WARNING { WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan Heater and radiator hoses, and
under the hood can start up even other engine parts, can be very
when the engine is not running hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
and can cause injury. Keep you can be burned.
hands, clothing, and tools away Do not run the engine if there is a
from any underhood electric fan. leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
If the coolant inside the engine cause an engine fire, and you
coolant recovery bottle is boiling, do could be burned. Get any leak
6.2L V8 Engines (L99 Shown, LS3 not do anything else until it cools fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Similar) down. The vehicle should be parked
on a level surface.
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle If there seems to be no leak, with
The coolant level should be the engine on, check to see if the
B. Electric Cooling Fans (Out
between the MIN and MAX lines. electric engine cooling fans are
of View)
If it is not, the vehicle may have a running. If the engine is
C. Radiator Cap (Out of View) leak at the radiator hoses, heater overheating, the fans should be
hoses, radiator, water pump, running. If it is not, the vehicle
or somewhere else in the cooling needs service. Turn off the engine.
system.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Notice: Using coolant other than Cooling System

DEX-COOL® can cause premature
(ZL1 Engine Only)
{ WARNING
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine When it is safe to lift the hood: An electric engine cooling fan
coolant could require changing under the hood can start up even
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) when the engine is not running
or 24 months, whichever occurs and can cause injury. Keep
first. Any repairs would not be hands, clothing, and tools away
covered by the vehicle warranty. from any underhood electric fan.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the If the coolant inside the engine
vehicle. coolant recovery bottle is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools
down. The vehicle should be parked
on a level surface.
The coolant level should be
6.2L V8 Engine between the MIN and MAX lines.
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle If it is not, the vehicle may have a
leak at the radiator hoses, heater
B. Electric Cooling Fans hoses, radiator, water pump,
(Out of View) or somewhere else in the cooling
C. Radiator Cap system.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Notice: Using coolant other than

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
Heater and radiator hoses, and corrosion. In addition, the engine
other engine parts, can be very coolant could require changing
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
you can be burned. or 24 months, whichever occurs
Do not run the engine if there is a first. Any repairs would not be
leak. If you run the engine, it covered by the vehicle warranty.
could lose all coolant. That could Always use DEX-COOL
cause an engine fire, and you (silicate-free) coolant in the
could be burned. Get any leak vehicle.
fixed before you drive the vehicle. A. Intercooler Fill Cap
Cooling System
B. Intercooler Fill Neck
If there seems to be no leak, with
(Intercooler)
1. Open the hood and remove the
the engine on, check to see if the Intercooler ZL1 Only engine cover. See Engine Cover
electric engine cooling fans are on page 10‑11.
running. If the engine is The 6.2L LSA supercharged
overheating, the fans should be V8 engine has an intercooler 2. Turn the intercooler fill neck (B)
running. If it is not, the vehicle cooling system. to the vertical position.
needs service. Turn off the engine.
10-24 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the intercooler Engine Coolant What to Use

fill cap (A).
The cooling system in the vehicle is
4. Check to see if coolant is visible filled with DEX-COOL® engine { WARNING
near the top of the opening. coolant. This coolant is designed to
Adding only plain water or some
5. If coolant is not visible, see remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
other liquid to the cooling system
dealer for service. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. can be dangerous. Plain water
6. Reverse Steps 1–3 to install and other liquids, can boil before
intercooler fill cap and turn the The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will.
intercooler fill neck. system and how to check and add The coolant warning system is set
coolant when it is low. If there is a for the proper coolant mixture.
The intercooler cooling system has
problem with engine overheating, With plain water or the wrong
a special procedure for draining
see Engine Overheating on mixture, the engine could get too
and adding coolant. Because this
page 10‑30.
procedure is difficult, see the dealer hot but you would not get the
for service if the intercooler is low overheat warning. The engine
on coolant. The procedure can also could catch fire and you or
be found in the service manual. To others could be burned. Use a
purchase a service manual, see 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Service Publications Ordering water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Information on page 13‑18.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If an improper coolant Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture is used, the engine could
The vehicle must be on a level
coolant. If using this mixture, overheat and be badly damaged.
surface when checking the coolant
nothing else needs to be added. The repair cost would not be
level.
This mixture: covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture Check coolant as follows:
. Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside can freeze and crack the engine, 1. Turn the ignition off.
temperature. radiator, heater core, and other
parts. 2. Locate the engine coolant
. Gives boiling protection up to recovery bottle. See Engine
129°C (265°F), engine Never dispose of engine coolant by Compartment Overview on
temperature. putting it in the trash, pouring it on page 10‑6.
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
. Protects against rust and or bodies of water. Have the coolant
corrosion. changed by an authorized service
. Will not damage aluminum parts. center, familiar with legal
requirements regarding used
. Helps keep the proper engine coolant disposal. This will help
temperature. protect the environment and your
health.
3. Turn the coolant dipstick cap
counterclockwise and slowly pull
out the dipstick.
10-26 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the Notice: If an improper coolant

Coolant Recovery Bottle mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
{ WARNING covered by the vehicle warranty.
You can be burned if you spill Too much water in the mixture
coolant on hot engine parts. can freeze and crack the engine,
Coolant contains ethylene glycol radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill Add coolant as follows:
coolant on a hot engine. 1. Turn the engine coolant
recovery bottle dipstick cap
4. There are maximum and counterclockwise and slowly pull
Notice: This vehicle has a
minimum markings on the specific coolant fill procedure. out the dipstick.
dipstick. When the engine is
Failure to follow this procedure 2. Pour the coolant into the engine
cold, the coolant level should be
could cause the engine to coolant recovery bottle.
at or above the MIN mark on the
overheat and be severely
dipstick. After the vehicle has 3. When the level is correct,
damaged.
been driven and the engine is at replace the dipstick and turn the
normal operating temperature, cap clockwise to secure.
the level should be somewhere
between half full and the
maximum mark.
5. If the coolant level is correct,
replace the dipstick and turn the
cap clockwise to secure.
Vehicle Care 10-27
How to Add Coolant to the If no coolant is visible in the engine

Radiator { WARNING coolant recovery bottle, add coolant
as follows:
Steam and scalding liquids from a
{ WARNING hot cooling system can blow out 3.6L V6 Engine Fill Procedure
and burn you badly. They are 1. Locate the radiator cap. See
You can be burned if you spill
under pressure, and if you turn Engine Compartment Overview
coolant on hot engine parts.
the surge tank pressure on page 10‑6.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
cap — even a little — they can
and it will burn if the engine parts 2. Remove the engine cover to
come out at high speed. Never
are hot enough. Do not spill access the radiator cap. See
turn the cap when the cooling
coolant on a hot engine. Engine Cover on page 10‑11.
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
Notice: This vehicle has a cooling system and surge tank
specific coolant fill procedure. pressure cap to cool if you ever
Failure to follow this procedure have to turn the pressure cap.
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged. If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but 3. Cover the radiator cap with a
be sure the cooling system is cool thick cloth and turn it slowly
{ WARNING before this is done. counterclockwise and remove.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
10-28 Vehicle Care
4. If there is no coolant visible or 7. Once the system is full, put the

the level is low, slowly fill the radiator cap back on by turning
system through the radiator cap clockwise.
opening with a 50/50 mixture of 8. With the engine still running,
DEX-COOL and clean drinkable raise the engine to 2500 rpm for
water. 30–40 seconds.
Wait 30 seconds for coolant to 9. Turn the engine off.
settle and continue filling if the
level drops. 10. Repeat Steps 2–7 then turn the
engine off.
Do not spill coolant on the
accessory drive belts. 11. Allow engine to cool for
45 minutes. Top off coolant
If a spill occurs, rinse the belt through the radiator cap 13. Check the coolant level in the
with fresh water. opening and reinstall the engine coolant recovery bottle
5. Start the engine. radiator cap. and fill it until the level is at the
top symbol on the dipstick.
6. With the engine idling, continue 12. Reinstall the engine cover. See
to add coolant through the Engine Cover on page 10‑11.
radiator cap opening until full.
Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
to settle and top off, if the level
drops.
Vehicle Care 10-29
6.2L V8 Engine Fill Procedure Wait 30 seconds for coolant to

1. Locate the radiator cap. See settle and top off if the level
Engine Compartment Overview drops.
on page 10‑6. Do not spill coolant on the
accessory drive belts.
If a spill occurs, rinse the belt
with fresh water.
4. Start the engine.
5. With the engine idling, top off the
coolant through the radiator cap
2. Cover the radiator cap with a opening until full.
thick cloth and turn it slowly 8. Check the coolant level in the
Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
counterclockwise and remove. engine coolant recovery bottle
to settle and top off, if the level
and fill it until the level is at the
3. If there is no coolant visible or drops.
top mark on the dipstick.
the level is low, slowly fill the 6. Once the system is full, put the
system through the radiator cap Notice: If the pressure cap is not
radiator cap back on by turning
opening with a 50/50 mixture of tightly installed, coolant loss and
clockwise.
clean, drinkable water and possible engine damage may
DEX-COOL coolant until full. 7. Turn the engine off. occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating Notice: Engine damage from

WARNING (Continued)
running the engine without
The vehicle has an indicator to warn coolant is not covered by the
of engine overheating. warranty. If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
There is an engine coolant Notice: If the engine catches fire in it can catch fire. You or others
temperature warning light on your because of being driven with no
vehicle's instrument panel. See could be badly burned. Stop the
coolant, the vehicle can be badly engine if it overheats, and get out
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge damaged. The costly repairs
on page 5‑13. of the vehicle until the engine
would not be covered by the
is cool.
You may decide not to lift the hood vehicle warranty.
when this warning appears, but
If Steam Is Coming from the If No Steam Is Coming from
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program { WARNING If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. or heard, the problem may not be
Steam from an overheated engine
If you do decide to lift the hood, can burn you badly, even if you too serious. Sometimes the engine
make sure the vehicle is parked on just open the hood. Stay away can get a little too hot when the
a level surface. from the engine if you see or hear vehicle:
Then check to see if the engine steam coming from it. Just turn it . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
cooling fans are running. If the off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving.
engine is overheating, both fans the vehicle until it cools down.
should be running. If they are not, Wait until there is no sign of
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
do not continue to run the engine steam or coolant before you open . Tows a trailer.
and have the vehicle serviced. the hood.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-31
If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the When to Check Power Steering
with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while Fluid
1. Turn the air off. parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it It is not necessary to regularly
2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. check power steering fluid unless
temperature and to the highest you suspect there is a leak in the
fan speed. Open the windows as system or an unusual noise is
Power Steering Fluid heard. A fluid loss in this system
necessary.
(Except ZL1) could indicate a problem. Have the
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine system inspected and repaired.
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the How to Check Power Steering
road, shift to P (Park) or Fluid
N (Neutral) and let the
Notice: Extremely small amounts
engine idle.
of contamination can cause
If the temperature overheat gauge is steering system damage and
no longer in the overheat zone or an The power steering fluid reservoir is cause it to not work properly. Do
overheat warning no longer located under the engine cover on not allow contaminants to contact
displays, the vehicle can be driven. the driver side toward the front of the fluid side of the reservoir cap/
Continue to drive the vehicle slow the engine compartment. See dipstick or to enter the reservoir.
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe Engine Compartment Overview on Check the level after the vehicle has
vehicle distance from the car in front page 10‑6. been driven for at least 20 minutes
of you. If the warning does not come
so the fluid is warm.
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
10-32 Vehicle Care
To check the power steering fluid: Washer Fluid

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/
OFF and let the engine
What to Use
compartment cool down. When windshield washer fluid is
needed, be sure to read the
2. Remove the engine cover. See
Engine Cover on page 10‑11. manufacturer's instructions before
When the engine is hot, the level use. If operating the vehicle in an
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the should be at the hot MAX level. area where the temperature can fall
reservoir clean. When the engine is cold, the below freezing, use a fluid that has
fluid level should be between sufficient protection against
4. Turn the cap counterclockwise MIN and MAX on the dipstick.
and pull it straight up. freezing.
5. Wipe the dipstick with a What to Use Adding Washer Fluid
clean rag. To determine what kind of fluid to
6. Replace the cap and completely use, see Recommended Fluids and
tighten it. Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always
use the proper fluid.
7. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick. Power Steering Fluid
(ZL1 Only)
Open the cap with the washer
The vehicle has electric power symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
steering and does not use power the reservoir is full. See Engine
steering fluid. Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Notice Brakes Some driving conditions or climates

. When using concentrated can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly
washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
manufacturer's instructions applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes.
for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
. Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake
Water can cause the solution heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated,
to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and
washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
parts of the washer system. proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
. Fill the washer fluid tank only { WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be
fluid expansion if freezing means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets.
occurs, which could damage not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel
the tank if it is
completely full. warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal
vehicle serviced. does not return to normal height,
. Do not use engine coolant or if there is a rapid increase in
(antifreeze) in the windshield pedal travel. This could be a sign
washer. It can damage the Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be
windshield washer system worn-out brake pads could result required.
and paint. in costly brake repair.
10-34 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid hydraulic system can also cause
Every time the brakes are applied, a low fluid level. Have the brake/
with or without the vehicle moving, clutch hydraulic system fixed,
the brakes adjust for wear. since a leak means that sooner
Replacing Brake System Parts or later the brakes and/or clutch
will not work well.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
of top quality and work well together Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
The brake/clutch master cylinder
if the vehicle is to have really good If fluid is added when the linings are
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
braking. The vehicle was designed worn, there will be too much fluid
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
and tested with top-quality brake when new brake linings are
cap. See Engine Compartment
parts. When parts of the braking installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
system are replaced, be sure to get as necessary, only when work is
location of the reservoir.
new, approved replacement parts. done on the brake/clutch hydraulic
There are only two reasons why the system.
If this is not done, the brakes might
fluid level in the reservoir might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
go down: { WARNING
wrong for the vehicle, can change . The fluid level goes down
the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining If too much brake fluid is added, it
rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are can spill on the engine and burn,
braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes if the engine is hot enough. You
change in many other ways if the back up. or others could be burned, and
wrong replacement brake parts are the vehicle could be damaged.
installed. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.
Vehicle Care 10-35
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a Notice Battery

low level, the brake warning light . Using the wrong fluid can
comes on. See Brake System Refer to the replacement number
badly damage brake/clutch shown on the original battery label
Warning Light on page 5‑21. hydraulic system parts. For when a new battery is needed. See
What to Add example, just a few drops of Engine Compartment Overview on
mineral-based oil, such as page 10‑6 for battery location.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic { WARNING
Lubricants on page 11‑12. system parts so badly that Battery posts, terminals, and
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid they will have to be replaced.
related accessories contain lead
reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
and lead compounds, chemicals
the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
. If brake fluid is spilled on the cause cancer and reproductive
reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces, harm. Wash hands after handling.
the paint finish can be
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the immediately.
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake/clutch fluid.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Rear Axle 2. Firmly apply both the parking

brake and the regular brake.
{ WARNING When to Check Lubricant See Parking Brake on
It is not necessary to regularly page 9‑40.
Batteries have acid that can burn check the rear axle fluid, unless Do not use the accelerator
you and gas that can explode. there a leak is suspected or an pedal, and be ready to turn off
You can be badly hurt if you are unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss the engine immediately if it
not careful. See Jump Starting on could indicate a problem. Have it starts.
page 10‑93 for tips on working inspected and repaired by your 3. For automatic transmission
around a battery without dealer. vehicles, try to start the engine
getting hurt. in each gear. The vehicle should
Starter Switch Check start only in P (Park) or
Infrequent Usage: Remove the N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
black, negative (−) cable from the { WARNING in any other position, contact
battery to keep the battery from your dealer for service.
running down. When you are doing this
For manual transmission
inspection, the vehicle could
Extended Storage: Remove the vehicles, put the shift lever in
move suddenly. If the vehicle
black, negative (−) cable from the Neutral, push the clutch pedal
moves, you or others could be down halfway, and try to start
battery or use a battery trickle
injured. the engine. The vehicle should
charger.
start only when the clutch pedal
1. Before starting this check, be is pushed down all the way to
sure there is enough room the floor. If the vehicle starts
around the vehicle. when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
LOCK/OFF only when the shift vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake, set
See Parking Brake on . The ignition key should come the parking brake.
page 9‑40.
out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's
Be ready to apply the regular
Contact your dealer if service is holding ability: With the engine
brake immediately if the vehicle
required. running and the transmission in
begins to move.
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
10-38 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park) To replace the windshield wiper 4. Remove the wiper blade.
mechanism's holding ability: blade:
With the engine running, shift to Allowing the wiper blade arm to
P (Park). Then release the 1. Pull the windshield wiper touch the windshield when no
parking brake followed by the assembly away from the wiper blade is installed could
regular brake. windshield. damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
Contact your dealer if service is be covered by the vehicle
required. warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the
Wiper Blade Replacement windshield.
Windshield wiper blades should be 5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
inspected for wear and cracking. blade replacement.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 for more information. Windshield Replacement
Replacement blades come in If the vehicle is equipped with the
different types and are removed in Head‐Up display (HUD) system and
different ways. For proper type and the windshield needs to be
length, see Maintenance replaced, get one that is designed
Replacement Parts on page 11‑14. 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle for HUD or the HUD image may
of the wiper blade where the look out of focus.
wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
Vehicle Care 10-39

. The vehicle should not have any
Headlamp Aiming snow, ice, or mud on it.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
The headlamp aiming system has . The vehicle should be fully page 10‑5 for more information.
been preset at the factory. assembled and all other work
If the vehicle is damaged in an stopped while headlamp aiming
accident, the aim of the headlamps is being performed.
may be affected and adjustment . The vehicle should be normally
may be necessary. loaded with a full tank of fuel and
It is recommended that a dealer one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim the sitting on the driver seat.
headlamps yourself, use the . Tires should be properly inflated.
following procedure.
Headlamp aiming is done with the
The vehicle should be properly vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The
prepared as follows: high-beam headlamps will be
. The vehicle should be placed so correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly. Halogen Headlamp
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)
from a light colored wall.
. The vehicle must have all four
tires on a level surface which is
level all the way to the wall.
. The vehicle should be placed so
it is perpendicular to the wall or
other flat surface.
10-40 Vehicle Care
6. Turn on the low-beam

headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
4. At the wall measure from the

ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
HID Headlamp Step 3 and mark it.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
the low-beam headlamp. on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
3. Measure the distance from the in Step 4.
ground to the aim dot on the
low-beam headlamp. Record the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
distance. to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up Halogen Headlamp
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑46.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
9. Make sure that the light from the Halogen Bulbs

headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
HID Headlamp tape line. The lamp on the { WARNING
left (A) shows the correct
7. Locate the vertical headlamp Halogen bulbs have pressurized
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
aiming screws, which are under right (B) shows the incorrect gas inside and can burst if you
the hood near each headlamp headlamp aim. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
assembly. others could be injured. Be sure
10. Repeat Steps 6–9 for the to read and follow the instructions
The adjustment screw can be opposite headlamp.
turned with a 6 mm hex key. on the bulb package.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
10-42 Vehicle Care
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps, Front Turn To replace one of these bulbs:
(HID) Lighting Signal and Parking 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
Lamps (Base Vehicle) page 10‑5.
{ WARNING The base model vehicle has a
The low beam high intensity halogen headlamp and a turn
discharge lighting system signal/parking lamp on the
operates at a very high voltage. headlamp assembly.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
After an HID headlamp bulb has

been replaced, the beam might be a
2. Press in on the tabs located on
slightly different shade than it was
the sides of the duct and then
originally. This is normal.
push the duct rearward into the
air cleaner/filter housing.
Vehicle Care 10-43
6. Reconnect the electrical To replace the turn signal bulb:

connector. 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
7. Pull the duct back out of the air page 10‑5.
cleaner/filter housing until the
tabs snap the duct back into
position.
Headlamps, Front Turn

Signal and Parking
Lamps (Uplevel Vehicle)
The uplevel model vehicle has an
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp HID headlamp and a turn signal
B. Halogen Headlamp lamp on the headlamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness The parking lamp is also the
function of the HID headlamp. See
and turn the bulb socket
High Intensity Discharge (HID) 2. Press in on the tabs located on
counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly. Lighting on page 10‑42. the sides of the duct and then
push the duct rearward into the
4. Pull the bulb straight out from
air cleaner/filter housing.
the socket.
5. Push the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
10-44 Vehicle Care
5. Push the new bulb into the To replace one of these bulbs:
socket and reinstall the socket
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
7. Pull the duct back out of the air
cleaner/filter housing until the
tabs snap the duct back into
position.
Daytime Running
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
and turn the bulb socket Lamps (DRL)
counterclockwise to remove it 1. Locate the bulb assembly under
The uplevel model vehicle may
from the headlamp assembly. the front fascia.
have daytime running lamps which
4. Pull the bulb straight out from would be located on the fascia. 2. Disconnect the electrical
the socket. connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the bulb
assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-45
3. Push in the new bulb assembly To replace one of these bulbs: Taillamps, Turn Signal,
to lock it into place.
and Stoplamps
connector to the bulb assembly. To replace a taillamp, turn signal,
or stoplamp bulb:
The base model vehicle daytime
running lamps are the low beam on 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
the halogen headlamp. If one these page 2‑9.
lamps fails, see Headlamps, Front
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑43 or
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on
page 10‑42 for replacement
information.
Base Model Shown, Uplevel and
ZL1 Similar
Fog Lamps
1. Locate the bulb assembly under
This vehicle may have fog lamps the front fascia.
which would be located in the front
fascia. 2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the bulb 2. Remove the close out panel
assembly. retainers to gain access to the
bulb socket connectors.
3. Push in the new bulb assembly
to lock it into place. 3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it.
connector to the bulb assembly. 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
10-46 Vehicle Care
5. Push the new bulb straight into 3. Turn the bulb socket Replacement Bulbs
the bulb socket until it clicks. counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the lamp Bulb
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise Exterior Lamp
socket. Number
to reinstall.
4. Install the new bulb. Daytime Running
License Plate Lamp Lamp (Uplevel PSX26W
5. Push the bulb straight into the vehicles)
To replace one of these bulbs: socket and turn clockwise to
reinstall. Fog Lamp
PSX26W
(Except ZL1)
6. Reinstall the license plate lamp
by lifting it through the fascia Fog Lamp (ZL1) H11
opening until the clip is in place. Front Park and Turn
3457NAK
Signal Lamp
Halogen Headlamp H13
License Plate Lamp W5W
Rear Turn Signal
3157K
and Taillamps
For replacement bulbs not listed

1. Unclip the license plate lamp here, contact your dealer.
from the fascia opening.
2. Pull the license plate lamp down
through the fascia opening.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit combination of fuses and circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an breakers. This greatly reduces the
remain off.
electrical system overload. chance of damage caused by
Windshield Wipers electrical problems.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to To check a fuse, look at the
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield silver-colored band inside the fuse.
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools If the band is broken or melted,
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
greatly reduces the chance of circuit a bad fuse with a new one of the
Although the circuit is protected identical size and rating.
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may Fuses of the same amperage can
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. be temporarily borrowed from
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow another fuse location, if a fuse goes
from the windshield before using the out. Replace the fuse as soon as
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers. possible.
of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an To identify and check fuses, circuit
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or breakers, and relays, see Engine
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed. Compartment Fuse Block on
same amperage fuse can be page 10‑48, Instrument Panel Fuse
borrowed. Choose some feature of Block on page 10‑50, and Rear
the vehicle that is not needed to use Compartment Fuse Block on
and replace it as soon as possible. page 10‑52.
10-48 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the hinged fuse block

cover, press the clip at the front of
the cover, and swing it up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-49
J-Case Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Fuses
Engine Control Transmission
5
6 Wiper Module Main 19 Control Module/
Ignition
12 Starter Pre-Catalytic
7 Converter Oxygen Engine Control
Brake 20
22 Sensor Module/Ignition
Vacuum Pump
Post-Catalytic Outside Rearview
Power 31
25 8 Converter Oxygen Mirror
Windows Rear
Sensor
Canister Vent
Power Windows 32
26 Fuel Solenoid
Front 9
Injectors – Even
Body Control
27 Rear Defog 33
10 Fuel Injectors – Odd Module 6
41 Cooling Fan High
11 Cooling Fan Relay 34 Sunroof
Antilock Brake
43 Manifold Air Flow/ 35 Front Heated Seats
System Pump 14
Chassis Control
38 Washer Pump Front
44 Cooling Fan Low
15 Ignition
Antilock Brake
40
Mini Fuses Usage 16 Run/Crank IP System Valves
Air Conditioning Sensing Diagnostic HID

1 17
Compressor Clutch Module/Ignition 46 Headlamp – Left
Front
Transmission 18 Run/Crank Body
2 HID
Control Module
47 Headlamp – Right
3 Intercooler Pump Front
10-50 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

50 Fog Lamps
Relays Block
K61 Starter
51 Horn
K69 Wiper Control
52 Spare
K613 Cooling Fan Low
High-Beam
55 Headlamp – Right Air Conditioning
K617
Front Compressor Clutch
High-Beam K619 Wiper Speed
56 Headlamp – Left
High Intensity
Front
K627 Discharge
61 Heated Mirror Headlamps
Brake
Mini Relays Usage K632
Vacuum Pump The instrument panel fuse block is
K26 Powertrain K641 Intercooler Pump located on the end of the instrument
K50 Run/Crank panel, on the driver side of the
vehicle. To access the fuses, open
K55 Rear Defog the fuse panel door by pulling out.
K612 Cooling Fan High To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
K614 Cooling Fan Control
Vehicle Care 10-51
Fuses Usage
Body Control
F6
Module 2
F8 Battery
F9 Spare
F10 Spare
F11 Spare
F12 Spare
F13 Display
OnStar® Universal
F14 Hands‐Free Phone
(If Equipped)
Body Control
F15
Module 3
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and Body Control
F16
features shown. F3 Airbag Module 4
Fuses Usage F4 Cluster F17 Power Outlet 1
Discrete Logic Heating Ventilation F18 Power Outlet 2
F1
Ignition Switch F5 Air Conditioning Steering Wheel
Controller F19
Diagnostic Link Controls Backlight
F2
Connector F20 Spare
10-52 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Rear Compartment Fuse

F21 Spare Body Control Block
F29
Module 5
F22 Spare
Body Control
F23 Trunk F30
Module 7
Automatic Occupant
F24
Sensing Circuit Usage
Body Control Breakers
F25
Module 1 CB7 Passenger Seat
Body Control CB26 Driver Seat
F27
Module 8
Front Heater, Relays Usage
F28 Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning Retained Accessory
K10 The rear compartment fuse block is
Power
located on the right side of the trunk
K609 Trunk behind a cover. Remove the
SPARE SPARE convenience net retainers, the rear
sill plate, and the passenger side
trim retainers, then swing the trim
out of the way.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Fuses Usage
F7 Real Time Damping
Active Exhaust
F8
Flapper
F9 Spare 4
Engine Control
F10
Module/Battery
Regulated Voltage
F11
Control
Fuel System Control
F12
Module
Relays Usage
R1 Spare
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage Active Exhaust
with all of the fuses, relays, and R2
Flapper
features shown. F2 Amplifier
Fuses Usage F3 Radio
Universal Garage F4 Convertible Top 1
Door Opener/Ultra– F5 Convertible Top 2
F1
sonic Rear Parking
Assist F6 Spare 1
10-54 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. See Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 56 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact— such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure.
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14. (Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-55
All-Season Tires Winter Tires If using snow tires:

This vehicle may come with Consider installing winter tires on
. Use tires of the same brand and
all-season tires. These tires are the vehicle if frequent driving on tread type on all four wheel
designed to provide good overall snow or ice covered roads is positions.
performance on most road surfaces expected. All season tires provide . Use only radial ply tires of the
and weather conditions. Original good overall performance on most same size, load range, and
equipment tires designed to GM's surfaces, but they may not offer the speed rating as the original
specific tire performance criteria traction or the same level of equipment tires.
have a TPC specification code performance as winter tires on snow
Winter tires with the same speed
molded onto the sidewall. Original or ice covered roads.
rating as the original equipment tires
equipment all-season tires can be Winter tires, in general, are
identified by the last two characters may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
designed for increased traction on and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
of this TPC code, which will snow and ice covered roads. With tires with a lower speed rating are
be “MS.” winter tires, there may be decreased chosen, never exceed the tire's
Consider installing winter tires on dry road traction, increased road maximum speed capability.
the vehicle if frequent driving on noise, and shorter tread life. After
snow or ice covered roads is changing to winter tires, be alert for
expected. All-season tires provide changes in vehicle handling and
adequate performance for most braking.
winter driving conditions, but they See your dealer for details
may not offer the same level of regarding winter tire availability and
traction or performance as winter proper tire selection. Also, see
tires on snow or ice covered roads. Buying New Tires on page 10‑71.
See Winter Tires on page 10‑55.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Summer Tires criteria have a TPC specification

code molded onto the sidewall.
This vehicle may come with high
performance summer tires. These
GM's TPC specifications meet or
tires have a special tread and exceed all federal safety
compound that are optimized for guidelines.
maximum dry and wet road (C) DOT (Department of
performance. This special tread Transportation): The
and compound will decrease
Department of Transportation
performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend (DOT) code indicates that the
installing winter tires on the vehicle tire is in compliance with the
if frequent driving in cold U.S. Department of
temperatures or on snow or ice Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example Transportation Motor Vehicle
covered roads is expected. See (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Safety Standards.
Winter Tires on page 10‑55. combination of letters and DOT Tire Date of
numbers used to define a Manufacture: The last four
Tire Sidewall Labeling particular tire's width, height, digits of the TIN indicate the tire
Useful information about a tire is aspect ratio, construction type, manufactured date. The first
molded into its sidewall. The and service description. See the two digits represent the week
examples show a typical “Tire Size” illustration later in this (01–52) and the last two digits,
passenger vehicle tire and a section for more detail. the year. For example, the third
compact spare tire sidewall. (B) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
Specification): Original of 0310.
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Vehicle Care 10-57
(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
following the DOT (Department can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
of Transportation) code are maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
the Tire Identification Number support that load. Tire on page 10‑92 and If a Tire
(TIN). The TIN shows the Goes Flat on page 10‑77.
manufacturer and plant code, (C) Tire Identification Number
tire size, and date the tire was (TIN): The letters and numbers
manufactured. The TIN is following the DOT (Department
molded onto both sides of the of Transportation) code are
tire, although only one side may the Tire Identification Number
have the date of manufacture. (TIN). The TIN shows the
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type manufacturer and plant code,
of cord and number of plies in tire size, and date the tire was
the sidewall and under the tread. manufactured. The TIN is
(F) Uniform Tire Quality molded onto both sides of the
Grading (UTQG): Tire Compact Spare Tire Example tire, although only one side may
manufacturers are required to have the date of manufacture.
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
grade tires based on three of cord and number of plies in (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
performance factors: treadwear, the sidewall and under the tread. Load Limit: Maximum load that
traction, and temperature can be carried and the
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
resistance. For more information maximum pressure needed to
compact spare tire or temporary
see Uniform Tire Quality support that load.
use tire should not be driven at
Grading on page 10‑73.
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
The compact spare tire is for
10-58 Vehicle Care
(E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
temporary use tire or compact number that indicates the tire
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements.
420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
information on tire pressure and typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
inflation see Tire Pressure on tire size. item C of the illustration, it would
page 10‑62. mean that the tire's sidewall is
(F) Tire Size: A combination of 60 percent as high as it is wide.
letters and numbers define a (D) Construction Code: A
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, letter code is used to indicate
construction type, and service the type of ply construction in
description. The letter T as the the tire. The letter R means
first character in the tire size (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
means the tire is for temporary The United States version of a letter D means diagonal or bias
use only. metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B
(G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction.
Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association.
criteria have a TPC specification (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
code molded onto the sidewall. number indicates the tire section
GM's TPC specifications meet or width in millimeters from
exceed all federal safety sidewall to sidewall.
guidelines.
Vehicle Care 10-59
(F) Service Description: These Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
characters represent the load of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
index and speed rating of the Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
tire. The load index represents cords that is located between maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
the load carrying capacity a tire the plies and the tread. Cords and coolant, but without
is certified to carry. The speed may be made from steel or other passengers and cargo.
rating is the maximum speed a reinforcing materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
tire is certified to carry a load. into the sidewall of a tire
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in
Tire Terminology and compliance with the U.S.
Definitions cords that hold the tire onto
the rim. Department of Transportation
Air Pressure: The amount of (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
air inside the tire pressing Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
outward on each square inch of in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
the tire. Air pressure is alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
or psi (pounds per square inch). the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and
Accessory Weight: The date of production.
combined weight of optional amount of air pressure in a tire,
accessories. Some examples of measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
optional accessories are or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑14.
steering, power brakes, power from driving. See Tire Pressure
windows, power seats, and air on page 10‑62.
conditioning.
10-60 Vehicle Care
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces
page 9‑14. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears
page 9‑14. maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
Intended Outboard Sidewall : higher or deeper than the same
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire.
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric tire used on passenger cars and
unit for air pressure. production options weight.
some light duty trucks and
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles.
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
some multipurpose passenger Pressure: Vehicle
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14. manufacturer's recommended
Load Index: An assigned tire inflation pressure as shown
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10‑62 and
carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear number of designated seating
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread positions multiplied by
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires Limits on page 9‑14.
and upon which the tire beads on page 10‑70. Vehicle Maximum Load on the
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): due to curb weight, accessory
between the tread and the bead. A tire information system weight, occupant weight, and
that provides consumers with cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction,
alphanumeric code assigned Vehicle Placard: A label
temperature, and treadwear. permanently attached to a
to a tire indicating the maximum Ratings are determined
speed at which a tire can vehicle showing the vehicle
by tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the original
operate. government testing procedures. equipment tire size and
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the recommended inflation pressure.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform See “Tire and Loading
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Information Label” under Vehicle
page 10‑73. Load Limits on page 9‑14.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure
. Rough ride. When to Check
Tires need the correct amount of
. Needless damage from Check the tires once a month or
air pressure to operate road hazards. more. Do not forget the compact
effectively. The Tire and Loading spare tire, if the vehicle has one.
Information label on the vehicle The cold compact spare should
Notice: Neither tire be at 420 kPa (60 psi). See
underinflation nor indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire Compact Spare Tire on
overinflation is good. page 10‑92.
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The
that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the How to Check
can result in: minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum Use a good quality pocket-type
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. gauge to check tire pressure.
overheating which could Proper tire inflation cannot be
lead to a blowout. For additional information determined by looking at the tire.
regarding how much weight the Check the tire inflation pressure
. Premature or vehicle can carry, and an when the tires are cold, meaning
irregular wear. example of the Tire and Loading the vehicle has not been driven
. Poor handling. Information label, see Vehicle for at least three hours or no
Load Limits on page 9‑14. How more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
. Reduced fuel economy. the vehicle is loaded affects
Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle handling and ride
have too much air, can comfort. Never load the vehicle
result in: with more weight than it was
. Unusual wear. designed to carry.
. Poor handling.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure for Vehicles with 245/45ZR20 103Y,
tire valve stem. Press the tire P245/50ZR19 104W, 275/
High-Speed Operation 40ZR20 106Y, 285/35ZR20 (100Y),
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. and 305/35ZR20 (104Y) size tires,
If the cold tire inflation pressure
{ WARNING have tires capable of high
speed use.
matches the recommended Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
pressure on the Tire and (100 mph) or higher, puts an Make sure vehicles with 245/
Loading Information label, no additional strain on tires. 45ZR20 103Y, P245/50ZR19 104W
further adjustment is necessary. and 275/40ZR20 106Y size tires are
Sustained high-speed driving
inflated to the recommended cold
If the inflation pressure is low, causes excessive heat buildup
inflation pressures before operating
add air until the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
the vehicle at speeds over 160 km/h
pressure is reached. If the You could have a crash and you (100 mph). See Vehicle Load Limits
inflation pressure is high, press or others could be killed. Some on page 9‑14 and Tire Pressure on
on the metal stem in the center high-speed rated tires require page 10‑62.
of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed operation. When Make sure vehicles with 285/
Recheck the tire pressure with speed limits and road conditions 35ZR20 (100Y), and 305/35ZR20
the tire gauge. (104Y) size tires are inflated to
are such that a vehicle can be
300 kPa (44 psi) before operating
Return the valve caps on the driven at high speeds, make sure
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h
valve stems to prevent leaks the tires are rated for high-speed (100 mph) or higher.
and keep out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire Return the tires to the
inflation pressure for the recommended cold tire inflation
vehicle load. pressure when high-speed driving
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑14 and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑62.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction
System tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly.
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
technology to check tire pressure of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
the air pressure in your tires and Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
transmit tire pressure readings to a pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
receiver located in the vehicle. should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
Each tire, including the spare
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
(if provided), should be checked
significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
by the vehicle manufacturer on the lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be
vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
indicated on the vehicle placard or ability. of reasons, including the installation
tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
should determine the proper tire not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
inflation pressure for those tires.) maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Always check the TPMS malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor

telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Operation
ensure that the replacement or This vehicle may have a Tire
alternate tires and wheels allow the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
TPMS to continue to function The TPMS is designed to warn the
properly. driver when a low tire pressure When a low tire pressure condition
See Tire Pressure Monitor condition exists. TPMS sensors are is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Operation on page 10‑65 for mounted onto each tire and wheel the low tire pressure warning light
additional information. assembly, excluding the spare tire located on the instrument cluster.
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle If the warning light comes on, stop
Federal Communications has one. The TPMS sensors as soon as possible and inflate the
Commission (FCC) Rules and monitor the air pressure in the tires tires to the recommended pressure
with Industry Canada and transmit the tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Standards readings to a receiver located in the Information label. See Vehicle Load
vehicle. Limits on page 9‑14.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑22 for information A message to check the pressure in
regarding Part 15 of the Federal a specific tire displays in the DIC.
Communications Commission (FCC) The low tire pressure warning light
Rules and with Industry Canada and the DIC warning message come
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays, see Tire Messages on
page 5‑43.
10-66 Vehicle Care
The low tire pressure warning light Notice: Tire sealant materials are TPMS Malfunction Light and
may come on in cool weather when not all the same. A non-approved Message
the vehicle is first started, and then tire sealant could damage the
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor The TPMS will not function properly
could be an early indicator that the damage caused by using an if one or more of the TPMS sensors
air pressure is getting low and incorrect tire sealant is not are missing or inoperable. When the
needs to be inflated to the proper covered by the vehicle warranty. system detects a malfunction, the
pressure. Always use only the low tire pressure warning light
GM-approved tire sealant flashes for about one minute and
The Tire and Loading Information then stays on for the remainder of
label shows the size of the original available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle. the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
equipment tires and the correct message also displays. The
inflation pressure for the tires when Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits malfunction light and DIC warning
they are cold. See Vehicle Load use a GM-approved liquid tire message come on at each ignition
Limits on page 9‑14, for an example sealant. Using non-approved tire cycle until the problem is corrected.
of the Tire and Loading Information sealants could damage the TPMS Some of the conditions that can
label and its location. Also see Tire sensors. See Tire Sealant and cause these to come on are:
Pressure on page 10‑62. Compressor Kit on page 10‑78 for
information regarding the inflator kit
. One of the road tires has been
The TPMS can warn about a low replaced with the spare tire,
tire pressure condition but it does materials and instructions.
if the vehicle has one. The spare
not replace normal tire tire does not have a TPMS
maintenance. See Tire Inspection sensor. The malfunction light
on page 10‑68, Tire Rotation on and the DIC message should go
page 10‑68 and Tires on off after the road tire is replaced
page 10‑54. and the sensor matching
process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-67

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool.
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See There are two minutes to match
low tire condition. See your dealer the first tire/wheel position, and
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. five minutes overall to match all
light and DIC message come on four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on. longer, the matching process stops
missing or damaged. The and must be restarted.
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
message should go off when the Process The TPMS matching process is:
TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique 1. Set the parking brake.
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new the engine off.
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or 3. Go to the TPM vehicle
. Replacement tires or wheels do
more of the TPMS sensors. Also, information screen on the DIC.
not match the original equipment
the TPMS sensor matching process See Driver Information Center
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should be performed after replacing (DIC) on page 5‑26. Press set to
other than those recommended
a spare tire with a road tire relearn the sensors. The horn
could prevent the TPMS from
containing the TPMS sensor. The sounds twice to signal the
functioning properly. See Buying
malfunction light and the DIC receiver is in relearn mode and
New Tires on page 10‑71.
message should go off at the next TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
ignition cycle. The sensors are message displays on the DIC
matched to the tire/wheel positions, screen.
10-68 Vehicle Care
4. Start with the driver side 10. Set all four tires to the . The tread or sidewall is
front tire. recommended air pressure cracked, cut, or snagged
5. Place the relearn tool against level as indicated on the Tire deep enough to show cord or
the tire sidewall, near the valve and Loading Information label. fabric.
stem. Then press the button to The tires air pressure will not . The tire has a bump, bulge,
activate the TPMS sensor. appear on the screen until driving or split.
A horn chirp confirms that the begins.
sensor identification code has . The tire has a puncture, cut,
been matched to this tire and Tire Inspection or other damage that cannot
wheel position. be repaired well because of
We recommend that the tires,
6. Proceed to the passenger side the size or location of the
including the spare tire, if the
front tire, and repeat the damage.
vehicle has one, be inspected
procedure in Step 5.
for signs of wear or damage at Tire Rotation
7. Proceed to the passenger side least once a month.
rear tire, and repeat the If the vehicle has non-directional
procedure in Step 5. Replace the tire if:
tires, they should be rotated
8. Proceed to the driver side rear . The indicators at three or every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. See
tire, and repeat the procedure in more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
Step 5. can be seen. page 11‑3.
9. After hearing the confirming horn . There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a
chirp for the driver side rear tire, showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
the horn sounds two more times rubber. first rotation is the most
to signal the tire learning mode
is no longer active. Turn the important.
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Vehicle Care 10-69
Any time unusual wear is

noticed, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check the wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑70 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑75.
Directional tires should not be
rotated. Each tire and wheel
should be used only in the
position it is in. Directional tires Use this rotation pattern if the Use this rotation pattern when
will have an arrow on the tire vehicle has different size tires rotating tires of the same size
indicating the proper direction of on the front and rear and they installed on all four wheel
rotation or will have “left” or are non-directional. positions.
“right” molded on the sidewall. Different tire sizes should not be If the vehicle has a compact
rotated front to rear. spare tire, do not include it in the
tire rotation.
10-70 Vehicle Care
Adjust the front and rear tires to When It Is Time for New
the recommended inflation { WARNING Tires
pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
parts to which it is fastened, can temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. See make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
Tire Pressure on page 10‑62 after time. The wheel could come affect the wear rate of the tires.
and Vehicle Load Limits on off and cause an accident. When
page 9‑14. changing a wheel, remove any
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor rust or dirt from places where the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Monitor Operation on
towel can be used; however, use
page 10‑65.
a scraper or wire brush later to
Check that all wheel nuts are remove all rust or dirt.
properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities Lightly coat the center of the
and Specifications on wheel hub with wheel bearing
page 12‑2. grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Treadwear indicators are one way to
or rust build-up. Do not get
tell when it is time for new tires.
grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators appear when
mounting surface or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
wheel nuts or bolts. or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑68 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑68 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-71
The rubber in tires ages over time. Parking for an extended period can GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies for the spare tire, cause flat spots on the tires that system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is may result in vibrations while critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple conditions driving. When storing a vehicle for the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading at least a month, remove the tires or
vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure raise the vehicle to reduce the
maintenance affect how fast aging weight from the tires. performance, ride and handling,
takes place. Tires will typically need traction control, and tire
to be replaced due to wear before Buying New Tires pressure monitoring
they may need to be replaced performance. GM's TPC
due to age. Consult the tire GM has developed and matched Spec number is molded onto
manufacturer for more information specific tires for the vehicle. The the tire's sidewall near the tire
on when tires should be replaced. original equipment tires installed size. If the tires have an
were designed to meet General all‐season tread design, the
Vehicle Storage Motors Tire Performance TPC Spec number will be
Tires age when stored normally Criteria Specification (TPC followed by MS for mud and
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park Spec) system rating. When snow. See Tire Sidewall
a vehicle that will be stored for at replacement tires are needed,
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Labeling on page 10‑56 for
GM strongly recommends additional information.
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be free
buying tires with the same TPC
of grease, gasoline, or other Spec rating.
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
10-72 Vehicle Care
GM recommends replacing all If the vehicle tires must be

the tires at the same time. { WARNING replaced with a tire that does not
Uniform tread depth on all Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
tires will help to maintain the brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
performance of the vehicle. loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
Braking and handling resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
performance may be adversely vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
affected if all the tires are not correct size, brand, and type Vehicles that have a tire
replaced at the same time. See of tires on all wheels. pressure monitoring system
Tire Inspection on page 10‑68 could give an inaccurate
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑68 low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
for information on proper tire Spec rated tires are installed.
rotation. { WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitor
Using bias-ply tires on the System on page 10‑64.
{ WARNING vehicle may cause the wheel The Tire and Loading
Tires could explode during rim flanges to develop cracks Information label indicates the
improper service. Attempting after many miles of driving. original equipment tires on the
to mount or dismount a tire A tire and/or wheel could fail vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
could cause injury or death. suddenly and cause a crash. on page 9‑14 for the label
Only your dealer or authorized Use only radial-ply tires with location and more information
tire service center should the wheels on the vehicle. about the Tire and Loading
mount or dismount the tires. Information label.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Different Size Tires and WARNING (Continued)

treadwear, traction, and
Wheels temperature performance. This
developed for the vehicle, and applies only to vehicles sold in
If wheels or tires are installed that the United States. The grades
are a different size than the original have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. are molded on the sidewalls of
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
most passenger car tires. The
ride and handling characteristics, Uniform Tire Quality Grading
See Buying New Tires on
stability, and resistance to rollover page 10‑71 and Accessories and (UTQG) system does not apply
may be affected. If the vehicle has Modifications on page 10‑4. to deep tread, winter tires,
electronic systems such as antilock compact spare tires, tires with
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
control, and electronic stability 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
control, the performance of these Grading
or to some limited-production
systems can also be affected. Quality grades can be found tires.
where applicable on the tire
{ WARNING While the tires available on
sidewall between tread shoulder
General Motors passenger cars
and maximum section width. For
If different sized wheels are used, and light trucks may vary with
example:
there may not be an acceptable respect to these grades, they
level of performance and safety if Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
tires not recommended for those Temperature A safety requirements and
wheels are selected. This additional General Motors Tire
increases the chance of a crash
The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
and serious injury. Only use GM standards.
specific wheel and tire systems United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(Continued)
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
10-74 Vehicle Care
All Passenger Car Tires Must Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
Conform to Federal Safety The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Requirements In Addition To highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
These Grades. and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
The treadwear grade is a to sudden tire failure. The grade
controlled conditions on
comparative rating based on the C corresponds to a level of
specified government test
wear rate of the tire when tested performance which all
surfaces of asphalt and
under controlled conditions on a passenger car tires must meet
concrete. A tire marked C may
specified government test under the Federal Motor Safety
have poor traction performance.
course. For example, a tire Standard No. 109. Grades B and
Warning: The traction grade
graded 150 would wear one and A represent higher levels of
assigned to this tire is based on
a half (1½) times as well on the performance on the laboratory
straight-ahead braking traction
government course as a tire test wheel than the minimum
tests, and does not include
graded 100. The relative required by law. Warning: The
acceleration, cornering,
performance of tires depends temperature grade for this tire is
hydroplaning, or peak traction
upon the actual conditions of established for a tire that is
characteristics.
their use, however, and may properly inflated and not
depart significantly from the Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed,
norm due to variations in driving The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
habits, service practices (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
and differences in road representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
characteristics and climate. to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
Vehicle Care 10-75
Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
Balance Replace any wheel that is bent, System (TPMS) sensors with new
The tires and wheels were aligned cracked, or badly rusted or GM original equipment parts.
and balanced at the factory to corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to wheel nuts should be replaced. { WARNING
wheel alignment and tire balancing If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Using the wrong replacement
will not be necessary on a regular Some aluminum wheels can be wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
basis. However, check the repaired. See your dealer if any of
nuts can be dangerous. It could
alignment if there is unusual tire these conditions exist.
affect the braking and handling of
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to Your dealer will know the kind of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
one side or the other. If the vehicle wheel that is needed. and cause loss of control, causing
vibrates when driving on a smooth a crash. Always use the correct
Each new wheel should have the
road, the tires and wheels might wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
same load-carrying capacity,
need to be rebalanced. See your nuts for replacement.
diameter, width, offset, and be
dealer for proper diagnosis.
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Notice: The wrong wheel can Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
{ WARNING { WARNING
headlamp aim, rear differential, Replacing a wheel with a used Do not use tire chains. There is
bumper height, vehicle ground one is dangerous. How it has not enough clearance. Tire chains
clearance, and tire or tire chain been used or how far it has been used on a vehicle without the
clearance to the body and driven may be unknown. It could
chassis. proper amount of clearance can
fail suddenly and cause a crash. cause damage to the brakes,
See If a Tire Goes Flat on When replacing wheels, use a suspension, or other vehicle
page 10‑77 for more information. new GM original equipment parts. The area damaged by the
wheel. tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash. Use another
type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for
the vehicle's tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive
slowly and readjust or remove the
traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the rear tires.
Vehicle Care 10-77
If a Tire Goes Flat A rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blow out may require the same correction as
while driving, especially if the tires used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting
are maintained properly. See Tires accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or
on page 10‑54. If air goes out of a straighten the vehicle. It may be repairs is dangerous without the
tire, it is much more likely to leak very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and
out slowly. But if there is ever a to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with
blowout, here are a few tips about if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for
what to expect and what to do: changing a flat tire. If it is used for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire { WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off Driving on a flat tire will cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
the accelerator pedal and grip the permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only
steering wheel firmly. Steer to Re-inflating a tire after it has use it for changing a flat tire.
maintain lane position, and then been driven on while severely
gently brake to a stop, well off the underinflated or flat may cause a If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
road, if possible. blowout and a serious crash. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire to a level place, well off the road,
that has been driven on while if possible. Turn on the hazard
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
10-78 Vehicle Care
This vehicle may come with a jack The following information explains
{ WARNING and spare tire or a tire sealant and how to repair or change a tire.
compressor kit. To use the jacking
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
equipment to change a spare tire Tire Sealant and
safely, follow the instructions below.
off the jack and roll over or fall Then see Tire Changing on
Compressor Kit
causing injury or death. Find a page 10‑86. To use the tire sealant
level place to change the tire. To and compressor kit, see Tire { WARNING
help prevent the vehicle from Sealant and Compressor Kit on
moving: page 10‑78. Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
1. Set the parking brake firmly. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), dangerous. Engine exhaust may
2. Put an automatic use the following example as a enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
transmission in P (Park) or a guide to assist you in the placement contains carbon monoxide (CO)
manual transmission in of wheel blocks (A).
which cannot be seen or smelled.
1 (First) or R (Reverse). It can cause unconsciousness
3. Turn off the engine and do and even death. Never run the
not restart while the vehicle engine in an enclosed area that
is raised. has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle. Exhaust on page 9‑29.
5. Place wheel blocks on both

sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire A. Wheel Block
being changed.
B. Flat Tire
Vehicle Care 10-79
Tire sealant may not completely The kit includes:

{ WARNING seal a 305/35ZR20 tire
below –18° C (0° F).
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
others could be injured. Be sure compressor kit, there may not be a
to read and follow the tire sealant spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and compressor kit instructions and on some vehicles there may not
and inflate the tire to its be a place to store a tire.
recommended pressure. Do not The tire sealant and compressor
exceed the recommended can be used to temporarily seal
pressure. punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
{ WARNING If the tire has been separated from
A. On/Off Button
B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Storing the tire sealant and the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
Air Only)
compressor kit or other or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire C. Pressure Relief Button
equipment in the passenger
sealant and compressor kit to be D. Pressure Gauge
compartment of the vehicle could
effective. See Roadside Assistance
cause injury. In a sudden stop or E. Air Only Hose (Black)
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
collision, loose equipment could page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
strike someone. Store the tire F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
sealant and compressor kit in its G. Power Plug
original location. Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Tire Sealant Using the Tire Sealant and If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
Compressor Kit to Temporarily and wheel damage by driving slowly
Read and follow the safe handling
Seal and Inflate a to a level place. Turn on the hazard
instructions on the label adhered to
Punctured Tire warning flashers. See Hazard
the compressor.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
Check the tire sealant expiration Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
date on the sealant canister. The
page 10‑77 for other important
sealant canister should be replaced
safety warnings.
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are Do not remove any objects that
available at your local dealer. See have penetrated the tire.
“Removal and Installation of the 1. Remove the tire sealant and
Sealant Canister” following. compressor kit from its storage
There is only enough sealant to seal location. See Storing the Tire
one tire. After usage, the sealant Sealant and Compressor Kit on
canister and sealant/air hose page 10‑85.
assembly must be replaced. See 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
“Removal and Installation of the and the power plug (G).
Sealant Canister” following.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
When using the tire sealant and Make sure the tire valve stem is
compressor kit during cold positioned close to the ground
temperatures, warm the kit in a so the hose will reach it.
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
Vehicle Care 10-81
4. Remove the valve stem cap from 8. Turn the selector switch (B) The pressure gauge (D) may
the flat tire by turning it clockwise to the Sealant + Air read higher than the actual tire
counterclockwise. position. pressure while the compressor
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) 9. Press the on/off button (A) to is on. Turn the compressor off
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it turn the tire sealant and to get an accurate pressure
clockwise until it is tight. compressor kit on. reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the The compressor will inject correct pressure is reached.
accessory power outlet in the sealant and air into the tire.
vehicle. Unplug all items from Notice: If the recommended
The pressure gauge (D) will pressure cannot be reached after
other accessory power outlets. initially show a high pressure
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. approximately 25 minutes, the
while the compressor pushes the vehicle should not be driven
If the vehicle has an accessory sealant into the tire. Once the farther. The tire is too severely
power outlet, do not use the sealant is completely dispersed damaged and the tire sealant and
cigarette lighter. into the tire, the pressure will compressor kit cannot inflate the
If the vehicle only has a cigarette quickly drop and start to rise tire. Remove the power plug from
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. again as the tire inflates with the accessory power outlet and
air only. unscrew the inflating hose from
Do not pinch the power plug the tire valve. See Roadside
cord in the door or window. 10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation Assistance Program (U.S. and
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle pressure using the pressure Canada) on page 13‑7 or
must be running while using the gauge (D). The recommended Roadside Assistance Program
air compressor. inflation pressure can be found (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
on the Tire and Loading 11. Press the on/off button (A) to
Information label. See Tire turn the tire sealant and
Pressure on page 10‑62. compressor kit off.
10-82 Vehicle Care
The tire is not sealed and will 19. Stop at a safe location and
continue to leak air until the check the tire pressure. Refer
vehicle is driven and the to Steps 1–11 under “Using the
sealant is distributed in the tire; Tire Sealant and Compressor
therefore, Steps 12–18 must be Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
done immediately after Tire (Not Punctured).”
Step 11. 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate If the tire pressure has fallen
Be careful while handling the to the recommended inflation more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
tire sealant and compressor kit pressure, remove the below the recommended
as it could be warm after maximum speed label from the inflation pressure, stop driving
usage. sealant canister and place it in the vehicle. The tire is too
a highly visible location. Do not severely damaged and the tire
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
exceed the speed on this label sealant cannot seal the tire.
the accessory power outlet in
until the damaged tire is See Roadside Assistance
the vehicle.
repaired or replaced. Program (U.S. and Canada) on
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) page 13‑7 or Roadside
17. Return the equipment to its
counterclockwise to remove it Assistance Program (Mexico)
original storage location in the
from the tire valve stem. on page 13‑10.
vehicle.
14. Replace the tire valve If the tire pressure has not
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
stem cap. dropped more than 68 kPa
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
15. Return the sealant/air hose (F) sealant in the tire. (10 psi) from the recommended
and the power plug (G) back in inflation pressure, use the
their original locations. compressor kit to inflate the tire
to the recommended inflation
pressure.
Vehicle Care 10-83
20. Wipe off any sealant from the Using the Tire Sealant and See If a Tire Goes Flat on
wheel, tire, and vehicle. Compressor Kit without page 10‑77 for other important
21. Dispose of the used sealant Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not safety warnings.
canister and sealant/air Punctured) 1. Remove the tire sealant and
hose (F) assembly at a local To use the air compressor to inflate compressor kit from its storage
dealer or in accordance with a tire with air only and not sealant: location. See Storing the Tire
local state codes and practices. Sealant and Compressor Kit on
22. Replace it with a new canister page 10‑85.
available from your dealer. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)
23. After temporarily sealing a tire and the power plug (G).
using the tire sealant and 3. Place the kit on the ground.
compressor kit, take the Make sure the tire valve stem is
vehicle to an authorized dealer positioned close to the ground
within 161 km (100 mi) of so the hose will reach it.
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced. 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire the tire valve stem by turning it
and wheel damage by driving slowly clockwise until it is tight.
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
10-84 Vehicle Care
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the 11. Press the on/off button (A) to
accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation turn the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure compressor kit off.
other accessory power outlets. gauge (D). The recommended Be careful while handling the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. inflation pressure can be found tire sealant and compressor kit
If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading as it could be warm after
power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire usage.
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑62.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (D) may the accessory power outlet in
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire the vehicle.
pressure while the compressor
Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off 13. Disconnect the air only
cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. The hose (E) from the tire valve
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle compressor may be turned on/ stem, by turning it
must be running while using the off until the correct pressure is counterclockwise, and replace
air compressor. reached. If the tire is inflated the tire valve stem cap.
higher than the recommended 14. Return the air only hose (E)
8. Turn the selector switch (B) pressure, press the pressure
counterclockwise to the Air Only and the power plug (G) back to
relief button (C), if equipped, their original locations.
position. until the proper pressure
9. Press the on/off button (A) to reading is reached. This option 15. Return the equipment to its
turn the compressor on. is only functional when using original storage location in the
the air only hose (E). vehicle.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Removal and Installation of the 3. Pull up on the canister (A) to Storing the Tire Sealant
Sealant Canister remove it.
and Compressor Kit
To remove the sealant canister: 4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the
canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
The tire sealant and compressor kit

A. Canister is located in a foam container in the
B. Connector trunk.
1. Remove the plastic cover. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from
the canister (A). 2. Remove the carpet.
3. Turn the center retainer
counterclockwise to remove the
cover.
10-86 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the tire sealant and

compressor kit from the foam
container.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
Spare Tire
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on 3. Turn the center retainer Coin/Pierce Jack with Two-Piece
page 2‑9. counterclockwise to remove the Wrench
2. Remove the carpet. spare tire cover. A. Tool Container
4. Remove the spare tire and place B. Two-Piece Wrench
it next to the tire being changed.
C. Strap
Tools
D. Jack Handle Extension
The jack and tools are stored below
the spare tire. E. Coin/Pierce Jack
Vehicle Care 10-87
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑77 for more
information.
2. If the vehicle has wheel bolt
caps, remove the caps. Store
the caps with the wheel cover.
Hex-Head Jack with Three-Piece A. Tool Container

Wrench B. Jack
A. Tool Container C. End of the Jack
B. Three-Piece Wrench 1. Turn the end of the jack (C)
C. Strap counterclockwise to loosen it.
Remove the jack (B) from the
D. Hex Head Jack retaining bracket.
2. Remove the tool container (A).
3. Remove the tools and tire strap
from the tool container. 3. Use the fully extended
4. Place the tools next to the tire wheel wrench to loosen all the
being changed. wheel nuts one-half turn
counterclockwise. Do not
remove them yet.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Notice: Make sure that the jack

lift head is in the correct position { WARNING { WARNING
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered Getting under a vehicle when it is Raising the vehicle with the jack
by your warranty. lifted on a jack is dangerous. improperly positioned can
If the vehicle slips off the jack, damage the vehicle and even
you could be badly injured or make the vehicle fall. To help
killed. Never get under a vehicle avoid personal injury and vehicle
when it is supported only by damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
a jack. head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{ WARNING 5. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension
Raising the vehicle with the jack to the jack by sliding the hook
improperly positioned can through the end of the jack and
damage the vehicle and even insert the other end of the jack
make the vehicle fall. To help handle into the wrench.
4. Position the jack lift head at the avoid personal injury and vehicle If you have a hex head jack,
jack location nearest the flat tire. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift place the hex tube end of the
The location is indicated by a head into the proper location wrench over the hex head of
mark on the bottom edge of the before raising the vehicle. the jack.
vehicle. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
Raise the jack until it engages
with the jacking point.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench Hex Head Jack and Wrench 7. Remove all of the wheel nuts
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the and place them in a dry, clean
wrench clockwise until the place to avoid getting dirt in the
vehicle is far enough off the threads.
ground to allow enough room for
the compact spare tire to fit
under the vehicle.
Keep the hook parallel to the
ground. The wrench may need
to be removed and repositioned
to continue turning it.
10-90 Vehicle Care
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts with

{ WARNING the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel. Tighten each
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the nut as much as possible using
parts to which it is fastened, can the wheel wrench until the
make wheel nuts become loose wheel is held firmly against
after time. The wheel could come the hub.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any Use your free hand to prevent
the wheel from turning while
rust or dirt from places where the
you are tightening.
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper 11. Lower the vehicle by turning
towel can be used; however, use the wrench counterclockwise.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the Lower the jack completely.
a scraper or wire brush later to
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
remove all rust or dirt. and spare wheel.
9. Place the compact spare tire on
the wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

WARNING (Continued) and Tools
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel { WARNING
nuts. See Capacities and
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
equipment in the passenger
original equipment wheel nut
compartment of the vehicle could
torque specifications.
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
Notice: Improperly tightened strike someone. Store all these in
wheel nuts can lead to brake the proper place.
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in pulsation and rotor damage. To
a crisscross sequence, as avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in To store a flat or spare tire and
shown.
the proper sequence and to the tools:
proper torque specification. See
{ WARNING Capacities and Specifications on
1. Return the jack and tools as they
were originally stored in the
Wheel nuts that are improperly or page 12‑2 for the wheel nut trunk.
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification.
2. Return the spare tire cover as it
the wheels to become loose or was in the trunk.
come off. The wheel nuts should
3. Install the retainer nut and turn it
be tightened with a torque wrench
clockwise until tight.
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque 4. Return the rear trunk carpet.
specification supplied by the 5. Place the flat tire face up on the
(Continued) load floor.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire (50 mph). To conserve the tread of

the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as
{ WARNING convenient and return the spare tire
Driving with more than one to the storage area.
compact spare tire at a time could Notice: When the compact spare
result in loss of braking and is installed, do not take the
handling. This could lead to a vehicle through an automatic car
crash and you or others could be wash with guide rails. The
injured. Use only one compact compact spare can get caught on
spare tire at a time. the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel, and other parts of the
6. Route the strap provided, as vehicle.
shown, to secure the flat tire. If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire, it was fully inflated when new; Do not use the compact spare on
The compact spare tire is for however, it can lose air over time. other vehicles.
temporary use only. Replace the Check the inflation pressure Do not mix the compact spare tire or
compact spare with a full-size tire as regularly. It should be 420 kPa wheel with other wheels or tires.
soon as possible. (60 psi). They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
Stop as soon as possible and check and its wheel together.
that the spare tire is correctly Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
inflated after being installed on the compact spare. Using them can
vehicle. The compact spare tire is damage the vehicle and can
designed for temporary use only. damage the chains too. Do not
The vehicle will perform differently use tire chains on the compact
with the spare tire installed and it is spare.
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
Vehicle Care 10-93
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
The positive jump start connection
is covered by a red cap. Remove to
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be expose the terminal.
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
page 10‑35.
Trying to start the vehicle by have a 12-volt battery with a
If the battery has run down, try to pushing or pulling it will not negative ground system.
use another vehicle and some work, and it could damage the Notice: Only use a vehicle that
jumper cables to start your vehicle. vehicle. has a 12-volt system with a
Be sure to use the following steps to
negative ground for jump
do it safely.
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
{ WARNING negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because: 2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching.
. They contain acid that can
burn you. 3. Set the parking brake firmly.
Vehicles with an automatic
. They contain gas that can transmission should be in
explode or ignite. P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
. They contain enough (Automatic Transmission) on
electricity to burn you. The jump start positive (A) and page 9‑25. Vehicles with a
negative (B) posts are located in the manual transmission should be
If you do not follow these steps in Neutral. See Parking (Manual
exactly, some or all of these engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle. Transmission) on page 9‑28.
things can hurt you.
These posts are used instead of a
direct connection to the battery.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Notice: If any accessories are left

on or plugged in during the jump { WARNING { WARNING
starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine
be covered by the vehicle cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
warranty. Whenever possible, People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving
turn off or unplug all accessories and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running.
on either vehicle when jump Use a flashlight if you need more
starting the vehicle. light.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF Be sure the battery has enough
and switch off all lights and water. You do not need to add
accessories in both vehicles, water to the battery installed in
except the hazard warning your new vehicle. But if a battery
flashers if needed. has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
{ WARNING add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
An electric fan can start up even could be present.
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands, Battery fluid contains acid that
clothing and tools away from any can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in 5. Connect one end of the red
underhood electric fan. positive (+) cable to the jump
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get start positive (+) post (A).
medical help immediately. 6. Connect the other end of the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery (B).
Vehicle Care 10-95
7. Connect one end of the black To disconnect the jumper cables

negative (–) cable to the from both vehicles:
negative (–) terminal of the good 1. Disconnect the black
battery (C). negative (−) cable from the
8. Connect the other end of the vehicle that had the dead
black negative (–) cable to the battery.
negative (–) post (D). 2. Disconnect the black
9. Start the engine in the vehicle negative (−) cable from the
with the good battery and run vehicle with the good battery.
the engine at idle speed for at 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
least four minutes. cable from the vehicle with the
10. Try to start the vehicle that had Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
the dead battery. If it will not 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
start after a few tries, it cable from the other vehicle.
Part or Remote Negative (–)
probably needs service.
Terminal 5. Return the caps over the
Notice: If the jumper cables are positive (+) and negative (–)
B. Good Battery or Remote
connected or removed in the terminals to their original
Positive (+) and Remote
wrong order, electrical shorting positions.
Negative (–) Terminals
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be C. Dead Battery or Remote
covered by the vehicle warranty. Positive (+) Terminal
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
10-96 Vehicle Care
Towing To tow the vehicle behind another

vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
Towing the Vehicle “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
Notice: To avoid damage, the section.
disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the Recreational Vehicle
ground. Care must be taken with Towing
vehicles that have low ground
clearance and/or special Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
equipment. Always flatbed on a towing the vehicle may cause
car carrier. damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put the
Due to low ramp angles on the ZL1, vehicle on a flatbed truck or
use care when loading the vehicle trailer.
onto a flatbed carrier. Front spring
spacers are provided for lifting the The vehicle was neither designed
front suspension. nor intended to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If the
Consult your dealer or a vehicle must be towed, see “Towing
professional towing service if the the Vehicle” earlier in this section.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance Program
Vehicle Care 10-97
Appearance Care Notice: Avoid using high Finish Care

pressure washes closer than
Application of aftermarket clearcoat
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
Exterior Care vehicle. Use of power washers
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces
Washing the Vehicle exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
are damaged, see your dealer to
can result in damage or removal
To preserve the vehicle's finish, have the damage assessed and
of paint and decals.
wash it often and out of direct repaired. Foreign materials such as
sunlight. Rinse the vehicle well, before calcium chloride and other salts, ice
washing and after, to remove all melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
Notice: Do not use petroleum cleaning agents completely. If they sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
based, acidic, or abrasive are allowed to dry on the surface, industrial chimneys, etc., can
cleaning agents as they can they could stain. damage the vehicle's finish if they
damage the vehicle's paint, metal, remain on painted surfaces. Wash
or plastic parts. If damage Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to the vehicle as soon as possible.
occurs, it would not be covered If necessary, use non-abrasive
by the vehicle's warranty. avoid surface scratches and water
spotting. cleaners that are marked safe for
Approved cleaning products can painted surfaces to remove foreign
be obtained from your dealer. matter.
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct Occasional hand waxing or mild
product usage, necessary safety polishing should be done to remove
precautions, and appropriate residue from the paint finish. See
disposal of any vehicle care your dealer for approved cleaning
product. products.
10-98 Vehicle Care
Do not apply waxes or polishes to For aluminum, never use auto or extractor. If a small amount of wax
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, chrome polish, steam, or caustic is applied to the extractor it can
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint soap to clean. A coating of wax, create an irregular appearance in
as damage can occur. rubbed to high polish, is the surface of the panel. If wax,
Notice: Machine compounding or recommended for all bright metal debris, or other materials create
aggressive polishing on a parts. stains on the air extractor, see your
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish dealer for the recommended
Hood Air Extractor cleaner.
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes The air extractor has vent screens
that are made for a basecoat/ in the openings. Keep leaves or
clearcoat paint finish on the other debris out of the vent screens.
vehicle. Notice: Pushing on the vent
To keep the paint finish looking new, screens could damage them. Do
keep the vehicle garaged or not push on the screens when
covered whenever possible. clearing.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal There is a water deflector on the
Parts underside of the air extractor. Do
not remove it.
Regularly clean bright metal parts
with water or chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim,
It is not recommended that the air
if necessary.
extractor on the ZL1 be waxed, as it
will change the gloss level of the
surface. In addition, care must be
used when waxing around the air
Vehicle Care 10-99
Convertible Top care Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Weatherstrips

Frequently hand wash convertible Lenses and Emblems Apply silicone grease on
tops with mild car wash soap. Never Use only lukewarm or cold water, a weatherstrips to make them last
use a stiff brush, steam, bleach, soft cloth, and a car washing soap longer, seal better, and not stick or
or aggressive cleaners. to clean exterior lamps and lenses. squeak. See Recommended Fluids
If necessary, a soft brush can be Follow instructions under "Washing and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
used to remove dirt. When finished the Vehicle" later in this section.
cleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric. Tires
Avoid automatic car washes with Windshield and Wiper Blades Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
overhead brushes or very high Clean the outside of the windshield clean the tires.
pressure sprays as they can cause with glass cleaner. Notice: Using petroleum-based
damage and leaking.
Clean rubber blades using lint-free tire dressing products on the
Only lower the top when it is cloth or paper towel soaked with vehicle may damage the paint
completely dry and avoid leaving windshield washer fluid or a mild finish and/or tires. When applying
the top lowered for extended detergent. Wash the windshield a tire dressing, always wipe off
periods of time to prevent excessive thoroughly when cleaning the any overspray from all painted
interior weathering. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and surfaces on the vehicle.
Avoid leaving large amounts of a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
snow on the top for extended treatments may cause wiper
periods of time as damage may also streaking.
occur. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow and ice.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum automatic car wash that uses Underbody Maintenance
or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning
Use plain water to flush dirt and
brushes. Damage could occur
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild debris from the vehicle's underbody.
and the repairs would not be
soap and water to clean the wheels. Your dealer or an underbody car
covered by the vehicle warranty.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean washing system can do this. If not
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and removed, rust and corrosion can
A wax may then be applied. Chassis Components develop.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Visually inspect front and rear Sheet Metal Damage
chrome trim may be damaged if suspension and steering system for
the vehicle is not washed after If the vehicle is damaged and
damaged, loose, or missing parts or requires sheet metal repair or
driving on roads that have been signs of wear. Inspect the power
sprayed with magnesium, replacement, make sure the body
steering for proper hook-up, binding, repair shop applies anti-corrosion
calcium, or sodium chloride. leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
These chlorides are used on material to parts repaired or
check constant velocity joints, replaced to restore corrosion
roads for conditions such as ice rubber boots, and axle seals for
and dust. Always wash the protection.
leaks.
chrome with soap and water after Original manufacturer replacement
exposure. Body Component Lubrication parts will provide the corrosion
Notice: To avoid surface damage, Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
do not use strong soaps, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and vehicle warranty.
chemicals, abrasive polishes, steel fuel door hinge unless the
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners components are plastic. Applying
that contain acid on aluminum or silicone grease on weatherstrips
chrome-plated wheels. Use only with a clean cloth will make them
approved cleaners. Also, never last longer, seal better, and not stick
drive a vehicle with aluminum or or squeak.
chrome-plated wheels through an
Vehicle Care 10-101
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove To prevent damage, do not clean
dust from knobs and crevices on the the interior using the following
Quickly repair minor chips and
instrument cluster. Using a mild cleaners or techniques:
scratches with touch-up materials
soap solution, immediately remove . Never use a razor or any other
available from your dealer to avoid
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect sharp object to remove a soil
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
repellant from all interior surfaces or from any interior surface.
damage can be corrected in your
permanent damage may result.
dealer's body and paint shop. . Never use a brush with stiff
Your dealer may have products for bristles.
Chemical Paint Spotting cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface
and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent aggressively or with excessive
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. To prevent pressure.
discolorations, and small, irregular overspray, apply all cleaners directly . Do not use laundry detergents or
dark spots etched into the paint to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners dishwashing soaps with
surface. should be removed quickly. Never degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
allow cleaners to remain on the use approximately 20 drops
Interior Care surface being cleaned for extended per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water.
periods of time. A concentrated soap solution will
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, leave a residue that creates
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Immediately remove any soils. Note use solutions that contain strong
that newspapers or dark garments interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions or caustic soap.
that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently on the label. While cleaning the
transfer color to the vehicle's interior, maintain adequate
interior. ventilation by opening the doors
and windows.
10-102 Vehicle Care

. Do not heavily saturate the Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the
upholstery when cleaning. soil and gently rub toward the
Start by vacuuming the surface
. Do not use solvents or cleaners center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
using a soft brush attachment. If a
containing solvents. a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being
prevent forcing the soil in to the
Interior Glass used during vacuuming, only use it
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
dampened with water. Wipe droplets as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
left behind with a clean dry cloth. following techniques: longer any color transfer from
Commercial glass cleaners may be the soil to the cleaning cloth.
used, if necessary, after cleaning
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
the interior glass with plain water. towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
Notice: To prevent scratching, solution followed only by club
never use abrasive cleaners on
. For solid soils, remove as much
soda or plain water.
automotive glass. Abrasive as possible prior to vacuuming.
cleaners or aggressive cleaning If the soil is not completely
To clean:
may damage the rear window removed, it may be necessary to
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
defogger.
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Do not use cleaners that increase Floor Mats
Other Plastic Surfaces gloss, especially on the instrument
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
Use a soft microfiber cloth visibility through the windshield { WARNING
dampened with water to remove under certain conditions.
dust and loose dirt. For a more If a floor mat is the wrong size or
thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may is not properly installed, it can
microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to interfere with the pedals.
mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces. Interference with the pedals can
If an air freshener comes in cause unintended acceleration
Notice: Soaking or saturating contact with any plastic or
leather, especially perforated and/or increased stopping
painted surface in the vehicle, distance which can cause a crash
leather, as well as other interior blot immediately and clean with a
surfaces, may cause permanent and injury. Make sure the floor
soft cloth dampened with a mild mat does not interfere with the
damage. Wipe excess moisture soap solution. Damage caused by
from these surfaces after pedals.
air fresheners would not be
cleaning and allow them to dry covered by the vehicle warranty.
naturally. Never use heat, steam, Use the following guidelines for
spot lifters or spot removers. Do proper floor mat usage.
not use cleaners that contain
silicone or wax-based products.
. The original equipment floor
Cleaners containing these mats were designed for your
solvents can permanently change vehicle. If the floor mats need
the appearance and feel of leather replacing, it is recommended
or soft trim and are not that GM certified floor mats be
recommended. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interefere with the pedals.
Always check that the floor mats
do not interfere with the pedals.
10-104 Vehicle Care

. Use the floor mat with the Both floor mats are held in place by
correct side up. Do not turn two hook-type retainers.
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer openings over the
carpet retainers and hook into
position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information With trained technicians, the dealer

is the place for routine maintenance
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
such as oil changes and tire
rotations and additional
the required maintenance for the maintenance items like tires,
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair blades.
expenses resulting from neglect or
Notice: Damage caused by
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may
improper maintenance can lead to
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of
costly repairs and may not be
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services covered by the vehicle warranty.
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application Maintenance intervals, checks,
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 inspections, recommended fluids,
Your dealer has trained technicians and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance who can perform required keep the vehicle in good working
and Care maintenance using genuine condition.
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have
The Tire Rotation and Required
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up‐to‐date tools and equipment for
Services are the responsibility of the
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, vehicle owner. It is recommended to
dealers have extended evening
Lubricants, and Parts have your dealer perform these
and Saturday hours, courtesy
Recommended Fluids and services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement keep the vehicle in good working
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 condition, improves fuel economy,
Your dealer recognizes the and reduces vehicle emissions.
Maintenance Records importance of providing
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 competitively priced maintenance
and repair services.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Services ‐ Severe are for vehicles { WARNING
There may need to be more that are:
frequent checks and services. Performing maintenance work can
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic be dangerous and can cause
The Additional Required in hot weather.
Services ‐ Normal are for serious injury. Perform
vehicles that: . Mainly driven in hilly or maintenance work only if the
mountainous terrain. required information, proper tools,
. Carry passengers and cargo and equipment are available.
within recommended limits on . Frequently towing a trailer.
If they are not, see your dealer to
the Tire and Loading Information . Used for high speed or have a trained technician do the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits competitive driving.
on page 9‑14. work. See Doing Your Own
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Service Work on page 10‑4.
. Are driven on reasonable road service.
surfaces within legal driving
limits. Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Use the recommended fuel. See Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑56.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every 12 000 km/
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10‑68.
Engine Oil on page 10‑13. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed,
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10‑13 and Engine
page 10‑62.
If the engine oil life system is reset Oil Life System on page 10‑16.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See accidentally, service the vehicle . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑68. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10‑24.
. Check the windshield washer last service. Reset the oil life . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on system when the oil is changed.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑32. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑32.
page 10‑16.

. Visually inspect windshield wiper . Check restraint system . Check parking brake and
blades for wear, cracking, components. See Safety System automatic transmission park
or contamination. See Exterior Check on page 3‑16. mechanism. See Park Brake and
Care on page 10‑97. Replace . Visually inspect fuel system for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
worn or damaged wiper blades. damage or leaks. page 10‑37.
See Wiper Blade Replacement . Check accelerator pedal for
on page 10‑38. . Visually inspect exhaust system
and nearby heat shields for damage, high effort, or binding.
. Check tire inflation pressures. loose or damaged parts. Replace if needed.
See Tire Pressure on . Visually inspect gas strut for
page 10‑62. . Lubricate body components. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑97. signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire damage. Check the hold open
Inspection on page 10‑68. . Check starter switch. See Starter ability of the strut. See your
Switch Check on page 10‑36. dealer if service is required.
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
.
. Check automatic transmission . Check tire sealant expiration
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. shift lock control function. See
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter date, if equipped. See Tire
Automatic Transmission Shift Sealant and Compressor Kit on
(Except ZL1) on page 10‑18 or Lock Control Function Check on
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1 page 10‑78.
page 10‑37. .
Only) on page 10‑19. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
. Check ignition transmission lock.
. Inspect brake system. if equipped. See Sunroof on
See Ignition Transmission Lock page 2‑17.
. Visually inspect steering, Check on page 10‑37.
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of
wear. See Exterior Care on
page 10‑97.

Footnotes — Maintenance c) Or every four years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Normal d) Or every five years, whichever
a) Or every two years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System
comes first. More frequent (Except ZL1 Engines) on
replacement may be needed if the page 10‑20 or Cooling System (ZL1
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy Engine Only) on page 10‑22 or
traffic, areas with poor air quality, Cooling System (Intercooler) on
or areas with high dust levels. page 10‑23.
Replacement may also be needed if e) Or every 10 years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive window fogging, or odors. excessive cracking, or damage;
b) Check all fuel and vapor lines replace, if needed.
and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.

Footnotes — Maintenance d) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System
Services — Severe (Except ZL1 Engines) on Services
a) Or every two years, whichever page 10‑20 or Cooling System . Vehicles with manual
comes first. (ZL1 Engine Only) on page 10‑22 or
transmissions: Every two years
Cooling System (Intercooler) on
b) Check all fuel and vapor lines drain, flush, and fill clutch
page 10‑23.
and hoses for proper hook‐up, hydraulic system.
routing, and condition. Check that e) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
the purge valve, if the vehicle has comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
one, works properly. Replace as excessive cracking, or damage;
components every 5 000 km/
needed. replace, if needed.
3,000 mi.
c) Or every four years, whichever . Have underbody flushing service
comes first. performed once a year.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended that the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
your dealer perform these the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
services — their trained dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
technicians know your vehicle best. corrosion‐free.
Fluids
Your dealer can also perform a Belts
thorough assessment with a Proper fluid levels and approved
multi‐point inspection to recommend . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
when your vehicle may need squeak or show signs of and components. See
attention. The following list is cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
intended to explain the services and . Trained dealer technicians Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
conditions to look for that may can inspect the belts and approved fluids.
indicate services are required. recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts Tires

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated,
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and
With a multi‐point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure.
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more
Lamps tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord
. As part of the multi‐point or fabric showing through the
Properly working headlamps, rubber; cracks or cuts in the
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
important to see and be seen on split in the tire.
the road. the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the right
attention include dimming, failure when service is needed. tires. Your dealer can also
to light, cracking, or damage. provide tire/wheel balancing
The brake lamps need to be services to ensure smooth
checked periodically to ensure vehicle operation at all speeds.
that they light when braking. Your dealer sells and services
. With a multi‐point inspection, name brand tires.
your dealer can check the lamps
and note any concerns.
Vehicle Care Windshield Wiper Blades

To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
available from your dealer. For clean and clear. provide a clear view.
information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
exterior, see Interior Care on and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
page 10‑101 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑97. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
Wheel Alignment if needed. replace them when needed.
Wheel alignment is critical for
ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle
handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑24.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 88862807).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Hydraulic Clutch System
Canada 88862807).
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89020661, in
Hydraulic Power Steering System
Canada 89021186).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Parking Brake Cable Guides
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission (V6 Engine) SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, in Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission (V8 Engine) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Automatic Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Transmission) Canada 89021678).
Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 89021677 and
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Manual
Friction Modifier 1052358, in Canada 89021678 and
Transmission)
Friction Modifier 992694).
Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 89021677 and
Rear Axle (SS) Friction Modifier 1052358, in Canada 89021678 and
Friction Modifier 992694).
Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 88862624, in
Rear Axle (ZL1)
Canada 88862625).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Door Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (except ZL1) 92196275 A3137C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1) 92229651 —
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129
6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 92234714 —
Spark Plugs
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
6.2L V8 Engine (L99 or LS3) 12621258 41-110
6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 12571165 41-104
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 92231676 —
Passenger Side 92231677 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6 Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Automatic Transmission 10.2 L 10.8 qt
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Manual Transmission 10.6 L 11.2 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (L99) Automatic Transmission 10.8 L 11.4 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (LS3) Manual Transmission 11.2 L 11.8 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 10.9 L 11.5 qt
Cooling System — Intercooler (ZL1) 2.3 L 2.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6.2L V8 Engine 7.6 L 8.0 qt
Fuel Tank 71.0 L 18.8 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Rear Axle Fluid
V6 Engine 6–Speed Automatic 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual* 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V8 Engine* (L99 or LS3) 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V8 Engine (LSA) 2.0 L 2.1 qt
Transmission Fluid
Automatic — V6 and V8 (Pan Removal and Filter
6.3 L 6.7 qt
Replacement)**
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt
V8 Engine SS 6–Speed Manual 3.9 L 4.2 qt
V8 Engine ZL1 6–Speed Manual 4.4 L 4.6 qt
12-4 Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Wheel Nut Torque
Wheel nuts with blue tint cone seats 150 Y 110 lb ft
Wheel nuts with silver tint cone seats 190 Y 140 lb ft
*Add 2.5 oz. (75 mL) of friction modifier to the specified quantity of axle lubricant.
**See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑17 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
3.6L V6 (LFX) 3 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
Manual
6.2L V8 (L99) J Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 (LS3) W Manual 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Automatic
6.2L V8 (LSA) P 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Manual
12-6 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.2L V8 Engines (LSA)

3.6L V6 Engine
6.2L V8 Engines (L99 or LS3)

Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-20 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Radio Frequency If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21 reviewed with the sales, service,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 of your dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
participation in a no-charge or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
Customer Assistance If you have a problem that has not STEP THREE
Procedure been satisfactorily handled through If your case is not resolved in a
the normal means, we suggest the reasonable amount of time by your
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are following steps:
very important to your dealer and dealer, please call the General
General Motors. STEP ONE Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
Normally, any problem with the Explain your case to your dealer following information:
transaction, sale, or usage of the service agent, service manager,
vehicle must be handled by your dealer sales agent, or sales . Name
dealer sales or service departments. manager, depending on your case. . Address
However, we recognize that despite Make sure that they have all
the good intentions of all parties
. Phone number
necessary information. They are
involved, sometimes a interested in your continual
. Model year
misunderstanding may occur. satisfaction. . Brand
STEP TWO . Vehicle Identification
If you are not satisfied, please Number (VIN)
contact the general manager or your . Mileage
dealership owner to ask for their . Delivery date
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the . Description of the problem
right people at General Motors for . Dealership name
support, if needed.
. Dealership address
See Customer Assistance Offices
Customer Assistance Offices
Customer Assistance Canada Mexico, Central America, and

Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Chevrolet encourages customers Virgin Islands)
CA1-163-005
to call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de
assistance. However, if a customer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V.
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
United States 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800
Center Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas Customer Assistance
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General Offices (Mexico)
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. To contact the Customer Assistance
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
Roadside Assistance: numbers listed in this section.
1-800-243-8872 Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
From Puerto Rico: 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
1-800-496-9992 (English) 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
From U.S. Virgin Islands: Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
1-800-496-9994
Mexico Customer Assistance for Online Owner Center

From Mexico City Text Telephone (TTY) Manage your vehicle (U.S.) at
5329-0811 Users (U.S. and Canada) chevrolet.com. Click on
From Other Mexico Locations To assist customers who are deaf, “Owners,” then “Manage My
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Chevrolet/Owners Login.”
01-800-466-0811 and who use Text Telephones Information and services
United States and Canada (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY customized for your specific
equipment available at its Customer vehicle — all in one convenient
1-866-466-8190 Assistance Center. Any TTY place.
Costa Rica user in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
. Digital owner manual, warranty
00-800-052-1005 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in information, and more.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. . Storage for online service and
Guatemala
maintenance records.
1-800-999-5252 . Chevrolet dealer locator for
Panama service nationwide.
00-800-052-0001 . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Dominican Republic
. Recall notices for your specific
vehicle.
1-888-751-5301
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
El Salvador Services Earnings summaries.
800-6273 Other Helpful Links
Honduras Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
800-0122-6101
Chevrolet Merchandise —
. Download the owner manual for For more information on the limited
www.chevymall.com your vehicle, quickly and easily. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
. Find the call the GM Mobility Assistance
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do Chevrolet-recommended Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
maintenance services for your Telephone (TTY) users, call
. FAQ vehicle. 1-800-833-9935.
. Contact Us General Motors of Canada also
Chevrolet Owner Centre
GM Mobility has a Mobility Program. Call
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
(U.S. and Canada) 1-800-263-3830.
Centre:
. Chat live with online help Roadside Assistance
representatives. Program (U.S. and
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Canada)
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone
This program is available to (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
. Locate owner resources such as
qualified applicants for cost For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
lease-end, financing, and
reimbursement of eligible call 1-800-268-6800.
warranty information.
aftermarket adaptive equipment
. Retrieve your favorite articles, required for the vehicle, such as Service is available 24 hours a day,
quizzes, tips and multimedia hand controls or a wheelchair/ 365 days a year.
galleries organized into the scooter lift for the vehicle.
Features and Auto Care
Sections.
Calling for Assistance Coverage Services Provided

When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/ . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever Delivery of enough fuel for the
ready: comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the service station.
home telephone number. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock‐Out Service: Service to
. Telephone number of your person driving the vehicle without unlock the vehicle if you are
location. permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock may
covered. be available if you have OnStar.
. Location of the vehicle. For security reasons, the driver
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
. Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. must present identification
plate number of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of before this service is given.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow from a Public
Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to the
delivery date of the vehicle. the Roadside Assistance program at nearest Chevrolet dealer for
any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle
. Description of the problem. was in a crash and cannot be
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to driven. Assistance is also given
limit services or payment to an when the vehicle is stuck in the
owner or driver if they decide the sand, mud, or snow.
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles Assistance: Must be over
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, 250 kilometers from where your
must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement trip was started to qualify.
properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian. General Motors of Canada
responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be Limited requires
replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, original
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through detailed receipts, and a copy of
this service. the repair orders. Once
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle authorization has been received,
registration is required. the Roadside Assistance advisor
Services Not Included in will help to make arrangements
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed and explain how to receive
Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are payment.
. Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
. Alternative Service: If
most scenic route. There is a assistance cannot be provided
. Legal fines. right away, the Roadside
limit of six requests per year.
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is Assistance advisor may give
or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three permission to get local
chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery. emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
. Towing or services for vehicles
after sending the original receipt
driven on a non-public road or
to Roadside Assistance.
highway.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Roadside Assistance This program expires two years
Delivery of enough fuel for the
from the date of the invoice for the
Program (Mexico) vehicle, regardless of vehicle vehicle to get to the nearest
As a new owner, your vehicle is mileage and changes in vehicle service station.
automatically enrolled in the ownership. . Lock-Out Service: Service to
Roadside Assistance program. The For more information about the unlock the vehicle if you are
services are available at no cost renewal of this program at the end locked out.
under the terms and conditions of of its term, contact the Chevrolet
the program. The Roadside
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
Customer Assistance Center at jump start a dead battery.
Assistance program is not part of, 01-800-466-0800.
or included, in the coverage . *Emergency Messages:
provided by the New Vehicle Limited Services Provided Transmission of urgent phone
Warranty. . Flat Tire Change: If unable to messages.
Roadside Assistance provides change a flat tire, Roadside . *Emergency Calls: Call for
assistance to the driver and Assistance will provide towing emergency services.
passengers while driving the vehicle service to the nearest authorized . *Dealership Location
within your city of residence or on Chevrolet dealership. It is the
Assistance: Information
any passable road in Mexico, the owner's responsibility for the
regarding addresses and
United States, and Canada. repair or replacement of the tire.
telephone numbers for Chevrolet
Services are subject to the This service is limited to the
dealers.
limitations described in the following transfer of the vehicle to the
pages. Program coverage varies by repair facility.
country.
Roadside Assistance is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to the If the vehicle cannot be received and prior to confirmation by the
nearest dealer for warranty by the nearest Chevrolet dealer dealership, you are entitled to
service if the vehicle cannot be due to scheduling conflicts, the choose one of the following
driven. vehicle will be taken to a safe alternatives, within the limits of
If the vehicle is involved in an place where it will remain for up existing Roadside Assistance
accident during the commission to 48 hours until it can be taken program guidelines. If the costs
of a crime, administrative to the dealer. If the storage costs exceed the amount authorized
violation, or breach of traffic exceed the amount authorized, for these services, you must pay
regulations, Roadside the owner is responsible to pay the difference at the time of
Assistance will not provide the difference at the time of service.
service. When the vehicle is not service. Contact Roadside Roadside Assistance
accessible to be towed, all Assistance for more information will coordinate hotel
maneuvers required to access it on authorized amounts. accommodations for all vehicle
will be at the owner's expense. . *Trip Interruption: This service travelers for up to two nights.
If the vehicle is in another city is provided if you are prevented A rental car will be provided for
outside of your residence, from further usage of your up to two days and the vehicle
Roadside Assistance is limited vehicle while traveling and it is must be returned to its original
to moving the vehicle to the not possible for the nearest destination, excluding vehicles
nearest dealer. If you would like Chevrolet dealership to repair with a carrying capacity greater
the vehicle moved to a different the vehicle the same day, than 3.5 tons.
dealer, you will be asked to requiring the vehicle to stay at
cover the difference in cost at the dealership for a night or
the time of the move. more. If this happens, in addition
to the previously listed services
Complimentary Transportation: If
. *Complimentary Services Not Included in Roadside
you prefer to continue your trip Transportation for Vehicle Pick Assistance
to the intended destination or Up: Transportation to pick up
your vehicle after repairs are Roadside Assistance does not
return to your place of cover or reimburse services for the
residence, and the trip requires complete. Once the dealer has
reported that the vehicle has following:
more than eight hours driving on
the road, transportation for the been repaired, Roadside . Events caused by fraud or bad
driver and passengers by first Assistance will provide bus or faith by the driver.
class bus or coach commercial commercial airline one-way . Vehicle immobilization situations
airline will be provided to a service (subject to availability)
due to a major force or
location chosen by Roadside for the person designated by you
unforeseen circumstances, such
Assistance, depending on to collect your vehicle at the
as natural phenomena of an
availability at the chosen dealership's location if you or the
extraordinary nature,
destination. Restrictions apply designated person are not in the
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
based on vehicle specifications. same town or city as the
and other cyclonic storms.
dealership.
If you are on the road, taxi . Vehicle immobilization situations
service to the nearest bus *These services are not provided for
arising from car accidents
station or airport will be U.S. or Canada residents. All
caused by the driver of the
provided. services provided in the U.S. and
vehicle or third parties. This
Canada are at the owner's expense
means any occurrence that
and will be reimbursed by Roadside
causes physical injury to the
Assistance.
occupants and/or the vehicle
caused by external forces.
. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,
armed forces or police actions
which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.

. Food service, beverages,
telephone calls, or other extra
Contacting Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
costs. Accommodation costs Roadside Assistance services are of Appointments (U.S. and
apply only to Mexico per the no cost to you and available Canada)
terms and conditions of the 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance program. Costs are only incurred in situations When the vehicle requires warranty
that exceed the limits of the service, contact your dealer and
. Any damage to the vehicle program, some of which are listed request an appointment. By
without intent, derived from the previously in this section. scheduling a service appointment
services provided. and advising the service consultant
To contact Roadside Assistance by
. Cost of towing a trailer when of your transportation needs, your
phone, use the following numbers:
choosing a Chevrolet dealer that dealer can help minimize your
is nearest to the temporary Mexico inconvenience.
storage facility for the disabled 01-800-466-0800 If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
vehicle. into the service department
United States immediately, keep driving it until it
. Cost of all maneuvers required
to access the vehicle when it is 1-866-466-8901 can be scheduled for service,
not available to be towed. unless, of course, the problem is
Canada safety related. If it is, please call
. Cost of fuel provided. 1-800-268-6800 your dealership, let them know this,
Routine vehicle repair costs are not and ask for instructions.
E-mail
covered by the Roadside If your dealer requests you to bring
Assistance program. For more asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com the vehicle for service, you are
information, see your new vehicle Chevrolet reserves the right to make urged to do so as early in the work
warranty. any changes or discontinue the day as possible to allow for
Roadside Assistance program at same-day repair.
any time without notification.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Canada) completed while you wait. However, If the vehicle requires overnight
if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by transportation is used instead of
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation your dealer's shuttle service, the
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the expense must be supported by
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can offer original receipts and can only be up
program for vehicles with the one of the following: to the maximum amount allowed by
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service for U.S. customers, should you
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred arrange transportation through a
hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy friend or relative, limited
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable fuel
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your expenses may be available. Claim
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption amounts should reflect actual costs
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes and be supported by original
warranty repairs are required. one-way or round-trip shuttle service receipts. See your dealer for
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
part of the New Vehicle Limited or other transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Limited Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

Your dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
for an overnight warranty repair. the damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements will be parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the right to be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change, collisions.
minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are new
usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and parts made with the same materials
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its and construction methods as the
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. parts with which the vehicle was
usage beyond the completion of the originally built. Genuine GM
repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts Limited Warranty, and any vehicle Many insurance policies provide
may also be used for repair. These failure related to such parts is not reduced protection to the GM
parts are typically removed from covered by that warranty. vehicle by limiting compensation for
vehicles that were total losses in damage repairs through the use of
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility aftermarket collision parts. Some
parts being recycled are from GM also recommends that you insurance companies will not
undamaged sections of the vehicle. choose a collision repair facility that specify aftermarket collision parts.
A recycled original equipment GM meets your needs before you ever When purchasing insurance, we
part may be an acceptable choice to need collision repairs. Your dealer recommend that you ensure that the
maintain the vehicle's originally may have a collision repair center vehicle will be repaired with GM
designed appearance and safety with GM-trained technicians and original equipment collision parts.
performance; however, the history of state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If such insurance coverage is not
these parts is not known. Such parts able to recommend a collision repair available from your current
are not covered by the GM New center that has GM-trained insurance carrier, consider switching
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any technicians and comparable to another insurance carrier.
related failures are not covered by equipment. If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
that warranty. company may require you to have
Insuring the Vehicle
Aftermarket collision parts are also insurance that ensures repairs with
available. These are made by Protect your investment in the GM Genuine GM Original Equipment
companies other than GM and may vehicle with comprehensive and Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
not have been tested for the vehicle. collision insurance coverage. There Genuine Manufacturer replacement
As a result, these parts may fit are significant differences in the parts. Read the lease carefully, as
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ quality of coverage afforded by you may be charged at the end of
corrosion problems, and may not various insurance policy terms. the lease for poor quality repairs.
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
If there has been an injury, call . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
emergency services for help. Do not telephone number. In the event that the vehicle requires
leave the scene of a crash until all . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
matters have been taken care of. that you take an active role in its
. Owner name, address, and
Move the vehicle only if its position repair. If you have a pre-determined
puts you in danger, or you are telephone number. repair facility of choice, take the
instructed to move it by a police . Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
officer. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
Give only the necessary information required replacement collision parts
model year.
to police and other parties involved be original equipment parts, either
in the crash.
. Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
For emergency towing see recycled parts will not be covered by
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
. Insurance company and policy
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
section. the repair professional, and insist on
If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
Inflates? on page 3‑24. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Or write to:
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. Manual only. delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees. funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may call
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain
General Motors.
other information about
If NHTSA receives similar motor vehicle safety
complaints, it may open an from http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Center computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: data to help your dealer technician
CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio presets, seat positions, and . How fast the vehicle was
temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, pressing the Q button and
Important: EDR data is recorded if the vehicle is leased, with the speaking to an advisor. See OnStar
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response Overview on page 14‑1.
crash situation occurs; no data is to an official request by police or
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of Radio Frequency
driving conditions and no personal GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as Identification (RFID)
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. required by law. Data that GM RFID technology is used in some
However, other parties, such as collects or receives may also be vehicles for functions such as tire
law enforcement, could combine used for GM research needs or may pressure monitoring and ignition
the EDR data with the type of be made available to others for system security, as well as in
personally identifying data routinely research purposes, where a need is connection with conveniences such
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a as key fobs for remote door locking/
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar® door openers. RFID technology in
special equipment is required, and GM vehicles does not use or record
access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system personal information or link with any
needed. In addition to the vehicle other GM system containing
manufacturer, other parties, such as may also record data in crash or
near crash-like situations. The personal information.
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the OnStar Terms and Conditions
information if they have access to provides information on data
the vehicle or the EDR. collection and use and is available
Radio Frequency Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:
Statement
1. The device may not cause
This vehicle has systems that harmful interference.
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal 2. The device must accept any
Communications Commission (FCC) interference received, including
rules and with Industry Canada interference that may cause
Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310. undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview The OnStar system status light is

next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
OnStar Overview . Solid Green: System is ready.
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Services . Red: Indicates a problem.
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Push Q or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a (1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to an
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 comprehensive, in-vehicle system Advisor.
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Push X to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic . Make a call, end a call,
OnStar Additional Services. or answer an incoming call.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.
14-2 OnStar
Push Q to connect to a live OnStar Services Navigation

Advisor to: OnStar navigation requires the
. Verify account information or Emergency Directions and Connections
update contact information. With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get driving directions. Requires the built-in system can automatically Push Q to receive directions or
the available Directions and connect to help in a crash even if have them sent to the vehicle
Connections service plan. you cannot ask for it. navigation screen. Destinations can
. Receive On-Demand Push ] to connect to an also be forwarded to the vehicle
Diagnostics for a check on the Emergency Advisor. GPS from Google Maps™ or
vehicle’s key operating systems. technology is used to identify the MapQuest.com. The OnStar
vehicle location and can provide mapping database is continuously
. Receive Roadside Assistance. updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
critical information to emergency
Push ] to get a priority connection personnel. The Advisor is also coverage maps.
to an Emergency Advisor available trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
24/7 to: emergency situations.
. Get help for an emergency. 1. Push Q to connect to a live
. Be a Good Samaritan or
Security Advisor.
respond to an AMBER Alert. OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
. Get crisis assistance and
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
evacuation routes.
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the 4. Follow the voice-guided
vehicle doors remotely, if it is commands.
equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat Other Navigation Services

During a Planned Route 1. Push X. System responds:
Available from OnStar
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from Google
1. Push X. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
Maps and MapQuest.com to their
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say with the last direction given, then
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
“Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
screen-based navigation system.
responds: “Would you like to then a tone.
When ready, the directions will be
cancel route directions to your 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice downloaded to the vehicle.
destination?” commands.
Destination Download: Push Q,
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: Get My Destination then request the Advisor to
“OK, route canceled.” download directions to the
1. Push X. System responds:
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice navigation system in the vehicle.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
commands. After the call ends, push the “Go”
2. Say “Get my destination.” button on the navigation screen to
Route Preview System responds with miles to begin driving directions.
1. Push X. System responds: the destination, then responds
Destinations can also be
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Route Preview.” System 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice information about eNav, Destination
responds with the next three commands. Download, and coverage maps visit
maneuvers. www.onstar.com.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
14-4 OnStar
Connections Retrieve My Number 4. Pick a name tag. “System

responds: ”About to store
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows 1. Push X. System responds: <name tag>. Does that
calls to be made and received from “OnStar ready.” sound OK?”
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
2. Say “My Number.” System 5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.
controlled from a cell phone through
responds: “Your OnStar System responds: “OK, storing
the OnStar mobile app. See
Hands-Free Calling number is.” <name tag>.”
www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
Hands-Free Calling End a Call Place a Call Using a Stored
Push X. System responds: “Call Number
1. Push X. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
ended.” 1. Push X. System responds:
Store a Name Tag for Speed “OnStar ready.”
2. Say “Dial.” System responds:
“Please say the name or number Dialing 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
to call.” responds: “OK, calling
1. Push X. System responds: <name tag>.”
3. Say the entire number without “OnStar ready.”
pausing, including a “1” and the Verify Minutes and Expiration
area code. System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“OK calling.” “Please say the number you Push X and say “minutes” then
would like to store.” “verify” to check how many minutes
3. Say the entire number without remain and their expiration date.
pausing. System responds:
“Please say the name tag.”
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Mobile App OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

With an iPhone® or Information Automatic Crash Response,
Android™-based mobile device, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
an OnStar mobile app can be Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
downloaded. The vehicle can be Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
remote started, if equipped, or the Push Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
doors can be unlocked from eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
anywhere there is cell phone can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
service. It can also check the fuel account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
level, tire pressure, and oil life. receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
It can connect to an OnStar Advisor ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
anytime. For OnStar mobile app may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
compatibility or further information, vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
see www.onstar.com. information. conditions, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
Reactivation for Subsequent
Diagnostics Owners
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
perform a vehicle check every Push Q and follow the prompts to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push Q to
month. It will check the engine, speak to an Advisor as soon as speak with an Advisor. OnStar
transmission, antilock brakes, and possible after acquiring the vehicle. services require a vehicle electrical
major vehicle systems. It also The Advisor will update vehicle system, wireless service, and GPS
checks the tire pressures, if the records and will explain the OnStar satellite technologies to be available
vehicle is equipped with the Tire service offers and options available. and operating for features to
Pressure Monitoring System. If a function properly. These systems
diagnostics check is needed may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
between e-mails, push Q, and an
Advisor can run a check.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on TTY Users
your vehicle is in a place where page 13‑22 for information
OnStar has the ability to
OnStar has an agreement with a regarding Part 15 of the Federal
communicate to the deaf,
wireless service provider for service Communications Commission (FCC)
hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impaired
in that area, and the wireless rules and Industry Canada
customers while in the vehicle. The
service provider has coverage, Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
available dealer‐installed TTY
network capacity, reception, and
Services for People with system can provide in-vehicle
technology compatible with OnStar’s
Disabilities access to all of the OnStar services,
service. Service involving location
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot Advisors provide services to help Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation.
work unless GPS signals are subscribers with physical disabilities
available, unobstructed, and and medical conditions. Onstar.com
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. OnStar service may not Push Q for help with: The website provides access to
work if the OnStar equipment is not account information, manages the
. Locating a gas station with an OnStar subscription, and allows
properly installed or it has not been attendant to pump gas.
properly maintained. If equipment or viewing of videos of each service.
software is added, connected,
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., Get subscription plan pricing and
or modified, OnStar service may not that meets accessibility needs. sign up for OnStar Vehicle
work. Other problems beyond Diagnostics. Click on the
. Providing directions to the “My Account” tab on the
OnStar’s control may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in
service such as hills, tall buildings, home page.
urgent situations.
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle. after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. open area.
Global Positioning
Warranty System (GPS) Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the new-vehicle occur in a large city with tall antenna to prevent blocking cellular
limited warranty. The manufacturer buildings; in parking garages; and GPS signal reception. Cellular
of the vehicle furnishes detailed around airports; in tunnels, reception is required for OnStar to
warranty information. underpasses, or parking send remote signals to the vehicle.
garages; or in an area with very
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system
respond in French or Spanish. Push should still operate to call
Q and ask an Advisor. Advisors OnStar. However, OnStar could
can speak French or Spanish. have difficulty identifying the
exact location.
14-8 OnStar
Unable to Connect to OnStar Add-on Electrical Equipment Privacy

Message The OnStar system is integrated The complete OnStar Privacy
If there is limited cellular coverage into the electrical architecture of the Statement may be found at
or the cellular network has reached vehicle. Do not add any electrical www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
maximum capacity, this message equipment. See Add-On Electrical users of wireless communications
may come on. Push Q to try the Equipment on page 9‑68. Added are cautioned that the privacy of any
call again or try again after driving a electrical equipment may interfere information sent via wireless cellular
few miles into another cellular area. with the operation of the OnStar communications cannot be assured.
system and cause it to not operate. Third parties may unlawfully
Vehicle and Power Issues intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
OnStar services require a vehicle
consent.
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
to function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Assistance Program,

Adding Equipment to the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Audio System
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-29
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Add-On Electrical
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Diversity Antenna System . . . .7-14
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Additional Information,
Alarm System Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Cleaner/Filter,
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Automatic
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18, 10-19
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Antenna Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Airbag System
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Anti-theft Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-17
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Automatic Transmission
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Auxiliary
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Appearance Care Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
What Will You See after an
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Cautions, Danger, and

Headlamps, Front Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Turn Signal, and CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Parking Lamps . . . . . 10-42, 10-43 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
High Intensity Discharge Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-18
Voltage and Charging
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-46 Check
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-38
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Ignition
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-28
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-37
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Child Restraints
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-21 C Infants and Young
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
California Lower Anchors and
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Perchlorate Materials Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Cleaning
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Capacities and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Carbon Monoxide Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cover Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-15 Tonneau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Door
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-92 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-44 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-6
Competitive Driving, Racing Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Driver Information
or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Text Telephone (TTY) Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Driving
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Customer Information Characteristics and
Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Service Publications Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-18 Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Customer Satisfaction Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 D Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Coolant Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-15 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-10
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Danger, Warnings, and If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13
Engine Temperature Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-20 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cooling System . . . . 10-20, Daytime Running Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
10-22, 10-23 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44, 6-3
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Courtesy Transportation
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) F
Cooling
Electrical Equipment, Filter,
System . . . . . . . . . 10-20,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 Engine Air
10-22, 10-23
Electrical System Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18, 10-19
Cooling System Messages . . .5-37
Engine Compartment Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Fuses and Circuit Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Instrument Panel Fuse Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-103
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Fluid
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-17
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Rear Compartment Fuse Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Power Steering . . . . . . 10-31, 10-32
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Engine Fog Lamps
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-30
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-18, 10-19 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Check and Service Engine Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Oil
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Front Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Front Fog Lamp
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Coolant Temperature Front Seats
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-20
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 G General Information

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Filling a Portable Fuel Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Gasoline
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Gauges
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-57
Engine Coolant
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 H
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Oil Temperature . . . . . . .5-12
Requirements, California . . . . .9-57 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fuses Headlamps
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine Compartment Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Transmission Temperature . . . .5-14
Fuses and Circuit Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Daytime Running
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 10-44, 6-3
Warning Lights and
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Rear Compartment Fuse High Intensity Discharge
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
i-6 INDEX
Heater J LATCH System

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Replacing Parts after a
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-63 K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-39 Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-10 Keyless Entry Lighting
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 L Lights
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-56 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Lamps Antilock Brake System
I Daytime (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . 10-44, 6-3 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-21
Ignition Transmission Lock Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Headlamps, Front Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Infants and Young Children, Turn Signal, and Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Parking Lamps . . . . . 10-42, 10-43 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) Messages Mirrors

Traction Control OFF/ Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-43 Automatic Dimming
Traction Control System Battery Voltage and Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Locks Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Monitor System, Tire
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-37 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 N
Lower Anchors and Tethers Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Navigation
for Children (LATCH Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Object Detection System . . . . .5-40 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
M Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Maintenance
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 O
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Object Detection System
Maintenance Schedule Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Recommended Fluids Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18 Off-Road
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
i-8 INDEX
Oil Outlets Phone

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-28
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-16 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Power
Engine Oil Pressure Overview, Infotainment Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33 P Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-25
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Park Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
OnStar® Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 10-31, 10-32
Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Privacy
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Brake and P (Park) Radio Frequency
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-37 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-28 Program
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Passenger Airbag Status Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14
Operation, Infotainment Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Proposition 65 Warning,
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-25 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Ordering Perchlorate Materials
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
INDEX i-9
R Records Ride Control Systems

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-48
Racing or Other Competitive
Recreational Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Radio Frequency
Reimbursement Program, Roads
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-21
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roadside Assistance
Radios
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-10
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roof
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Running the Vehicle While
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Replacing LATCH System
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-54
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 S
Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Reporting Safety Defects Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Recommended
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19 How to Wear Safety Belts
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Recommended Fluids and
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16
Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
i-10 INDEX
Safety Defects Reporting Service Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-19 Accessories and StabiliTrak
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . 10-31, 10-32
Seats Publications Ordering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Storage
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Storage Areas
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Shift Lock Control Function Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Check, Automatic Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Securing Child Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49 Shifting Storing the Tire Sealant
Security Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-85
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Signals, Turn and Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-49 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Spare Tire Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Specifications and System
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont'd) Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Control OFF/StabiliTrak
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Sealant and OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-25
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-41
Taillamps
Sealant and Compressor Control System (TCS)/
Turn Signal and
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-48
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Summer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Terminology and Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-49
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Trailer
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Uniform Tire Quality Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Transmission
Tires
Wheel Alignment and Tire Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-75 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
When It Is Time for New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Transportation Program,
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Towing Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-62 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-65
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67 Turn and Lane-Change
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-96
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-64
i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle Care When It Is Time for New

Storing the Tire Sealant Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-52
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-85 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-40
Uniform Tire Quality
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Windshield
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
W Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
V Warning
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Vehicle Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-38
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Identification
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Wheels
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Alignment and Tire
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual (Include Mex) - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1

2012 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status To adjust each mirror:

Canada and Mexico

Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Exterior Lighting ; : Use to turn on the parking Windshield Wiper/Washer

3: Move the lever up to 3 for Climate Controls

9 : Use to turn the windshield

Transmission Electronic Range Select Manual Transmission

See Manual Mode on page 9‑34.

Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station 4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)

$ / i : Press to silence the Cruise Control \: Press to disengage cruise

Driver Information C. MENU: Press to display the Power Outlets

Ultrasonic Parking Assist The accessory power outlets do not

Universal Remote System Sunroof Express-open: Press and release

Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Replace the vehicle's tires with

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 Online Owner Center (U.S. and

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

With an active OnStar subscription,

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Vehicle

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Doors WARNING (Continued)

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Emergency Trunk Release 3. Firmly turn the key clockwise to

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Vehicle Security Arming the System How the System Alarm is

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Power Windows Window Indexing

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Express Window Operation Express Window Anti-Pinch Express Window Anti-Pinch

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

Programming the Power Roof Express-open: Press and release

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

4. Remove all objects on or above If the convertible top is operated

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

Notice: If you raise the top 7. After the convertible top is